UniPoint™ LC System Software

Version 5.1
User’s Guide

©2003 Gilson, Inc. All rights reserved 350003-01

Table of Contents

1 Getting Started with UniPoint

Before You Begin .................................................................. 1-2
Installing UniPoint .............................................................. 1-3
Starting UniPoint ................................................................. 1-4
After Startup .................................................................. 1-4
If the Software Fails to Start ....................................... 1-5
Overview of UniPoint ......................................................... 1-6
Default Folders and File Organization ..................... 1-8
Getting Help .......................................................................... 1-9
UniPoint Technical Notes ............................................ 1-10

2 System Configuration
Setting Up Configuration File(s) ....................................... 2-2
Scanning the GSIOC for Instruments ....................... 2-3
Setting Configurations for Multiple Systems ........... 2-5
Working with Configuration Files .................................... 2-8
Reviewing the Configuration File .............................. 2-8
Modifying the Configuration File .............................. 2-9
Searching for the Configuration File ......................... 2-12
Specifying System Units ............................................... 2-13
Saving Changes to the Configuration File ............... 2-13
Configuration Checks .................................................. 2-14
3 Creating a Control Method
Control Method Window ................................................... 3-2
Menu Bar ........................................................................ 3-3
Table Pane ...................................................................... 3-4
Graph Pane .................................................................... 3-4
Toolbar ............................................................................ 3-4
Annotation Box ............................................................. 3-6
Legend Box ..................................................................... 3-6
Status Bar ........................................................................ 3-6
Right-Click Menu .......................................................... 3-7
Setting Device Properties and Options ............................ 3-8
Review Pump Descriptions and Set Parameters ..... 3-8
Assign Data Channel Descriptions ........................... 3-9
Scheduling Timed Events ................................................... 3-11
Adding Event ................................................................. 3-13
Deleting Event ............................................................... 3-13
Modifying Event ............................................................ 3-14
Exiting Dialog ................................................................ 3-14
Variables ................................................................................ 3-15
If You Add, Change, or Delete Variable Names ..... 3-17
Device Error Handling ........................................................ 3-18
Activating Error Handling .......................................... 3-18
Specifying Custom Commands ......................................... 3-29
Save and Close Control Method ....................................... 3-31
Checking and Controlling Instruments ........................... 3-32
Check Control Method ................................................ 3-33
Check Communication ................................................ 3-34
Optionally Start Flow ................................................... 3-36
Autozero Detector ........................................................ 3-37
Start Strip Chart ............................................................ 3-38
Exit Operations Window ............................................. 3-39
4 Creating an Analysis Method
Analysis Method Window ................................................. 4-2
Menu Bar ........................................................................ 4-3
Table Pane ...................................................................... 4-4
Graph Pane .................................................................... 4-4
Toolbar ............................................................................ 4-5
Annotation Box ............................................................. 4-6
Legend Box ..................................................................... 4-6
Status Bar ........................................................................ 4-6
Setting Analysis Conditions ............................................... 4-7
Integration Events ......................................................... 4-8
Channel Scales ............................................................... 4-15
Peak Table ....................................................................... 4-20
Retention Time Windows ................................................... 4-30
Setting Time Window Parameters ............................. 4-31
Resolving Overlapping Windows .............................. 4-32
Using the Peak Table During Data Analysis .................. 4-33
Reasons for Missing Peaks ........................................... 4-33
Locating Reference Peaks ............................................ 4-34
Locating Non-Reference Peaks ................................... 4-35
Updating Peak Retention Times ................................. 4-36
Generating a Calibration Table ......................................... 4-37
Additional Peak Options ............................................. 4-39
Background Removal ................................................... 4-40
Producing Reports ........................................................ 4-41
Report Type .................................................................... 4-42
Report Output ............................................................... 4-48
Report Format Review and Modification ................. 4-53
Report Customization .................................................. 4-58
Variables ......................................................................... 4-65
Error Handling .............................................................. 4-68
5 Creating an Operations List
Operations Window ............................................................ 5-2
Menu Bar ........................................................................ 5-3
Table Pane ...................................................................... 5-3
Graph Pane .................................................................... 5-4
Toolbar ............................................................................ 5-4
Legend Box ..................................................................... 5-5
Status Box ....................................................................... 5-6
Right-Click Menu .......................................................... 5-6
Annotation Box ............................................................. 5-7
Status Bar ........................................................................ 5-7
Setting Up an Operations List ........................................... 5-8
Before Creating List ...................................................... 5-9
Using Express Entry Dialog for List Setup ............... 5-10
Using Step Entry Dialog for List
Setup and Modification ............................................... 5-13
Using the Tray File to Generate
the Operations List ........................................................ 5-18
Setting Up Operations List for
Fraction Collection ........................................................ 5-20
Example 1 ....................................................................... 5-21
Example 2 ....................................................................... 5-21
Example 3 ....................................................................... 5-22
Generating Operations List When
Re-Injecting Collected Fractions ................................. 5-23
Modifying the Operations List .......................................... 5-25
Exporting and Importing an Operations List .......... 5-25
Reviewing Where Run-Generated
Files Are Stored .............................................................. 5-26
6 Starting an Operations List
Method Executor ................................................................. 6-2
Manually Starting the Method Executor .................. 6-3
Starting a Run ...................................................................... 6-4
During the Run .................................................................... 6-5
Status Box ....................................................................... 6-5
Table Pane ...................................................................... 6-5
Graph Pane .................................................................... 6-5
Status Bar ........................................................................ 6-5
Manipulating Run-Time Graph ........................................ 6-6
Zooming .......................................................................... 6-6
Moving Plot Along X-Axis .......................................... 6-8
Finding Peak Information ............................................ 6-8
Returning X- and Y-Axes to
Control Method Settings .............................................. 6-8
Removing/Replacing Traces and
Symbols from Display ................................................. 6-9
Displaying/Removing Gridlines ................................ 6-9
Interrupting a Run .............................................................. 6-10
Pause Run ....................................................................... 6-10
Stop Flow ........................................................................ 6-10
Stop Run ......................................................................... 6-11
Resuming a Run After Termination ................................. 6-12
After the Run ........................................................................ 6-15
Status of UniPoint ......................................................... 6-15
Shutting Down the HPLC System ............................. 6-16
Viewing Log File ............................................................ 6-17

7 Manual HPLC System Control

Manual Control Method .................................................... 7-2
Modifying the Control Method .................................. 7-3
Control of Mobile Phase Pumps
and Manometric Module ................................................... 7-4
Zeroing the Manometric Module ............................... 7-5
Controlling the Pumps ................................................. 7-6
Strip Chart Control ............................................................. 7-8
Contact Control ................................................................... 7-11
Control of Injector, Detector, Collector,
and Other Devices ............................................................... 7-12
GSIOC Command Strings .................................................. 7-13
8 Results
Results Window ................................................................... 8-2
Menu Bar ........................................................................ 8-3
Table Pane ...................................................................... 8-4
Graph Pane .................................................................... 8-5
Legend Box ..................................................................... 8-5
Summary Graph ............................................................ 8-5
Toolbar ............................................................................ 8-6
Annotation Box ............................................................. 8-7
Status Bar ........................................................................ 8-7
Opening Report and Data Files ........................................ 8-8
Selecting Report File Information to View ............... 8-8
Selecting Data File Information to View .................. 8-11
Locating and Opening a Data File
Using Sample Description ........................................... 8-18
Overlaying (or Merging) Additional
Chromatogram Data .................................................... 8-20
Analyzing Data or Analyzing it in a Different Way .... 8-24
Linking to an Analysis Method .................................. 8-24
Linking to a Calibration File ....................................... 8-27
Linking to a Control Method ...................................... 8-29
Manipulating Graph and Table ........................................ 8-31
Viewing and Scaling Techniques in Graph Pane ... 8-31
Peak Integration Techniques ....................................... 8-38
Generating New Report File
(Non-ERM Environment Only) ......................................... 8-44
Comparison Commands .................................................... 8-45
Subtracting Two Traces ............................................... 8-45
Dividing Two Traces .................................................... 8-46
Removing Shift from a Trace ...................................... 8-48
Normalizing Traces ...................................................... 8-48
9 Calibrations
Calibration Window ........................................................... 9-2
Menu Bar ........................................................................ 9-2
Table Pane ...................................................................... 9-3
Graph Pane .................................................................... 9-3
Toolbar ............................................................................ 9-4
Legend Box ..................................................................... 9-5
Annotation Box ............................................................. 9-5
Status Bar ........................................................................ 9-5
Building Calibrations .......................................................... 9-6
Viewing Calibrations .......................................................... 9-7
Opening File ................................................................... 9-7
Determining Area (or Height) at
Given Point on Curve ................................................... 9-8
Changing Curve Fitting Method ................................ 9-9
Zooming .......................................................................... 9-9
Getting File Information for a Repeat ....................... 9-10
Disabling/Restoring Repeats ...................................... 9-10
Displaying/Removing Gridlines ................................ 9-11
Selecting Another Peak ................................................ 9-11
Selecting Another Calibration .................................... 9-12
Merging Calibrations .......................................................... 9-13
Error Messages ..................................................................... 9-14
10 Batch Re-Analysis Processing
Description ............................................................................ 10-1
Re-Analysis Window .......................................................... 10-3
Menu Bar ........................................................................ 10-4
Table Pane ...................................................................... 10-4
Graph Pane .................................................................... 10-5
Legend Box ..................................................................... 10-5
Right-Click Menu .......................................................... 10-5
Toolbar ............................................................................ 10-6
Status Box ....................................................................... 10-7
Annotation Box ............................................................. 10-7
Status Bar ........................................................................ 10-7
Setting Up a Re-Analysis List ............................................ 10-8
Before Creating or Modifying the List ....................... 10-8
Using Express Entry Dialog for List Setup ............... 10-10
Using Step Entry Dialog for List
Setup and Modification ............................................... 10-13
Indicating Baseline Adjustment ........................................ 10-18
Reviewing Where Files are Stored .................................... 10-19
Previewing the Re-Analysis ............................................... 10-22
Executing the Re-Analysis ................................................. 10-23
Resuming a Re-Analysis After Termination ................... 10-25
11 Routines and Protocols
Protocols ................................................................................ 11-2
Routines ................................................................................. 11-3
Injector Folders ..................................................................... 11-5
INJ_RP Folder ................................................................ 11-5
INJ_215 Folder ............................................................... 11-7
INJ_235 Folder ............................................................... 11-10
INJ_235S Folder ............................................................. 11-11
INJ_235T Folder ............................................................ 11-12
INJ_MIC Folder ............................................................. 11-13
INJ_MICT Folder ........................................................... 11-14
INJ_MUL Folder ............................................................ 11-15
INJ215SW Folder ........................................................... 11-16
INJ_845Z Folder ............................................................ 11-17
Using Pre-Stored Routines and Protocols ....................... 11-18
Special Considerations when
Using Pre-Stored Routines and Protocols ................. 11-18
Using Any of the Pre-Stored Injector
Protocol Files without Modifications ......................... 11-20
Routines ................................................................................. 11-24
Make a New Injector Routine by
Modifying an Existing Routine ................................... 11-24
Make a New Injector Routine Using Commands ... 11-26
Protocols ................................................................................ 11-27
Make a New Injector Protocol
from an Existing Protocol ............................................ 11-27
Make a New Injector Protocol
Using Routines and/or Commands .......................... 11-28
Control Methods and Operations Lists ........................... 11-30
Using a New or Modified Protocol
in an Existing Control Method ................................... 11-30
Using a New or Modified Protocol
in a New Control Method ........................................... 11-31
12 Tray Editor
Starting the Tray Editor ...................................................... 12-2
Tray Editor Window ........................................................... 12-3
Menu Bar ........................................................................ 12-4
Template ......................................................................... 12-4
Toolbar ............................................................................ 12-5
Status Bar ........................................................................ 12-6
Setting Up a Tray File ......................................................... 12-7
Choosing a Template .................................................... 12-7
Defining Racks ............................................................... 12-9
Setting Up and Modifying Zone Names ................... 12-12
Assigning Zone and Number to Tubes ..................... 12-14
Viewing Techniques ............................................................ 12-19
Determining Tube Status ............................................. 12-19
Scrolling Through Zones ............................................. 12-19
Getting Tube Information ............................................ 12-20
Getting Template and Rack Information .................. 12-20
Enlarging/Reducing Size of the Template ............... 12-21
Turning Off/On Toolbar ............................................. 12-21
Turning Off/On Status Bar ......................................... 12-21
Managing Tray Files ............................................................ 12-22
Saving a File ................................................................... 12-22
Opening a File ................................................................ 12-22
Making a Copy of a File ............................................... 12-23
Deleting a File ................................................................ 12-23
Printing Tray Files ............................................................... 12-24
Previewing What is Printed ........................................ 12-24
Identifying Custom Racks and Tubes .............................. 12-25
Indicating Rack Placement for Custom Tray ........... 12-25
Indicating Tube Placement for Custom Rack .......... 12-27
Quitting the Tray Editor ..................................................... 12-29

13 Extract, Import, and Export Features

Extracting Archived Information ..................................... 13-2
Extractable Files ............................................................. 13-3
Importing Data .................................................................... 13-4
Viewing Chromatogram
from Non-Gilson Detector ........................................... 13-4
Exporting Data and Reports ............................................. 13-5
Exporting Chromatogram Data ................................. 13-5
Exporting Report Information .................................... 13-8
Exporting Calibration Information ............................ 13-10
14 Common Procedures
Using the Navigator ............................................................ 14-2
Turning Navigator Off/On ......................................... 14-3
Redisplaying the Navigator ......................................... 14-3
Specifying the Default Font for Document Windows .. 14-4
Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes .................... 14-5
Displaying the Table If It Is Not Shown ................... 14-6
Displaying the Graph Pane If It Is Not Visible ........ 14-6
Sizing the Table and Graph ........................................ 14-7
Sizing and Moving a Summary Graph ..................... 14-9
Setting Column Attributes .......................................... 14-10
Manipulating Table Rows ........................................... 14-15
Changing the Font ........................................................ 14-17
Setting Graph Attributes ............................................. 14-18
Finding and Replacing Information .......................... 14-22
Legend ............................................................................. 14-24
Annotation ............................................................................ 14-25
Displaying and Removing Annotation ..................... 14-25
Sizing or Moving Annotation Box ............................. 14-26
Changing Font ............................................................... 14-27
Copying Text .................................................................. 14-27
Manipulating the Toolbar .................................................. 14-28
Selecting Defaults .......................................................... 14-28
Removing Toolbar ......................................................... 14-29
Sizing and Moving Toolbar ......................................... 14-29
Displaying Tool Hints ................................................... 14-29
Using the Notes or Log File Text Editor .......................... 14-30
Customizing the UniPoint Workspace ............................ 14-31
Arranging Elements in a Workspace ........................ 14-32
Saving a Workspace ..................................................... 14-33
Opening a Workspace File .......................................... 14-34
Printing .................................................................................. 14-35
Selecting What to Print and Starting the Print ........ 14-35
Getting Software Version Number ................................... 14-37
15 Fraction Collector Control
HPLC Connections .............................................................. 15-2
UniPoint Setup ..................................................................... 15-3
Configuration ................................................................. 15-3
Control Method ............................................................. 15-4
Tray File .......................................................................... 15-9
Analysis Method ........................................................... 15-10
Operations List .............................................................. 15-12
Output ............................................................................. 15-16

16 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features

UniPoint Log On .................................................................. 16-2
Log Off (not present for first log on) ......................... 16-2
Emergency Stop (not present for first log on) .......... 16-2
Choose Group and Level ............................................. 16-3
System Lock .................................................................... 16-3
Legacy File Conversion from Version 3.0–3.3 ................ 16-4
File Conversion Instructions ....................................... 16-4
System Administration ....................................................... 16-6
Modify ERM Settings .................................................... 16-8
View ERM Settings ....................................................... 16-26
Electronic Record Information .......................................... 16-31
Electronic Record Management Menu ............................ 16-33
Version ............................................................................ 16-33
Submit ............................................................................. 16-35
Review ............................................................................. 16-37
Approve .......................................................................... 16-39
Record Lock .................................................................... 16-41
Record Unlock ............................................................... 16-43
Reject Record ................................................................. 16-45
Audit ................................................................................ 16-47
Changes to Existing Dialogs .............................................. 16-48
Open Dialog ................................................................... 16-48
Default System Configuration Dialog ....................... 16-50

Appendix A Sample Tracking

Before the Run ...................................................................... A-2
Injector Protocol/Routines File ................................... A-2
Control Method ............................................................. A-4
Analysis Method ........................................................... A-7
After the Run ........................................................................ A-8
Appendix B File Extensions

Appendix C Calculations
Amount ................................................................................. C-1
Amount % ............................................................................. C-3
Area % ................................................................................... C-3
Asymmetry ........................................................................... C-3
Back Resolution .................................................................... C-3
Back Slope ............................................................................. C-3
Capacity Factor .................................................................... C-4
Coefficient of Determination ............................................. C-4
Coefficient of Variation ...................................................... C-4
Correlation Coefficient ....................................................... C-4
End Value .............................................................................. C-4
Front Resolution ................................................................... C-4
Front Slope ............................................................................ C-4
Height .................................................................................... C-5
Height % ................................................................................ C-5
Mean ...................................................................................... C-5
Peak Start Time .................................................................... C-5
Peak End Time ..................................................................... C-5
Peak Width at Half Height ................................................ C-6
Peak Width at 10% .............................................................. C-6
Plates ...................................................................................... C-6
% Concentration .................................................................. C-6
Retention Time ..................................................................... C-6
Standard Deviation ............................................................. C-7
Standard Error of Estimate ................................................ C-7
Start Value ............................................................................ C-7
Tailing Factor ........................................................................ C-7

Appendix D GSIOC Utility

Starting the GSIOC Utility ................................................. D-2
Using the GSIOC Utility ..................................................... D-3
Reviewing the Port, IRQ, and Baud Information ... D-3
Listing GSIOC Instruments ......................................... D-3
Sending Commands ..................................................... D-4

Appendix E GSIOC Configuration Editor

Appendix F Gilson Executable (.GEX) File

Example ................................................................................. F-5
Appendix G UniPoint File Protection
Setting Up File Protection .................................................. G-2
Indicating New Password ........................................... G-3
Removing Password Protection ........................................ G-4

Appendix H UniPoint Software History

Getting Started with UniPoint 1

This section describes how to install the Gilson UniPoint™ LC System Software Version 5.1
and its supporting files and how to start the software.

1-1
 Getting Started with UniPoint 1

Before You Begin

Before You Begin

Before installing UniPoint, verify that the computer

to be used adheres to the computer requirements
listed in the UniPoint™ LC System Software Version
5.1 Pre-Installation Instructions (document number
319189) that you received after you ordered the
software.

Verify that the UniPoint security key is in place. The

key must be installed in the Key port of a Gilson
506C System Interface. Refer to the 506C System
Interface User’s Guide (part number LT3635) if
necessary.

Note: Your system must include a 506C System

Interface, and the key must be installed in its Key
port, to run UniPoint.

1-2
Getting Started with UniPoint 1

Installing UniPoint

Installing UniPoint
UniPoint is being supplied on a CD-ROM. You can
install UniPoint on a computer’s fixed disk or on a
network drive so multiple computers can access it.

To install the software:

1 Verify that the installer is logged on as an

administrator.

Important! Additionally, for Windows® 2000

users who will use the Electronic Record
Management (ERM) features, the Act as part of
the operating system policy must be included
for each user when assigning user rights.

2 Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive.

3 If the setup program does not auto launch,

browse for SETUP.EXE on the CD.

4 Follow the on-screen instructions to install the

software.

When the installation is complete, remove the CD

from the CD-ROM drive.

1-3
 Getting Started with UniPoint 1

Starting UniPoint
Starting UniPoint

To start UniPoint, click on Start—Gilson

Applications—UniPoint —UniPoint from your
windows task bar.

After Startup
If this is the first time the software has been started,
you will see the following message box that tells you
that the software is going to create a necessary
permissions file.

Then you will see the following message box that

tells you that the software is going to scan the Gilson
Serial Input/Output Channel (GSIOC). See Setting
Up Configuration File(s) on page 2-2.

1-4
Getting Started with UniPoint 1

You will also see the Navigator window open

Starting UniPoint
within the UniPoint window (see below). The
Navigator enables you to quickly select the part of
UniPoint to use. For more information on the
Navigator, see page 14-2.

If the Software Fails to Start

If the software does not start, check if the security
key is missing; install it in the Key port of a Gilson
506C System Interface. Refer to the 506C System
Interface User’s Guide (part number LT3635), if
necessary.

1-5
 Getting Started with UniPoint 1

Overview of UniPoint
Overview of UniPoint

UniPoint is a PC-based software for multiple HPLC

system control, data acquisition, data storage, and
data analysis. It is a powerful software program that
provides complete control of all system components
and even allows for custom hardware configuration.

UniPoint is divided into these function-specific

sections:

• control methods
• analysis methods
• operations lists
• results
• calibrations
• re-analysis lists
• protocols and routines

Each of these sections has its own window for

specifying run-time or post-run options or for
viewing chromatographic results. More than one
window of the same type or of different types can be
open at the same time.

Even though the software is separated into several

sections, the parts are interdependent. Information set
in one window may be used in or required by another
window for proper operation. You use different
windows depending on what you want to do.

As the diagram on the next page shows, before a

run, you set up information in Control Method,
Analysis Method, and Operations windows, and
optionally in the Protocol and Routines windows.

1-6
Getting Started with UniPoint 1

Overview of UniPoint

To start a run and view run-time information, you

use the Operations window.

After the run, use the Results and Calibration

windows to view acquired data and analysis report
information.

To batch analyze collected data to generate reports

and calibration plots, use the Re-Analysis window.
1-7
 Getting Started with UniPoint 1

UniPoint 5.1 continues to support the following

Overview of UniPoint

discontinued instruments:

• 116 UV Detector
• 122 Fluorometer/606 Converter
• 231 Autoinjector
• 232 Auto Injector
• 302 Pump
• 303 Pump
• 401 Dilutor
• 817 Valve Actuator

They are not, however, supported in this

documentation. Please refer to your original
UniPoint user’s guide for information on controlling
these instruments.

Default Folders and File Organization

The diagram below shows the default locations to
which UniPoint and files created by it are stored,
unless changed by you during installation or when
operating the software.

1-8
Getting Started with UniPoint 1

Getting Help

Getting Help
On-line help comes with UniPoint. You can display
the on-line help any time you’re using the software.
The on-line help describes the commands and
dialogs available in the software and discusses the
procedures needed to perform tasks.

You can access on-line help in the following ways:

• By selecting Contents from the Help menu.

• By moving the mouse cursor over a button in the

UniPoint toolbar. A box appears with text that
describes what the button does.

• Within other areas of the user interface, such as

dialogs, by clicking on the Help button to
display help for the dialog.

1-9
 Getting Started with UniPoint 1

UniPoint Technical Notes

Getting Help

The following UniPoint technical notes are included

on the documentation CD:

Using the 215 for Injection and Collection (part number

LT213711)

Using the 235/235P for Injection (part number

LT213716)

Using the Micro 215/841 for Injection (part number

LT213717)

Using the Multiple Probe 215 for Injection (part number

LT213718)

Large-Volume Preparative System Control Using a 30x

Pump for Repetitive Injection (part number LT21375)

These documents provide more detailed information

about controlling specific instruments.

1-10
System Configuration 2

In order to issue commands to Gilson instruments connected to the HPLC system, UniPoint
must know about those instruments. The first time UniPoint was started, a message box
appeared indicating that the software was going to scan the Gilson Serial Input/Output
Channel (GSIOC) for Gilson instruments.

Multi-system users. If you are controlling two or more HPLC systems with UniPoint,
create separate folders for each system, for example, SYSTEM1 and SYSTEM2. Store the
configuration file and all method, results, etc., files in the folder for that system. See page
2-5 for more information.

2-1
 System Configuration 2

Setting Up Configuration File(s)

Setting Up Configuration File(s)

After installing UniPoint and starting it for the first

time, you see a message box telling you that the
software is going to scan the Gilson Serial Input/
Output Channel (GSIOC).

Do one of the following:

• If you are controlling one system with

UniPoint, ensure that Gilson instruments are
connected along the GSIOC and powered
ON. Then proceed with Scanning the
GSIOC for Instruments on page 2-3.

• If you are running multiple systems, click

Cancel. Then click Cancel again to exit the
Default System Configuration dialog and
proceed with Setting Configurations for
Multiple Systems on page 2-5.

2-2
System Configuration 2

Scanning the GSIOC for Instruments

Setting Up Configuration File(s)

You can have UniPoint search for Gilson
instruments that are powered ON and connected to
the Gilson Serial Input/Output Channel (GSIOC).
This simplifies the setup of the configuration file.

Note: If you are running multiple HPLC systems

connected along the same GSIOC, only power ON
the instruments for the configuration file being
created.

1 Choose Default System Configuration from the

File menu to display the Default System
Configuration Dialog.

2 Click Install. The dialog displays additional

information.

3 Click Scan....

4 When the message box appears, verify that all

instruments are powered ON and then click OK.
UniPoint scans for unit IDs from 63 to 0. If an
instrument requires additional setup parameters,
a dialog box appears requesting the setup
information.

Note: If the software locates a 402 Syringe Pump

during the scan, it selects the 402 Left Syringe
Pump description and places it in the Unit ID/
Installed Devices list box. If the pump is
configured differently, replace the 402 Left
Syringe Pump description with the correct
configuration. Choose 402 Dual Syringe Pump,
402 Dual Syringe Pump w/ Tee, or 402 Right
Syringe Pump.

If you are using a 233 XL or 215 for both injection

and collection, the Unit ID/Installed Devices list
box must include the device as an Injector and a
Fraction Collector. If you scanned the GSIOC,
the scan identifies the device as an Injector. You
must add the device as a Fraction Collector to
the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box. When you
add the device as a Fraction Collector, use the
same unit ID as the Injector device.
2-3
 System Configuration 2

For a 232 XL or 233 XL Injector, the setup options

Setting Up Configuration File(s)

request the location of the right rinse station. If

the rinse station is located above the right valve,
choose Right. If the rinse station is located to the
left of the right valve, choose Center.

If you are using a 321-H or 322-H series pump in

combination with a 30x series pump, the 811
dynamic mixer will not automatically scan into
the installed devices list. You must manually
add it. See Modifying the Configuration File, if
necessary.

When UniPoint locates a VALVEMATE during

the scan, it selects the VALVEMATE (2 Positions)
device and prompts you for valve information. If
a multi-position valve is installed, you should
click OK when the Device Setup dialog appears
and continue the GSIOC scan. After the scan
completes, replace the VALVEMATE (2 Positions)
device with the VALVEMATE (4 - 8 Positions)
device and indicate the requested valve
information. When you create a control method,
protocol, or routines file, UniPoint assigns the
default description VALVEMATE followed by its
unit ID to the installed VALVEMATE.

5 Click OK to exit the Default System Configuration

dialog and save any changes to the current file.

2-4
System Configuration 2

Setting Configurations for Multiple

Setting Up Configuration File(s)

Systems
If you are running more than one system from
UniPoint on one computer, you must create a
configuration file for each system. Store each
configuration file in its own folder and store any
files that use the configuration there also.

GSIOC unit IDs for all Gilson instruments in the

systems must be unique. All configurations share
the computer and the 506C System Interface.

The following is an example configuration for which

instruments have been separated into two systems,
identified as System 1 and System 2. All Gilson
GSIOC instruments are connected along the GSIOC.

1 Create a folder for each system using Windows

Explorer.

2 Click File—Default System Configuration.

2-5
 System Configuration 2

3 Click Install >>.

Setting Up Configuration File(s)

4 When the additional options appear in the

dialog box:
a) Choose an instrument in System 1 in the
Known Devices list box.
b) Type its unit ID in the Unit ID text box.
c) Click Add to add the instrument to the
Installed Devices list box.
d) If the instrument requires additional setup
information, the Setup dialog appears.
Indicate the requested information then click
OK.
e) Repeat the above for each additional
instrument in System 1.

5 When finished adding devices, click Save....

When the Save As dialog appears, use its options
to indicate a name for the configuration file in
the System 1 folder you created earlier. Then
click OK to save the configuration file.

2-6
System Configuration 2

6 When the Default System Configuration dialog

Setting Up Configuration File(s)

re-appears, repeatedly click Remove to remove all
System 1 instruments from the Installed Devices
list box. Then use the procedures in steps 4 and 5
to create configuration files for each additional
system. Be sure to save each configuration in its
system folder.

7 When finished creating configuration files, click

OK to exit the Default System Configuration
dialog.

The UniPoint application window appears with

the Navigator open within it (see page 1-5).

Following are Default System Configuration dialogs

for the example systems, System 1 and System 2,
shown on page 2-5. Notice that the system interface
and computer system are identified in the
configurations for both systems. An 811 Mixer is
installed in both systems; however, since mixers do
not have a unit ID, they are identified by an * in the
configurations. Also, notice the files are stored in
different folders.

2-7
 System Configuration 2

Working with Configuration Files

Working with Configuration Files

System configuration information is stored in

control methods, protocols, and routines because
those file types contain commands for controlling
instruments. If you are running multiple HPLC
systems, you need to check the name of the
configuration being used before creating any of
those file types.

Reviewing the Configuration File

A configuration file remains the default until
another one is selected. To see what instruments
UniPoint thinks are currently turned on and
connected to the computer, do the following:

1 Close all open windows. (The Navigator can

remain open.)

2 Click File—Default System Configuration.

The Default System Configuration dialog

appears. Its list box shows the names of Gilson
instruments installed in your HPLC system.

3 Verify that all listed instruments are correct for

your HPLC system. Do one of the following:

• If all instruments are listed, click OK to exit

the dialog.
• If only the Computer System is listed, see
Scanning the GSIOC for Instruments on
page 2-3 to add instruments quickly.
• If an instrument is missing or you need to
change an instrument, see Modifying the
Configuration File on page 2-9.
• If UniPoint controls multiple HPLC systems
and the appropriate configuration is not
shown, see Searching for Configuration File
on page 2-12.

2-8
System Configuration 2

Modifying the Configuration File

Working with Configuration Files

If a new instrument is added to the system or if you
want to remove a device from the system
configuration, you can do so.

Note: Changing the configuration after control

method, protocol, and routines file have been
created may cause a message to appear when you
open one of those files. Refer to Configuration
Checks on page 2-14.

1 Click File—Default System Configuration.

2 Refer to the appropriate section on the next few

pages, depending on whether you want to add,
delete, or replace a device.

Adding an instrument

To add an instrument:

1 Click Install. The dialog displays additional

options.

2 Select the instrument in the Known Devices list

box.

2-9
 System Configuration 2

3 If necessary, type (or modify) the unit ID for the

Working with Configuration Files

instrument. For most instruments, UniPoint

displays the default unit ID for the device.

If a default ID is not displayed, refer to the user’s

guide for the instrument for information on
checking and setting its unit ID.

4 Click Add. The information for the instrument is

inserted into the Unit ID/Installed Devices list
box.

If the instrument requires additional

information, a Setup dialog appears. Make the
appropriate selections for the instrument then
click OK. In most cases, the Setup dialog
supplies options to assist you in specifying
instrument parameters.

Deleting an instrument

If an instrument is no longer in your system’s

hardware configuration, you can remove it from the
configuration file.

To remove an instrument from the configuration

file:

1 Click Install, if it hasn’t already been selected.

2 Select the instrument in the Unit ID/Installed

Devices list box.

3 Click Remove to delete the instrument from the

Unit ID/Installed Devices list box.

2-10
System Configuration 2

Replacing an instrument

Working with Configuration Files

To replace an instrument with a different
instrument:

1 Click Install. The dialog displays additional

information.

2 Select the new instrument in the Known Devices

list box.

3 If necessary, type (or modify) the unit ID for the

instrument. For most instruments, UniPoint
inserts the default unit ID for the instrument.

4 Select the instrument being replaced in the Unit

ID/Installed Devices list box.

5 Click Replace. If the replacement instrument

requires setup parameters, you need to indicate
those before the change is made.

Saving changes

To save changes to the configuration file, click Save...

to display a dialog box for saving the updated
information. In most cases, you want to replace the
old configuration file with the updated information.

2-11
 System Configuration 2

Searching for the Configuration File

Working with Configuration Files

If you are controlling multiple HPLC systems, you

may need to select a different configuration file.

1 Click File—Default System Configuration.

The name of the configuration file whose

information is being shown appears at the
bottom of the dialog. Its associated instruments
appear in the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box.

2 If the correct file name is not shown, click

Browse. The Browse System Configuration dialog
appears.

3 Select the configuration file you want to open.

4 Click OK when the desired name appears in the

File Name box.

The System Configuration dialog re-appears and

the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box contains
information for the selected file.

2-12
System Configuration 2

Specifying System Units

Working with Configuration Files

In the configuration file, you can view and modify
the pressure and temperature units used by
instruments such as pumps, pressure regulators, and
temperature controllers.

1 Click File—Default System Configuration.

2 Click Units....

3 When the Units Selection dialog appears,

choose the appropriate units for pressure and
temperature.

4 Click OK.

5 Click OK to exit the System Configuration dialog

and save any changes to the current file. Or, click
Save to copy the configuration file to a new name
(see Saving Changes to Configuration File,
below, if you need more information).

Saving Changes to the Configuration

File
To save the changes to the file:

1 Click Save... in the Default System Configuration

dialog.

2 When the Save As dialog appears, use its options

to assign a name and select a storage location for
the configuration file.

3 If a configuration file already exists for the given

name, a message box appears. Click OK to
replace the existing file or click Cancel to prevent
replacement.
2-13
 System Configuration 2

Configuration Checks
Working with Configuration Files

When a control method, protocol, or routines file is

created, UniPoint stores the following configuration
information in it:

• Path and name of the configuration file

• Unit IDs and names of instruments in the

configuration file

The software obtains this information from the

configuration file indicated as the Default System
Configuration. See Reviewing the Configuration
File for procedures on identifying the software’s
default configuration file.

When the control method, protocol, or routines file is

opened, UniPoint checks the information in the file
against the information in the saved configuration file.
To ensure compatibility, UniPoint also checks the
configuration information in the protocol file when it’s
loaded into a control method and the information in a
routine files when it’s loaded into a protocol file. When
comparing configuration information, UniPoint checks
to see if the corresponding instrument names and unit
IDs can be found in both files.

Configuration cannot be found

If you open a file and UniPoint cannot locate the

configuration file used to create it, UniPoint displays
<internal> in the System Configuration dialog
accessed via the File menu.

You can browse for the configuration file if it was

moved to a new location.

Or, you can save the configuration to a file so it can

be located the next time the file is opened.

2-14
System Configuration 2

Configuration comparison

Working with Configuration Files

A Configuration Comparison box is displayed:

• if the configuration stored in the method,

protocol, or routines file does not match the
current HPLC configuration

• if you browse for a different configuration, from

the System Configuration dialog, and the
selected configuration does not match the
configuration for the file

The list boxes, in the Configuration Comparison

box, display the configuration information so you
can see the differences.

The flow chart on the next page identifies different

message boxes that may appear depending on what
your action is during UniPoint’s configuration
comparison procedure.

When you associate a routines file with a protocol or

a protocol with a control method, UniPoint also
checks the configuration information stored in the
files to ensure they are compatible.

If the control method or protocol includes a different

model number of the same type of instrument or the
same instrument type with a different unit ID, you
see the Functional Device Exchange box, shown in
the flow chart on the next page.

2-15
 Working with Configuration Files

2-16
System Configuration
2
Creating a Control Method 3

After installing UniPoint, you can ensure that it is communicating with Gilson GSIOC
(Gilson Serial Input/Output Channel) instruments in your system.

To check communication, you create a “control method” that assigns descriptions to GSIOC
instruments, contact connections, and data channels. After the control method is created,
you use manual control to “talk” to instruments.

This section takes you through the procedures for setting up a control method. The control
methods that you create for your applications can be based on this method.

Multi-system users. If UniPoint controls multiple systems, you must choose the correct
configuration file (File menu/Default System Configuration command); see page 2-8 if
necessary. Then repeat the steps in and Checking and Controlling Instruments for each
system.

The manual control method assigns names to instruments, contact connections, and data
channels. If necessary, display the Navigator by choosing its command from the File menu.
On the Navigator, choose the Control Method square and then click New.

The Control Method window appears.

3-1
 Creating a Control Method 3

Control Method Window

Control Method Window

Using the options in the Control Method window,

you specify method conditions for controlling
devices. You access this window by creating a
control method file or by opening an existing file.
The following illustration shows an example Control
Method window, with events already set.

Refer to Section 14, Common Procedures for more

information on manipulating parts of the table or
graph displayed in a document window.

3-2
Creating a Control Method 3

Menu Bar

Control Method Window

Choose available functions from the drop-down
menus found beneath the items on the menu bar.

Menu Description

File Create, save, print, delete files or exit

a window or UniPoint.

Edit Locate, make changes to, or transfer

information.

Device Name installed devices and other

resources used by the method.

Event Issue timed instructions to devices.

Table Display or modify appearance of the

table pane.

Graph Display or modify appearance of the

graph pane.

Window Re-arrange windows or icons, or

activate a window; display file
annotation or toolbar.

Help Learn about UniPoint.

3-3
 Creating a Control Method 3

Table Pane
Control Method Window

Lists the timed events currently set for the control

method.

If you see the message **invalid command** in the

table, the device for which a command was
previously set is not listed in the configuration for
the control method. Before executing the method
during a run, check the configuration for the control
method using the System Configuration command
in the method’s File menu.

Double-clicking on a row for a timed event

automatically displays the dialog box used to set up
the event.

Using the right mouse button, you can double-click

on a row that specifies the timed event for a protocol
and display the window that shows the instructions
set in the protocol.

Double-clicking on the top (header) row displays a

dialog for changing the format of the columns
shown in the table.

Graph Pane
Shows a graphic representation of timed events and
mobile phase concentration information set in the
method.

Toolbar

Provides quick access to some options available in

the Control Method window. To activate a tool, just
click on its icon.

navigator tool Displays Navigator.

log on/log off tool Displays the

UniPoint Log On
dialog

open tool Displays Open

3-4 dialog.
Creating a Control Method 3

Control Method Window

save tool Stores method to
disk. If it has not
been saved, displays
the Save As dialog.

print tool Displays Print

dialog.

mobile phase tool Displays Mobile

Phase Event dialog.

data channels tool Displays Data

Channels Event
dialog.

contact tool Displays Contact

Event dialog.

injector tool Displays Injector

Event dialog.

detector tool Displays Detector

Event dialog.

fraction collector tool Displays Fraction

Collector Event
dialog.

generic device tool Displays Generic

Device Event dialog.

system tool Displays System

Event dialog.

To turn off/on the toolbar, choose Toolbar from the

Window menu.

3-5
 Creating a Control Method 3

Annotation Box
Control Method Window

Displays configuration information for and

parameters set in the control method. To turn on/off
the annotation, choose its command from the
Window menu.

To add your own comments, use the Notes

command in the Edit menu. Any comments
specified in the text editor appear at the bottom of
the annotation portion of analysis reports.

Legend Box
Identifies the symbols shown in the graph. To turn
on/off the legend, choose its command from the
Graph menu.

By double-clicking on an item in the legend, you can

access the Attributes dialog. Use that dialog box to
remove events from display or to change the size of
symbols and lines shown in the graph.

Note: As a default description, UniPoint assigns

Injector to an installed injector and its dilutor. That
is why Injector is listed twice in the legend: once for
the injector and once for the dilutor.

Status Bar
Displays help message if a menu command is
highlighted.

3-6
Creating a Control Method 3

Right-Click Menu

Control Method Window

Choose available functions from the right-click
menu accessed from select cells in the table pane.

Menu Description
Open Internal Displays a read-only copy of
Referenced File the file referenced in the
selected cell.

Open Referenced Displays the file at a specific

File path referenced in the selected
cell

Format Columns Displays the Format Columns

dialog

Font Displays the Font dialog

Note: If changes are made to a referenced file, then

then both the referenced file and the Control Method
must be saved for changes to take effect.

3-7
 Creating a Control Method 3

Setting Device Properties and

Setting Device Properties and Options

Options
Review Pump Descriptions and Set
Parameters
To check the default descriptions
assigned to installed Gilson pumps and
assign refill speed and compressibility
parameters:

1 Choose Mobile Phase from the

Device menu.

2 When the Mobile Phase dialog

box appears, review the default
description, based on the unit ID,
that UniPoint assigned to each
pump.

3 (Optional) To assign a different description to a

pump based on the liquid it pumps:
a) Click on the first pump in the list box.
b) Type a description in the Description text
Note: If you are controlling a Gilson box, for example, Water.
Supercritical Fluid System, use the c) Click Change.
SF Setting button to reveal the Inlet d) Repeat for each pump.
Pressure P0 text box. Click on the
description assigned to the 4 Click Settings to display the Pump Settings
supercritical fluid pump. In the Inlet dialog.
Pressure P0 box, type the pressure a) Click on the first pump in the list box.
at the pump’s inlet, typically 6 MPa b) Indicate a compressibility and refill speed for
(60 bar or 870 psi) at 22º C. A table the liquid being pumped. If necessary, refer
of inlet pressures at other to the on-line help for more information on
temperatures is shown in the on-line compressibility and refill speed. If you
help. indicated the presence of a Dual Pump Head
with Solvent Valve (A and B1 to B4) in the
pump Device Setup dialog, you can choose
the valve position by selecting the
corresponding radio button. The valve
positions cannot be switched during a run.
c) Repeat for each additional pump.
d) Click OK to accept the settings.

5 Click OK to exit the Mobile Phase dialog.

3-8
Creating a Control Method 3

Assign Data Channel Descriptions

Setting Device Properties and Options

For each data channel to acquire, assign a
description.

1 Choose Data Channels from the Device menu.

2 When the Data Channel dialog appears:

a) Choose a data channel in the Unit ID/Name
list box. The list box includes the data
channels for each installed Gilson detector. It
also lists the names of any analog inputs
located on Gilson detectors or interface
modules connected via the GSIOC.
b) In the Description box, type a label for the
data channel. The description can identify
the wavelength and sensitivity for the data
channel, for example, 254 nm at 0.1 sens.
c) Click on the data channel in the Unit ID/
Name list box to enter its description.
d) Repeat the above for each data channel.
e) Click OK to exit the dialog box.

3-9
 Creating a Control Method 3

Assign contact descriptions

Setting Device Properties and Options

If contact connections exist between a Gilson

instrument (usually the 506C System Interface) and
another HPLC instrument, assign a description to
each connection. Use the Contact command in the
Device menu.

To assign descriptions to contact connections, refer

to Assign Data Channel Descriptions on the
previous page. The description could identify the
action performed by the contact, the instrument
being controlled by the contact, or a combination of
those, for example, Start fraction collector.

Review descriptions for additional devices

Use the remaining commands in the Device menu to

review UniPoint descriptions assigned to each
installed Gilson detector, injector and its syringe
pump or dilutor, fraction collector, and so on.

3-10
Creating a Control Method 3

Scheduling Timed Events

Setting Device Properties and Options

Each command issued in the control method is
referred to as an “event”. You can specify events that
set the gradient profile, start and stop data
collection, run a protocol file that controls the
injector, or send or wait for a contact signal.

Using the dialogs within the Event menu, you tell

UniPoint when to issue commands to Gilson devices
via the Gilson Serial Input/Output Channel
(GSIOC). The GSIOC is a communications channel
that connects UniPoint to Gilson devices such as
pumps, detector, injector and fraction collector.

You can display an Event dialog box by doing one of

the following:

• Choose the device from the Event menu

• Click on an event tool in the control method’s

toolbar

• Double-click on an event in the control method’s

table

Hint: While an Event dialog box is on-screen, you

can quickly access the dialog for another device type
by clicking its tool in the toolbar.

Depending on the device, UniPoint displays a

combination of various text boxes and list boxes in
the Event dialog box. You use those boxes to specify
the device, command, and any command
parameters.

The up and down arrows in the upper right corner

enable you to step through events for the device
type listed in the dialogs title bar. The text next to
the arrows reads New Event if the text boxes are
empty, or it reads Event x of x to identify which
event's information is being shown.

3-11
 Creating a Control Method 3

The appearance and procedures for setting events

Scheduling Timed Events

within each dialog box are similar. Following are

example Event dialogs.

Within an Event dialog box, there is a Time box for

indicating the time point at which to issue the
event and a Comment box for entering an optional
user description of the event. If you enter a
comment, it appears in the status box at run time.

When sending commands to the same device,

allow enough time for the device to perform the
operation indicated by the command before issuing
it another command. As a suggestion, separate the
commands by a minimum of 0.1 min.

If you indicate more than one event, for different

devices, at the same time point, they are sent in the
order they appear in the table.

3-12
Creating a Control Method 3

Adding Event

Scheduling Timed Events

To add a timed event:

1 If necessary, clear information from some of the

text boxes (such as the Comment box) by
choosing New. This also displays New Event
next to the up and down arrows in the upper
right corner of the dialog.

2 Indicate time and command parameters.

Note: Instead of entering a value in the

parameter box for most commands, you can
enter an expression consisting of a variable and
mathematical operations. For example, instead of
specifying the wavelength value for the detector,
you could indicate Wavelength. When you set
the operations list for the run, UniPoint prompts
you for the wavelength and you can indicate it at
that time.

3 Click Insert.

The event appears in the control method’s table

and time line. Since each event has an associated
time, the software places it in chronological
order in the control method’s table.

Deleting Event
To remove an event:

1 Use the up or down arrow so the information for

the event is displayed.

2 Click Delete. The control method’s table and time

line are updated to reflect the removal of the
event.

3-13
 Creating a Control Method 3

Modifying Event
Scheduling Timed Events

To change parameters for an event:

1 Use the up or down arrow so the information for

the event is displayed.

2 Make the necessary changes to the event.

3 Click Change.

Exiting Dialog
When you are finished specifying events:

1 Click Done.

3-14
Creating a Control Method 3

Variables

Variables
To make your control methods more flexible, you
can indicate a variable name instead of entering a
value in the command parameter box for a timed
event. A variable name can be any combination of
letters and numbers and can contain special
characters (_, $, ?, @) as long as it is not the first
character or a mathematical operator (+, -, *, /, %). It
cannot include spaces. Valid variable names would
be Wavelength#, Sample_Vol1.

UniPoint does not differentiate between upper and

lower case letters in a variable name. For example, it
views the names Wavelength, wavelength, and
WAVELENGTH as identifying the same value.

The command parameter specified for an event can

also be the result of performing a mathematical
function on two variables or a variable and number.
For example, AirGap + SampVol, or SampVol + 15
are valid command parameters. You can add (+),
subtract (-), multiply (*), divide (/), and return the
remainder (%).

When setting an Operations List for a run, UniPoint

prompts you for a value to assign to any undefined
variables used by a control method.

3-15
 Creating a Control Method 3

To see what variable names have been set for a

Variables

control method and to indicate lower and upper

limits for and a default for each variable, do the
following.

1 From the Event menu, choose Variables.

2 When the dialog box appears, choose the

variable name in the list box.

3 Check the prompt that appears whenever the

software references the variable. The prompt can
be any combination of letters and numbers and
can contain special characters and spaces.

4 To indicate minimum and maximum values for

the variable, indicate the numbers in the Values
Limits box. Separate the values with a colon, for
example, 1:100. If the input is required, type an
R before the minimum value, for example,
R1:100.

For limits, you can indicate the reserved

variable names of SYRINGE for syringe volume
and Z-ARM for Z-arm height, for example,
0:SYRINGE.

5 To set a default value for the variable name, type

a value in the Default Value box.

6 To remove an unused variable name, choose it in

the list box and the choose Delete.

7 Choose OK when finished.

3-16
Creating a Control Method 3

If You Add, Change, or Delete

Variables
Variable Names
If you add, change, or delete variable names and the
control method is used in an operations list, you
need to recreate the operations list or modify each
step in the list that uses the control method, as
outlined below.

1 Open the operations list.

2 Double-click on the step that executes the control

method.

3 In the Step Entry dialog, click in the Control

Method box and use the Browse to reselect the
control method.

The parameter text boxes at the bottom of the

dialog update to reflect the changes in the
control method. If a variable is no longer used by
the method, its parameter box is grayed.

4 Enter the correct value in each parameter box

and click on Change to update the operations
table.

5 Use the scroll arrows to display information for

the next step that uses the control method.

6 Repeat steps 3-5 for each step that uses the

control method.

7 Choose Done when finished modifying steps.

8 To remove the table column for a variable that is

no longer used:
a) Display the Format Columns dialog by
choosing its command from the Table menu or
double-clicking on the header row in the table.
b) In the Column Contents list box, choose the
variable name and choose Delete.
c) Choose OK to exit.

9 Save and close the operations list using the File

menu.

3-17
 Creating a Control Method 3

Device Error Handling

Device Error Handling

UniPoint can automatically respond to the

occurrence of defined errors during a run. To make
this happen, set up control methods that tell
UniPoint what to do if it encounters one of those
errors. The error handling control method should
not include an error handling method and should
have error limits that are greater than the control
method error limits.

Activating Error Handling

UniPoint can automatically respond to the
occurrence of defined errors during a run. There are
four possible user-defined responses for when a
defined error occurs during a run. A description of
those responses follows.

• A device error handling method is identified,

and continue on error is checked
• No device error handling method is identified,
and continue on error is checked
• A device error handling method is identified,
and continue on error is not checked
• No device error handling method is identified,
and continue on error is not checked

Note: Most error responses include flashing title

bars. To make the title bars stop flashing, right-click
on the main title bar.

3-18
Creating a Control Method 3

Continue on error

Device Error Handling

For each error type, add or remove the check from
this check box. Refer to the specific error handling
description, on the following pages, to see how this
check box affects what happens during the run.

High Pressure This error results when the system

pressure exceeds the high-pressure limit set on this
screen. Refer to the table on the next page that
describes all possible responses post-error.

The default value for the high-pressure limit is 4000

psi (276 bar, 27.6 MPa). The recommended value is
25% higher than your normal operating pressure or
20% lower than the maximum column pressure
specified by the column manufacturer.

Low Pressure This error results when the system

pressure is lower than the low-pressure value set on
this screen. Refer to the table on the next page that
describes all possible responses post-error.

The default value is set to zero.

3-19
 Creating a Control Method 3
Device Error Handling

3-20
Creating a Control Method 3

Wait Time-Out This error results when an input

Device Error Handling

contact or a scheduled GSIOC event does not occur
within the length of time set on this screen. If the
wait time-out is set to zero (0), the system waits
indefinitely for the input contact or GSIOC event.
Refer to the table on the next page that describes all
possible responses post-error.

GSIOC Error This error results when any scheduled

GSIOC command fails to execute or if UniPoint loses
communication with a device. Refer to the table on
the next page that describes all possible responses
post-error.

Contact Error This error results when an error input

contact is activated. Refer to the table on the next
page that describes all possible responses post-error.

3-21
 Creating a Control Method 3
Device Error Handling

3-22
Creating a Control Method 3

High Temp. This error results when the

Device Error Handling

temperature exceeds the high temperature limit set
in the Generic Device Options dialog. Refer to the
table on the next page that describes all possible
responses post-error

Note: You set the high temperature limit using the

Generic Device Options dialog. To display this
dialog box, choose Generic from the Device dialog.
When the dialog appears, choose the name of the
temperature module in the list box and then choose
the Options button.

Low Temp. This error results when the temperature

is lower than the low temperature set in the Generic
Device Options dialog. Refer to the table on the next
page that describes all possible responses post-error

Note: You set the low temperature limit using the

Generic Device Options dialog. How to access this
dialog box is described under High Temp.

3-23
 Creating a Control Method 3
Device Error Handling

3-24
Creating a Control Method 3

Oven Leak This error results when a leak is

Device Error Handling

detected in the 831 Temperature Controller.

The table below describes all possible responses

post-error.

3-25
 Creating a Control Method 3

Tray Location This error results when UniPoint

Device Error Handling

cannot locate a tube site for sample injection or

fraction collection.

The table below describes all possible responses

post-error.

3-26
Creating a Control Method 3

Press. Pulsation This error results when the

Device Error Handling

pressure between the pump heads in a 35x series
pump exceeds the pressure pulsation value set on
this screen. The table below describes all possible
responses post-error.

3-27
 Creating a Control Method 3

Press. Difference This error results when the

Device Error Handling

pressure variation between two 35x series pumps

exceeds the pressure difference value set on this
screen.

The default value for the pressure difference is 145

psi (10 bar, 1 MPa) for 35x series pumps.

The table below describes all possible responses

post-error.

3-28
Creating a Control Method 3

Specifying Custom Commands

Specifying Custom Commands

Each instrument has a set of commands that it
understands. Most, but not all, of these commands
have been provided in the dialog boxes accessed in
the Control Method window. If there is another
feature that you would like to perform with an
instrument, refer to its User’s Guide. A complete list
of available GSIOC commands is listed there.

To issue a command string to an instrument:

1 Choose Generic... from the Event menu or click

the Generic Device Event tool ( ).

2 Click Custom> when the Generic Device Event

dialog appears. The Custom> button label
becomes List>.

3 Type the time at which the command should be

sent.

3-29
 Creating a Control Method 3

4 Optionally, type a comment in the Comment

Specifying Custom Commands

box.

5 Select the name of the instrument in the Device

list box. Or, type the unit ID of the instrument in
the Unit ID box if the instrument is not listed.

6 Type the command string in the Command box.

Enclose the entire command string in double
quotes unless it contains a variable. For example,
"F1" is the buffered command to start file 1 on a
119 UV/Vis Detector. If you wanted the file
number to be a variable, you could indicate "F"
FILE_NUMBER for the command string.

7 Using the options buttons, choose the type of

command. The documentation for the GSIOC
command tells what type of command it is.

Buffered commands send instructions to an

instrument. These commands are executed one
at a time.

Immediate commands request status information

from an instrument. These commands are
executed immediately, temporarily interrupting
other commands in progress.

8 Click Insert. The event registers in the Control

Method's table and time-line graph.

9 When you finish adding events, click Done.

3-30
Creating a Control Method 3

Save and Close Control Method

Save and Close Control Method

When finished reviewing and assigning device
descriptions:

1 Choose Save As from the File menu or the Save

tool ( ) from the toolbar.

If a Gilson injector is installed, you see a

message asking for a tray file name, click No at
this time.

If a Gilson fraction collector is installed, you see

a similar message box, click No.

2 When the Save As dialog appears:

a) Type a valid (eight characters or fewer with no
spaces or special characters except "_") name in
the File Name box (MANL_CTL.GCT, for
example).

b) As necessary, use the Folders and Drives list

boxes to choose where to store the file. The
current path is listed above the Folders list
box.
c) Click OK.

3 Choose Close from the File menu.

3-31
 Creating a Control Method 3

Checking and Controlling

Checking and Controlling Instruments

Instruments
Using the Operations window, you can issue
commands to Gilson instruments and verify they
can communicate with UniPoint.

1 Ensure that all Gilson instruments are

connected along the GSIOC and powered ON.

2 If necessary, display the Navigator by

choosing its command from the File menu. On
the Navigator, choose the Operations square
and then click New.

The Operations window appears. When you

see the message System Status in the status
box, UniPoint can communicate with the
system.

3-32
Creating a Control Method 3

Check Control Method

Checking and Controlling Instruments

To verify that the manual control method that you
created is used for instrument identification:

1 Choose Control Method from the Manual menu.

2 Check the method name shown in the Browse

Control Method dialog.

3 If the method’s name is shown, click Cancel.

If not, use the options in the Browse Control

Method dialog to select the method. Then click
OK. UniPoint reads the information in the file
and uses it for manual control.

3-33
 Creating a Control Method 3

Check Communication
Checking and Controlling Instruments

To quickly check if UniPoint and installed

instruments are communicating:

1 Choose Generic from the Manual menu.

2 When the Generic Device Control dialog

appears, click Custom>.

If the Custom> button is already active, its

label is List>. Therefore, if you see a List>
button, proceed to the next step because the
options you need are already shown.

3 Choose the first instrument in the Device list

box.

4 Type its unit ID in the Unit text box. The unit

ID is shown at the left of the instrument name
in the Devices list box.

5 Type % in the Command text box.

6 Click Immediate.

3-34
Creating a Control Method 3

7 In the Response field, read the response from

Checking and Controlling Instruments

the instrument.

If you see the instrument’s model and version

number, the instrument and UniPoint are
communicating.

If you see an error in the Response field or an

error message box, the instrument and software
are not communicating. Check each of the
following:

• Check that the instrument’s power is

switched on.

• Check the physical GSIOC connections to the

instrument

• Check that the correct Unit ID was entered.

If UniPoint still cannot communicate with the

instrument, contact the Gilson Customer Service
Department.

3-35
 Creating a Control Method 3

Optionally Start Flow

Checking and Controlling Instruments

To start the pumps if they are not currently

pumping liquid:

1 Choose Mobile Phase from the Manual menu.

2 When the Mobile Phase Control dialog

appears, type 1 in the Ramp Time box.

3 In the Total Flow box, type the desired flow

rate. You can set a flow resolution of 0.001
times the maximum flow of the pump head.
At or below 10% of the maximum flow,
resolution is 0.0001 times the maximum flow.

4 In the mobile phase composition box for each

pump except the first one, type the percent
composition from that pump. The software
calculates the percent composition from the
first pump for you.

5 If the solvent selection valve is present in the

configuration, radio buttons for switching to
the four valve positions are active. Choose the
appropriate radio button.

5 Click Begin to ramp the pumps to the specified

flow and composition conditions and switch
the valve to the selected position (if a solvent
switch valve is present).

6 Click Done to remove the Mobile Phase

Control dialog from the screen. When you
close the dialog, the conditions indicated
remain in effect.

3-36
Creating a Control Method 3

Autozero Detector

Checking and Controlling Instruments

To autozero the detector:

1 Choose Detectors from the Manual menu.

2 Choose a detector in the Detector/Protocol File

list box.

3 Choose Autozero Channels in the Command list

box.

4 Click Send.

5 Click Done to remove the Manual Detector

Control dialog.

3-37
 Creating a Control Method 3

Start Strip Chart

Checking and Controlling Instruments

To start a manual strip chart:

1 Choose Strip Chart from the Manual menu.

2 When the Manual Strip Chart dialog appears,

click Start to begin viewing data from the data
channel(s). The traces for the channels appear
in the Operations window. The Operations
window’s legend identifies each channel being
collected.

3 To get a better view of the data, click Done to

remove the dialog.

4 To stop collection, display the Manual Strip

Chart dialog again and click Stop.

5 When data collection is halted, the following

Manual Strip Chart dialog appears. Click Done
to exit the dialog without saving or printing
the strip chart.

3-38
Creating a Control Method 3

Exit Operations Window

Checking and Controlling Instruments

To close the Operations window, choose Close from
the File menu. UniPoint continues monitoring the
system until you exit the software.

3-39
Creating an Analysis Method 4

In the last section, you learned how to identify and set timed events for controlling devices
during a run. This section describes how to set conditions for analyzing peaks in collected
data. Each analysis method indicates how collected data is analyzed during a run or re-
analysis processing. Analysis includes setting peak parameters, naming peaks, and
identifying the reports to generate.

4-1
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Analysis Method Window

Analysis Method Window

Using the options in the Analysis Method window,

you indicate how collected data is analyzed and
reported. Whether the data is analyzed at run time
or afterwards, UniPoint uses the information in the
analysis method to report on peaks detected in
samples. The following illustration shows the parts
of an Analysis Method window, with information
already set up.

Refer to Section 14, Common Procedures for more

information on manipulating parts of a table or
graph displayed in a document window.

4-2
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Menu Bar

Analysis Method Window

Choose available functions from the drop-down
menus found beneath the items on the menu bar.

Menu Description
File Create, save, print, delete files or exit
a window or UniPoint
Edit Locate, make changes to, or transfer
information
Analysis Set peak integration, baseline, scaling,
variable, and error handling options
Report Specify report type, format, and
output
Table Display or modify appearance of the
table pane
Graph Display or modify appearance of
graph pane
Window Re-arrange windows or icons, or
activate a window; display file
annotation or toolbar
Help Learn about UniPoint

4-3
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Table Pane
Analysis Method Window

The table pane lists the timed events currently set

for the method. The events are based on the data
collection start time indicated in the control method
executed at the same time as the analysis method
during a run.

When you create an analysis method, the following

integration events automatically appear at 0.00
minutes in the window.

• Default Baseline

• Disable Negative Peak Integration

• Peak Width: 0.20 min

• Peak Sensitivity: 2%

You can modify the times at which these take place

and the values for peak width and sensitivity, if
necessary. To make the changes, see Integration
Events on page 4-8.

Double-clicking on a row for a timed event

automatically displays the Integration Events dialog
used to set up the event.

Double-clicking on the top (header) row in the table

displays a dialog for changing the format of the
columns shown in the table.

Graph Pane
The graph pane shows a graphic representation of
timed events and peak retention time windows.

4-4
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Toolbar

Analysis Method Window

The toolbar provides quick access to some options
available in the Analysis Method window. To
activate a tool, just click on its icon.

navigator tool Displays Navigator

log on/log off tool Displays the UniPoint

Log On dialog

open tool Displays Open dialog

save tool Stores method to disk;

if it has not been
saved, displays the
Save As dialog

print tool Displays Print dialog

integration tool Displays Integration

Events dialog

channel scales tool Displays Data Channel

Scales - Analysis
dialog

peak table tool Displays Peak Table

dialog

report type tool Displays Report Type

dialog

report output tool Displays Report

Output dialog

To turn off/on the toolbar, choose its command

from the Window menu.

4-5
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Annotation Box
Analysis Method Window

The annotation box lists analysis and reporting

conditions set in the method. To turn on/off the
annotation, choose its command from the Window
menu.

To add your own comments to the annotation, use

the Notes command in the Edit menu.

Legend Box
The legend box identifies the symbols shown in the
graph. To turn on/off the legend, choose its
command from the Graph menu.

Double-clicking on an item in the legend accesses

the Attributes dialog. Use that dialog box to remove
events from display or to change the size of symbols
and lines in the graph.

Status Bar
The status bar displays help message if a menu
command is highlighted.

4-6
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Setting Analysis Conditions

Setting Analysis Conditions

The Analysis menu in the method window provides
for setting analysis conditions plus indicating
variable and error handling information.

• Integration Events–sets integration parameters

for distinguishing peaks from baseline
interference and sets alternate baseline
techniques.

• Channel Scales–specifies chromatogram plot

conditions.

• Background Removal–indicates if a blank

chromatogram is subtracted from data analyzed
by the method.

• Peak Table–identifies information about the

components in injected samples.

• Error Handling–tells UniPoint what types of

checks to do on the calculated peak amounts and
how the software responds if it detects an error.

• Variables–sets limits and default value for any

variables identified in the analysis method.

4-7
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Integration Events
Setting Analysis Conditions

In the Integration Events dialog, you specify times at

which to modify integration parameters. When you
first open an Analysis Method window, the
following integration events are immediately set at
0.00 minutes:

• Default Baseline

• Disable Negative Peak Integration

• Peak Width: 0.20 min

• Peak Sensitivity: 2%

For most separations, these are the only events to

set. However, you can delete or modify these events
if necessary using the Integration Events dialog.

Note: Removing the Disable Negative Peak

Integration command does not turn on negative
peak integration. Insert the Enable Negative Peak
Integration command at the time point at which to
start negative peak integration.

To be integrated, a peak must elute during data

collection. Furthermore, every contour rising from
and falling to the baseline must meet the peak
detection criteria. An unlimited number of peaks per
run can be integrated.

4-8
Creating an Analysis Method 4

The software’s ability to integrate peaks depends on

Setting Analysis Conditions

the peak width and peak sensitivity settings. These
settings give information to UniPoint about the size
and shape of your peaks and the noise level riding
the baseline. In most cases, the default values for
peak width and sensitivity meet your needs.
However, if one or more peaks of interest are not
integrated, modify one or both of these parameters
before subsequent runs or re-analysis processing.

Following is a description of the available

integration events and how to set timed events.

Integration parameters

Note: Changes to the integration parameters remain

in effect until changed again.

Peak Width. Peak width is the duration of a peak, in

minutes, at its half-height. The default value is 0.20
min and can be modified.

The peak width value should be slightly longer than

the width of the narrowest peak of interest.

If UniPoint cannot locate peaks during an analysis,

adjust the peak width value. Use the chromatogram
plot or strip chart to measure the narrowest peak at
its half-height. Then using the time scale, determine
its duration. If all peaks are no more than twice the
width of the narrowest peak, indicate a peak width
that is slightly longer (for example, 0.05 min) than
the narrowest peak.

If the range of peak widths on your example trace

does not allow the above approach, select a mid-
range peak. Then determine whether any peaks are
more than twice or less than half of its duration. If
all peaks fall within that range, use the mid-range
peak for setting peak width.

4-9
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Peak Sensitivity. Peak sensitivity is expressed as a

Setting Analysis Conditions

percentage of a trace’s full-scale height. This setting

maximizes the amount of the peak that is integrated
while minimizing the integration of baseline
artifacts.

The peak sensitivity value should be slightly greater

than the highest baseline noise. The value can range
from 0.5% to 10000%.

UniPoint bases the full-scale range of peak sensitivity

settings on a 10 mV default input signal. If your data
device provides a full-scale input signal other than 10
mV, adjust the sensitivity setting accordingly.

Full-scale input Peak sensitivity setting at full-

scale height
10 mV 100%
100 mV 1000%
1000 mV 10000%

If few or no peaks are integrated, set a lower

sensitivity value. If too many peaks (the maximum
is 600) are integrated, indicate a higher sensitivity
value before subsequent runs or re-analysis
processing of samples.

Enable/Inhibit Integration. If a region of a trace is

uninteresting to you or if a region contains many
unresolved peaks, you can inhibit integration during
that period. Schedule one timed event to inhibit
integration. Then schedule another event for the
time at which to resume integration. This technique
can eliminate a large number of uninteresting peaks
from being listed in reports.

4-10
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Baseline construction techniques

Setting Analysis Conditions

UniPoint provides several baseline construction
techniques. If you change the construction technique,
the software uses the first affected peak to determine
when to use the technique. The first affected peak is
the peak whose end follows the scheduled event
time. Therefore, when applying an alternate
construction technique within a series of peaks,
enter an event time that coincides with the peak
retention time. Use these techniques sparingly and
carefully so that data are analyzed in a meaningful
way.

Accurate peak integration depends on the shape of

the baseline, which in turn depends on the peak
shape and on the resolution from neighboring
peaks.

Note: Changes to the baseline construction

technique remain in effect until the next baseline
event is scheduled.

The drawings on the following pages demonstrate

changes to a default baseline that can result from
changing the peak parameters. Review the changes
to the peak start and end points determined by the
software. The arrow in each drawing indicates the
analysis event time.

Default Baseline. To draw the baseline beneath

qualified peaks, UniPoint connects the start and end
of each integrated peak.

If the software encounters merged peaks (no

baseline resolution between peaks), it draws a “taut
string” baseline from the first peak start to the next
peak end that it finds. If any deep valleys interrupt
the “taut string” baseline, the baseline is drawn from
the peak start to the bottom of each valley and then
to the peak end. The software then drops
perpendiculars from all remaining valleys to the
baseline to determine the baseline beneath each
peak.

4-11
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

The default baseline technique is used unless you

Setting Analysis Conditions

specify another technique. If the default baseline

does not report optimal peak heights (or areas),
choose one of the other techniques, described on the
following pages.

Horizontal Baseline. UniPoint draws a forced

horizontal baseline. Then, to determine the baseline
beneath each peak, it drops perpendiculars from
each peak start and each peak end to the horizontal
baseline.

If the software encounters merged peaks (no

baseline resolution between peaks) while using this
technique, the horizontal baseline is maintained and
perpendiculars are drawn from the valleys between
peaks, rather than from peak starts and ends. If any
peak end or valley falls below the horizontal, the
baseline drops to that level and continues to be
drawn at that level.

4-12
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Next Valley /All Valleys. UniPoint connects valleys

Setting Analysis Conditions

between peaks to correct for temporary and gradual
baseline drift respectively. The Next Valley option
forces the baseline to the next valley only, whereas
the All Valleys draws the baseline from valley to
valley until the next baseline option is set.

Next Valley
All Valleys

Tangent Skim. When you select this option,

UniPoint draws a baseline under the solvent front
peak in addition to component peaks.

Default Baseline Tangent Skim

4-13
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Adding event
Setting Analysis Conditions

To add a timed event:

1 If necessary, clear information from some of the

text boxes (such as the Comment box) by
choosing New. This also displays New Event
next to the up and down arrows in the upper
right corner of the dialog.

2 Indicate time and command parameters. The

limit of resolution is 0.01 min.

Note: During a run, the event time is based on

the time at which data collection begins in the
control method.

The change is applied to the first peak whose

end follows the event time. When applying an
alternate baseline in a series of close peaks,
choose an event time that corresponds to the
retention time of the first peak of interest.

3 Click Insert.

Deleting event

To remove an event:

1 Use the Event up or down arrow to display the

information for the event.

2 Click Delete.

Modifying event

To change parameters for an event:

1 Use the Event up or down arrow to display the

information for the event.

2 Make the necessary changes to the event.

3 Click Change.

4-14
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Channel Scales

Setting Analysis Conditions

In the Channel Scales dialog, you indicate which
data channel is analyzed by the method. You also
use this dialog box to indicate how traces from any
other data channels are shown on the chromatogram
plots in reports generated by the method. Peak
amounts in reports are for data collected via the
designated analysis channel.

To specify data channel parameters:

1 From the Analysis menu, choose Data Channels.

The Data Channel Scales dialog appears.

2 To display data channels in the list box, use

the Browse or Edit button.

Clicking Browse displays the Browse

Control Method dialog. Use the dialog to
select a control method that already defines
data channel information. After you select
the control method, its data channel
descriptions, and channel scaling
parameters, will appear in the Data
Channel Scales dialog.

Clicking Edit displays the Edit Channels dialog.

Use the dialog to enter channel descriptions. To
enter a channel description, type the description
in the text box and click on Add. When you
return to the Data Channel Scales dialog, you
will see the data channel description(s) that you
just set up.

3 Choose a channel in the Channel Scale

Parameters list box.

4 Review the information in the areas of the dialog

box, described on the next few pages. Modify the
information, if necessary.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each channel. Then click

OK to exit.

4-15
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Following are descriptions of the areas in the Data

Setting Analysis Conditions

Channel Scales dialog. The Auto Range option

pertains to all data channels being collected. The
other options relate to the data channel whose
description is currently highlighted in the Channel
Scale Parameters list box.

Auto Range. If this check box is selected, UniPoint

automatically plots data to the minimum and
maximum peak height determined across all
collected data channels. Selection of this box
overrides any other limits set for individual data
channels in the dialog box.

Channel Scale Parameters. This area lists the

available data channels. If none are listed, click in
the list box and then click on the Browse button.
Locate and select the control method that describes
the data channels being collected.

Analysis Channel. After choosing the channel in the

list box, place an X in this check box to indicate its
data is analyzed by the method. Only one channel
can be indicated as the analysis channel. Any
reports generated by the method pertain to this
channel.

% Offset. Use this parameter to move the channel’s

trace away from the horizontal axis (and from other
channel traces) on chromatogram plot. Express the
offset as a percent displacement from the horizontal
axis (0%).

4-16
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Minimum and Maximum. This area lists the lower

Setting Analysis Conditions

and upper limits for the signal axis. Be aware of the
following:

• If the Auto Range check box is selected the

software disregards these values and uses the
minimum and maximum heights for all channels
to determine the signal axis.

• If Auto Range is not selected and you indicate

different minimum and maximum values for
each channel being collected, the software uses
the lowest and highest values entered to
determine the signal axis. For example, if 0 and
10 mV were entered for the minimum and
maximum values for the 254 nm channel and 0
and 100 mV were entered for the 280 nm
channel, the signal axis would be 0 to 100 mV.

Scale. How UniPoint scales data when it is plotted:

mV, user units, peak name, or tallest peak.

If you indicate a scale other than mV for a channel,

make corresponding changes to the scaling for each
of the other channels being collected.

mVolt (displayed for User Units scale). The number

of mVolts that correspond to the value indicated in
the User Units text box.

User Units (displayed for User Units scale). The

number of user units that correspond to the value
indicated in the mVolt text box.

Label (displayed for User Units scale). This area

shows the label to identify the user units.

Peak Name (displayed for Named Peak scale). If you

already created the peak table, described on page 4-20,
select the name of the peak using the list box. If you
have not created it, you can type in the name of the
peak, as it will be entered in the peak table.

The specified peak extends to 100% on the

chromatogram plot. All other peaks are plotted in
relation to that peak. Smaller peaks are less than the
full-scale height; larger peaks are displayed as off-
scale.
4-17
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Modifying data channel descriptions

Setting Analysis Conditions

To add, change, or remove a data channel

description:

1 From the Data Channel Scales dialog, choose the

Edit button.

The Edit Channels dialog appears. If any data

channels were already named in the Data
Channel Scales dialog, their names appear in the
list box.

2 To add a name, type the description in the text

box of the Edit Channels dialog and click on
Add. Repeat for each channel.

To change a channel name, click on its

description in the list box and type the new
description in the Name box. Then click on the
previous description in the list box to update the
list.

To remove a channel name, click on it in the list

box and then click on Delete.

3 Click on OK to exit the Edit Channels dialog.

The names of the data channels appear in the list
box in the Data Channel Scales dialog.

4 Select the analysis channel and set scaling

parameters for that channel and any other data
channels, as described previously.

4-18
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Checking attributes for lines and symbols

Setting Analysis Conditions

To review and modify the color assigned to data
channel traces or to turn on or off gridlines in the
chromatogram plot:

1 From the Data Channel Scales dialog, choose

Attributes.

2 When the Data Channel Display Attributes

dialog appears, select a channel from the list box
and check the options for it. If necessary, make
any necessary modifications. When finished,
choose OK or Cancel.

Data Channel. This area lists the description for

each data channel.

Style. This area lists available styles for the line:

solid, dashed, or dotted.

Color. This area lists available color choices for the

line.

Thickness. This area identifies the width of the line

in pixels.

Signal Grid. This area identifies which gridlines

appear for the Y-axis. Major gridlines are aligned
with numbered tick marks while minor gridlines are
positioned between the numbered tick marks.

Time Grid. This area identifies which gridlines

appear for the X-axis. Major gridlines are aligned
with numbered tick marks while minor gridlines are
positioned between the numbered tick marks.

4-19
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Peak Table
Setting Analysis Conditions

The Peak Table dialog is where you tell UniPoint

about the peaks in data analyzed by the method. If
you name peaks in the peak table, your reports refer
directly to those peaks when reporting areas,
heights, amounts, and so on.

In the Peak Table dialog, you also provide

information about the amount of material in
calibrators. Remember, you must run calibrators at
one or more calibration level to obtain an internal
standard, external standard, or percent
normalization report.

To display the Peak Table dialog:

1 Choose Peak Table from the Analysis menu.

The top of the dialog shows the Time/Name list

box that identifies any peak information that has
been set. As a default, the Names option button
is selected and you see the Peak Names area at
the bottom of the dialog. However, the options
in this area change depending on the option
selected in the View area.

4-20
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Naming peaks

Setting Analysis Conditions

When you select the Names option button in the
View area, options appear in the Peak Table dialog
for indicating peak names and their retention times.
You get retention time information by injecting and
acquiring traces for test samples.

Time. Time is the retention time for the peak. The limit
of resolution is hundredths of a minute (0.01 min).

Peak retention time is based on start of data

collection indicated in the control method executed
at the same time as the analysis method. If the
beginning of data collection and injection are not
synchronous, retention times reported deviate from
actual retention times by their difference.

Name. Identify each peak for the component it

represents.

Reference Peak (optional). The software uses

reference peaks to correct for retention time shifts
that can occur during runs that analyze multiple
samples. When the software notices a difference
between a reference peak’s expected and actual
retention times, it adjusts the retention times of the
preceding non-reference peaks in its internal peak
table.

You can designate an unlimited number of reference

peaks in both calibration and unknown samples. An
ideal reference peak is a large isolated peak with a
consistent retention time. You can designate several
reference peaks with retention times at the beginning,
middle and end of the run. If you designate just one
reference peak, it should be a late-eluting peak.

4-21
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Color. Available color fills for the peak. The default

Setting Analysis Conditions

is black. If you select a color, choose a pattern other

than <None>.

Pattern. Available design fills for the peak. The

default is <None>.

Absolute Error and Relative Error. These are the

retention time window parameters. To compensate
for possible retention time drift, UniPoint defines a
window around the retention time for each peak. If
a peak elutes at any time during that window, the
software identifies it.

Absolute error is a constant amount of time on

either side of a peak’s nominal retention time. The
software automatically searches for eluted peaks at
every named retention time plus or minus this
amount of time.

Relative error is a percentage of peak retention time.

Relative error, and, therefore, the width of retention
time windows, increases with increasing retention
time. Because late-eluting peaks are often broader
than early peaks, the software uses this correction
factor to improve the likelihood of locating late-
eluting peaks.

UniPoint uses the following formulas to calculate

the beginning and end of any peak’s time window.
Each peak’s time window appears in the graph
pane, if displayed.

Beginning:
Ret. Time - [Abs. Error + (Ret. Time x Rel. Error)]

End:
Ret. Time + (Abs. Error + Ret. Time x Rel. Error)

4-22
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Identifying peaks

Setting Analysis Conditions

To name and set retention time for peaks:

1 Check that the Peak Names area is displayed at

the bottom of the Peak Table dialog. If not,
choose the Names option button.

2 Type the retention time for the first peak.

3 Type the name of the peak.

4 Optional - Choose the Reference Peak check box.

5 Optional - Indicate a color and pattern fill for the

peak.

6 If necessary, modify the absolute error and

relative error.

7 Choose Insert to add the peak information to the

Time/Name list box.

8 Repeat the above for each peak.

Modifying peaks

To modify information for a peak:

1 Choose the peak’s name in the Time/Name list

box.

2 Modify the appropriate information in the Peak

Names area.

3 Once again, choose the peak’s name in the

Time/Name list box, and its information is
updated.

Deleting peaks

To delete the information for a peak:

1 Choose the peak name in the Time/Name list

box.

2 Choose Delete.

4-23
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Entering level information for peaks

Setting Analysis Conditions

When you select the Levels option button in the

View area, the options described below appear in
the Peak Table dialog. These options are for entering
the amount of material present at each calibration
level.

Note: To identify internal standard(s) and set

amount(s), follow the instructions on page 4-26.

Level/Amount. This list box shows the levels set for

the peak selected in the Time/Name list box. (If
information is grayed, the peak has been identified
as an internal standard.)

Amount. The amount of material injected for the

peak. Enter the amounts from smallest to largest.

Unit Label. The unit label associated with the

amounts, usually mass units. This label appears next
to the amount axis on calibration plots.

Specifying levels

To set amounts for calibration levels:

1 Choose the peak name in the Time/Name list

box in the upper part of the dialog.

2 If necessary, choose the Levels option button.

The Peak Levels area appears at the bottom of
the dialog.

3 Type the amount injected at the first level.

4 Choose Insert.

5 Continue inserting amounts for each calibration

level for the peak.

6 Repeat steps 3–5 for each additional peak.

Remember if the peak is an internal standard,
refer to Indicating internal standard peak(s) on
page 4-26 to indicate amount(s).

7 To associate a units label with amounts, indicate

the label before exiting the Peak Table dialog.
4-24
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Changing level amount

Setting Analysis Conditions

To change an amount indicated for a level:

1 Click on the amount in the Level/Amount list

box.

2 Type the correct value in the Amount box.

3 Click in the Level/Amount list box to update its

information.

Deleting level

To delete a level:

1 Click on the level and amount in the Level/

Amount list box.

2 Click Delete.

4-25
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Indicating internal standard peak(s)

Setting Analysis Conditions

When you select the Int Std option button in the

View area, you can indicate one or more peaks as an
internal standard and indicate amount of material
and the time frame during which to use the
standard.

Internal Standard. When checked, indicates that the

peak highlighted in the Time/Name list box is an
internal standard.

Amount. The amount of internal standard material

injected for the internal standard peak.

Start Time. Start Time is the time at which to begin

using the internal standard.

End Time. End Time is the time at which to stop

using the internal standard. It must be later than the
Start Time.

Internal Standard Actual Amounts. Select this check

box if you want to indicate the actual amount of the
internal standard added to an unknown injected
during a run. When you set up an operations list
that uses this analysis method, UniPoint
automatically provides a text box so you can
indicate this amount.

4-26
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Specifying internal standard peaks

Setting Analysis Conditions

1 If necessary, choose the Int Std option button.

2 Choose the name of an internal standard peak in

the Time/Name list box.

3 Choose the Internal Standard check box.

4 Enter the amount for the internal standard.

5 Enter the time range in which UniPoint uses the

internal standard to normalize sample amounts.

6 Click on the name of an internal standard peak

in the Time/Name list box to update its
information.

7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each internal

standard peak. Make sure that the Start and End
Times for each internal standard peak do not
overlap.

8 If you want to indicate the internal standard

actual amount when you set up an operations
list that uses this method, place an X in the
Internal Standard Actual Amounts check box.

4-27
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Grouping peaks
Setting Analysis Conditions

When you select the Groups option button in the

View area, options for grouping peaks appear in the
Peak Table dialog. UniPoint reports total area or
height amounts for all peaks selected in addition to
the area or amount of each individual peak.

Setting up group names

To indicate group names:

1 Choose the Groups option button.

2 In the Group box, type the name to assign to a

collection of peaks.

3 Choose Insert to add the name to the Group

Names list box.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set up a group name for

each collection of peaks.

5 If you discover a mistake, select the name in the

Group Names list box and revise the text in the
Group box. When you click on another area of
the dialog, the change is automatically made.

If you want to delete a group name, select it in

the Group Names list box and choose Delete.

4-28
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Grouping peaks

Setting Analysis Conditions

To place peaks into groups:

1 Choose the name of the peak in the Time/Name

list box.

2 Choose the group name in the Group Names list

box.

3 Choose the Group command button.

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to assign other peaks to

groups.

5 To remove a peak from a group, choose its name

in the Time/Name list box and choose Ungroup.

4-29
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Retention Time Windows

Retention Time Windows

Reference and non-reference peaks in calibration

and unknown samples are located by matching
actual retention times to retention times listed in the
analysis method’s peak table. To compensate for
possible retention time drift, the software defines a
time window around each expected peak. It finds an
expected peak if that peak lies within the retention
time window.

You can modify the Absolute Error and/or Relative

Error parameters to control the width of retention
time windows. The default settings (Abs. Error =
0.10 min, Rel. Error = 5.0%) are appropriate for
many separations.

Absolute error is a constant amount of time flanking a

peak’s nominal retention time. The software
automatically searches for eluted peaks at every
named retention time plus or minus this amount of
time.

Relative error is a percentage of peak retention time.

Relative error and, therefore, the width of retention
time windows, increases with increasing retention
time. Because late-eluting peaks are often broader
than early peaks, the software adds this correction
factor to improve the likelihood of locating late-
eluting peaks.

You can calculate the beginning and end of any

peak’s time window using the following formulas:

Beginning: Ret. Time - [Abs. Error - (Ret. Time x Rel. Error)]

End: Ret. Time + (Abs. Error + Ret. Time x Rel. Error)

4-30
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Setting Time Window Parameters

Retention Time Windows

It is easy to understand how absolute error
contributes to the width of retention time windows
since it is simply a constant amount of time that
brackets every named retention time. The
contribution of relative error is harder to grasp
because it varies with retention time.

The following diagram and table show what

happens when absolute error is held constant at 0.1
minutes and the relative error is varied (1%, 5% or
10% of retention time). The time windows were
calculated as described above.

Notice that the retention time of Peak 3 (9.94

minutes) was very close to the upper limit (9.98
minutes) of the windows at 1% relative error. In this
example, relative error should be set higher than 1%
to avoid missing peaks.

Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak 3

Nominal Ret. Time 2.27 4.77 9.78
Actual Ret. Time 2.30 4.85 9.94
Window (1% rel. error) 2.15 - 2.39 4.62 - 4.92 9.58 - 9.98
Window (5% rel. error) 2.06 - 2.48 4.43 - 5.11 9.19 - 10.37
Window (10% rel. error) 1.94 - 2.60 4.19 - 5.35 8.70 - 10.86

Effect of Relative Error on Width

of Retention Time Windows
4-31
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Resolving Overlapping Windows

Retention Time Windows

Retention time windows must be wide enough to

permit detection of every peak yet narrow enough to
minimize windows overlapping. Overlapping can
occur if windows are too wide or if peaks are too
close together. Since the software cannot know
whether a peak belongs to the earlier or later
window in an overlapping pair, it uses the following
algorithm during data analysis to revise the limits of
both windows and to establish a new boundary
between them. The following examples are
presented in the order of least to most amount of
overlap.

Type 1. When the beginning of Window 2 occurs

after the midpoint of Window 1, a new boundary is
established at the midpoint of the overlapping
region.

Type 2. When the beginning of

Window 2 occurs before the
midpoint of Window 1, a new
boundary is established midway
between the midpoint and end of
Window 1.

Type 3. When the midpoint of Window 2 occurs at

any time during Window 1, a new boundary is
established midway between the center of Window
1 and the center of Window 2.

4-32
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Using the Peak Table During Data

Using the Peak Table During Data Analysis

Analysis
When UniPoint begins to analyze data collected
during a run, it looks for the reference peaks and
non-reference peaks that you identified in the peak
table. It knows where to look because you set the
peak retention times and retention time window
parameters.

After finding the peaks, UniPoint checks the

retention times of those peaks and updates its
internal peak table so it knows when to expect those
peaks in the next step.

If the current method is generates a calibration type

report, the software uses the amounts listed in the
peak table. It then uses information from the
calibration table to report results about the data
collected during the run.

After a calibration run, UniPoint automatically saves

the calibration table to file.

Reasons for Missing Peaks

The software might fail to identify reference or non-
reference peaks if:

• the peak width and peak sensitivity were

incompatible with chromatogram peaks

• the wrong sample was injected

• changing chromatographic conditions (flow rate,

mobile phase composition, pressure,
temperature) or leaks in the system resulted in
inconsistent retention times

• an insufficient number of or a poor choice of

reference peaks were named

• the absolute error and/or relative error need to

be adjusted

4-33
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Locating Reference Peaks

Using the Peak Table During Data Analysis

When you create a peak table, you can specify

retention times for one or more reference peaks. The
software looks for peaks named in the peak table
whose actual retention times fall within the
reference peaks’ time windows.

Use reference peaks cautiously. An ideal reference

peak is a large, well-separated, isolated peak with a
consistent retention time.

If, during data analysis, it finds a peak in a retention

time window, it presumes it found the desired
reference peak. As the software identifies reference
peaks, it constructs an internal graph of actual
retention times versus expected retention times.

If two or more peaks fall within the same reference

peak time window, it chooses the largest one as the
reference peak. If two peaks in a window are equally
tall, the earliest peak is chosen as the reference peak.

4-34
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Locating Non-Reference Peaks

Using the Peak Table During Data Analysis

Using the internal graph, described on the previous
page, the software updates the expected retention
times (and retention time windows) for all non-
reference peaks named in the Analysis Peak Table. It
then looks for non-reference peaks named on the
peak table whose actual retention times fall within a
corrected retention time window.

If the software finds such a peak, it presumes it is

the desired non-reference peak. If two or more non-
reference peaks fall within the same window, it
chooses the earliest peak whose retention time is
closest to the window’s center.

4-35
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Updating Peak Retention Times

Using the Peak Table During Data Analysis

Over the course of multi-loop runs, retention times

could drift so much that peaks would elute outside
their original time windows. To ensure that the
software always knows the most likely retention
time of each named peak, the software continuously
updates the retention time windows of reference
and non-reference peaks on its internal peak table.

Note: You can turn off peak retention time tracking

in the analysis method. See page 4-39.

In the first loop through any run, the software

expects that named peaks have the retention time
specified in the analysis method’s peak table. In
each subsequent loop, it adjusts the expected
retention time according to information it gathers
during the run.

The new midpoint of each peak’s retention time

window is calculated as a weighted sum of each
peak’s previously determined window midpoint
(75%) plus its retention time in the current loop
(25%). A weighted sum is necessary to minimize the
influence of a single bad loop in a multi-loop run.

For example, after several loops, the midpoint of a

peak’s retention time window is at 3 minutes. In the
next loop, that peak’s retention time was 3.2
minutes. On the software’s internal peak table, the
midpoint of the retention time window is adjusted
to 3.05 minutes.

(3 minutes x 0.75) + (3.2 minutes x 0.25) = 3.05 minutes

This updating only occurs if all reference peaks are

found in the current loop. If all reference peaks are
found, the retention time window of each reference
and non-reference peak found during that loop is
updated as described above.

4-36
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Generating a Calibration Table

Generating a Calibration Table

While creating an analysis method, you listed in the
peak table an amount for each standard peak at each
calibration level. When you ran that method, you
injected calibrator samples for each level and
optionally unknown samples.

• All repeats at calibration level 1

• All repeats at calibration level 2 (if used)
• All repeats at additional calibration levels (if
used)
• Unknown samples

When analyzing a sample, the software determines

the peak area (or height) for each named
component. For each peak, the software generates a
calibration curve to determine the amount of that
component in each unknown sample.

A component’s calibration curve plots the average

peak area (or height) vs. amount injected at each
level. You can choose between the following types
of calibration curves:

Point to Point. UniPoint connects the mean amount

at each calibration level using a linear segment. For
a one-level calibration plot, UniPoint generates a
linear segment between the origin (0 area, 0 amount)
and the mean peak area at the calibration level.

Point to Point through Zero. UniPoint generates a

linear segment between the origin (0 area, 0 amount)
and the mean peak area at the first calibration level.
It then connects the mean amount at each additional
calibration level using a linear segment.

Linear. Using a best-fit method, UniPoint constructs

a line that best represents the set of means. This
method minimizes the sum of the squares of the
error distance between each mean and the line.

Quadratic. UniPoint generates a smooth curve that

best represents the set of means. The curve may
have one bend.

4-37
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Cubic. UniPoint generates a smooth curve that best

Generating a Calibration Table

represents the set of means. The curve may have

two bends.

To determine the amount of that component in an

unknown sample, the software determines where
that component’s peak area intersects the calibration
curve. The figure on the next page shows how the
software determines the amount for an unknown. A
point-to-point calibration curve is shown, but the
same procedure is used for a linear regression,
quadratic, or cubic calibration curve.

4-38
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Additional Peak Options

Setting Analysis Conditions

UniPoint provides additional options for keeping
track of and reporting on peaks.

1 Choose the Options command button in the

Peak Table dialog.

2 Check and if necessary modify the settings in the

Peak Table Options dialog - see descriptions
below. Then choose OK to return to the Peak
Table dialog.

Track Retention Times. When this box is

checked, UniPoint automatically corrects for
retention time shifts that may occur during a run
in which multiple samples are injected. When
the software notices a difference between a
peak’s expected and actual retention times, it
adjusts the retention times for all peaks so they
are integrated.

Void Volume Retention Time. This is the

retention time of unretained effluent. This value
is used to calculate capacity factor (k’).

4-39
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Background Removal
Setting Analysis Conditions

The Chromatogram Background Removal dialog lets

you identify the blank chromatogram whose data is
subtracted from sample data during a run or during
re-analysis processing.

1 Choose Background Removal from the Analysis

menu.

2 Set the parameters, described below, in the

dialog and choose OK.

Blank Location. None indicates that you do not

want UniPoint to perform background
subtraction. Choose Internal if the first injected
sample in the run is the blank. Choose External if
the information for the blank is located in a data
file.

Data File. The name of the file containing the

blank chromatogram. Click in this field and then
use the Browse button to locate the file, sample,
and data channel to use for background
subtraction.

Sample. The description indicated in the

operations list for the sample.

Channel. The channel via which the data for the

external sample was collected.

4-40
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Producing Reports

Setting Analysis Conditions

To set reporting conditions and set report formats,
use the Report menu.

• Report Type-identifies how collected data are

reported.

• Report Output-indicates what reports are saved

to disk or printed.

• Calibrator Format, Unknown Format,

Calibration Summary Format, Unknown
Summary Format-identify the column
information printed for each type of report; let
you select from additional choices to customize
reports.

4-41
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Report Type
Setting Analysis Conditions

The Report Type dialog identifies the kind of report

to generate for each sample analyzed by the method.
To set report type information:

1 Choose Type from the Report menu.

2 Set the parameters, described below, in the

dialog and choose OK.

Report type

The report type is the technique used to

determine the amounts of components in a
sample. Choose the report type that gives
you the most relevant information about
your samples.

Area or Height Percent. This report type can be used

during method development while you try to
stabilize chromatographic conditions and determine
component retention times. In unknown samples,
the actual area or height of each peak is reported.
The area or height is also given as a percentage of
the total area or height of all integrated peaks in the
sample. This report type assumes that the detection
properties of all peaks are identical.

Percent Normalization, External Standard, and

Internal Standard. These are calibration report
types. These report types require that you inject
calibrators and provide information in the Peak
Table dialog about each component of interest
before injecting unknown samples. Calibrators
account for differences in absorbance properties
among peaks. They provide data that UniPoint uses
to generate a calibration table that is then used to
calculate and report amounts for unknowns.

Additional options appear in the dialog box when

you select one of the calibration report types.

4-42
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Quantify by

Setting Analysis Conditions

UniPoint quantifies peaks by measuring either the
area or height of integrated peaks. Peak area and
height measurements are a function of many
chromatographic variables, including mobile phase
composition and flow rate.

Peak Area. Because peak area is relatively

independent of mobile phase composition changes,
it is the preferred measurement technique for
gradient elution. Peak area determination is less
subject to variations in instrument conditions or
operator technique than is peak height. The major
disadvantage is that peak area measurements are
affected by the presence of neighboring peaks.

Peak Height. Peak height is less subject to

interference by adjacent, overlapping peaks and is,
therefore, the method of choice when measuring
overlapping peaks, particularly small peaks on the
tailing edge of a larger peak. Peak heights are also
relatively independent of flow rate changes.

4-43
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Include
Setting Analysis Conditions

By default, UniPoint reports information about

every peak that meets its integration requirements.
However, for some applications, you may want to
get information only about the peaks of interest.

Note: The maximum number of peaks that can be

identified is 600.

Unnamed Peaks. If you want UniPoint to report

information about every peak that meets its
integration requirements, place an X in this check
box. If you only want information on peaks named
in the peak table, do not place an X in the check box.

If the software integrates peaks that have not been

named in the peak table, it assigns the peak a name
based on the order in which it eluted. For example,
the peak table named two peaks, Phenol and
Benzaldehyde. However, during the run, the
software detects a peak between those two peaks.
The unnamed peak would be labeled “Peak 2”.

Min. Area or Height. You can specify a minimum

valid peak area or height to exclude insignificant
peaks from reports. Peaks with area or height
smaller than the specified value are not reported
and baselines are not drawn for those peaks.

4-44
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Calibration

Setting Analysis Conditions

When using one of the calibration report types,
UniPoint requires additional information about the
calibration procedure.

Arrangement. Indicate when calibrators are injected

during the run (or ordered for re-analysis
processing).

• Sequential: All calibrators are injected before

unknowns.

• Bracketed: A group of calibrators is injected

before and after each group of unknowns. Both
groups of calibrators are used for analysis of the
unknowns.

• Random: Calibrators are dispersed throughout

the run.

• Preloaded: Calibrators were injected and

analyzed during a previous run. The software
uses the specified Preloaded Calibration File and
Calibration Table Number within the file to
analyze samples.

4-45
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Curve Fit. Indicate how to construct calibration

Setting Analysis Conditions

curves. The software generates curves using data

collected from calibrators and uses the curves to
determine component amounts in unknowns.

• Point to Point: UniPoint connects the mean

amount at each calibration level using a linear
segment. For a one-level calibration plot,
UniPoint generates a linear segment between the
origin (0 area, 0 amount) and the mean peak area
at the calibration level.

• Point to Point through Zero: UniPoint generates

a linear segment between the origin (0 area, 0
amount) and the mean peak area at the first
calibration level. It then connects the mean
amount at each additional calibration level using
a linear segment.

• Linear: UniPoint constructs a line that best

represents the set of means.

• Quadratic: UniPoint generates a smooth curve

that best represents the set of means. The curve
may have one bend.

• Cubic: UniPoint generates a smooth curve that

best represents the set of means. The curve may
have two bends.

After the run or before re-analysis, you should print

or view the calibration curves to make sure that only
one amount can be determined for a given area (or
height). See Section 9, Calibrations.

Preloaded Calibration File. If you indicated

preloaded in the Arrangement list box, click in this
box and then choose the Browse button. Use the
dialog that appears to select the calibration file.

Cal. Number. If multiple calibration tables are stored

in the preloaded calibration file, indicate the table to
use.

4-46
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Options

Setting Analysis Conditions

When you select the Options button, the Report
Type Options dialog appears.

Sample Amount. Select this check box if you want to

indicate the total amount of material present in the
injection volume of an unknown sample. When you
set up an operations list that uses this analysis
method, UniPoint automatically provides a text box
for indicating this amount.

If you indicate a sample amount, the percent

concentration (as related to the total sample amount)
of each reported peak is included in each report.

The sample amount is unitless—UniPoint lets you

use any unit appropriate to the separation. Usually,
sample amount is expressed in mass units.

Nominal/Actual Amounts. If you want to indicate

nominal and actual amounts for unknowns injected
during a run, select this check box. When you set up
an operations list that uses this analysis method,
UniPoint automatically provides text boxes for
indicating these amounts.

Actual amount is the amount you actually measured

to prepare a particular unknown sample. Nominal
amount is the amount you wanted to measure.

Using the actual and nominal amount, UniPoint

automatically adjusts the amount of material in each
calculated peak and reports instead the amount that
would have been found if the sample had contained
exactly the nominal amount of unknown:

Reported Peak Amount =

Calculated Peak Amount x Nominal Amount
Actual Amount

Unknown Peak Groups. Select this check box if you

want to group unknown samples and obtain
statistical data, such as standard deviation and
standard error, for their peaks. When you set up an
operations list that uses this analysis method,
UniPoint automatically provides a text box for
indicating the group number (1, 2, 3...) to assign to
an unknown sample.
4-47
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Report Output
Setting Analysis Conditions

The Report Output dialog identifies which reports

should be saved to disk and which should be
printed when the analysis method is executed.

1 Choose Output from the Report menu.

2 Choose whether to save, export, and print

reports for samples analyzed by the method and
what to print. Choose OK to exit.

Each calibrator, unknown, and summary report

has default information, identified by Gilson,
that are inserted into its report. You can modify
the report format as described on page 4-52.

Each time you analyze raw data, a report file and

summary file can be saved to disk. In some
cases, it is easier to save reports to disk during
the run and then print them later. When you
print reports at run time, each report may
include the following:

• annotation that identifies the data file and

how it was collected and analyzed.

• table of peak information and amounts if

calibrators were injected or if a pre-stored
calibration table was specified.

• graph of chromatogram plot for acquired

traces or calibration plot for a calibration
summary report.

The check boxes in the Export area let you select

which reports should be saved to a text file. The
File Name box indicates the path and name to
which the report information is saved. You can
use the Browse button to locate an existing
export file. If you want to overwrite the previous
file with new information, do not modify the
name in the File Name box. If you do not want
the file overwritten, indicate a different file
name.

4-48
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Setting layout options

Setting Analysis Conditions

For report printouts generated during a run or re-
analysis processing, you can specify the width of
page margins, size of chromatogram plot, and
printing order for report components.

1 Choose Output from the Report menu.

2 In the Report Output dialog, choose the Layout

button.

3 When the Report Layout dialog appears, review

and if necessary modify the current settings.

Margins. In the text box next to each margin

(left, right, top, and bottom), specify the width of
the margin. The software adds the indicated
width to the default print area set for the page by
the printer.

The measurement system, mm or inches, is set

using the International program in the Windows
Control Panel.

Graph Height. Indicate the size of the

chromatogram plot as a percentage of the page.
It is printed on a different page than the
annotation or report if necessary.

Position Order. The order in which the various

parts of the report are printed, by default:
annotation, graph, then table.

4 Choose OK to save any changes.

4-49
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Report annotation
Setting Analysis Conditions

You can choose which parts of the analysis report’s

annotation will be viewed and printed. To make
your selections:

1 Choose Output from the Report menu.

2 In the Report Output dialog, choose the

Annotation button.

3 When the Annotation Contents dialog, use the

check boxes to turn off or on parts of the
annotation or enter a custom calculation. The
next two pages identify the various parts of a
report annotation so you can determine which
parts to include in reports. See page 4-62 for
information on entering a custom calculation
into the annotation.

4-50
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Example annotation

Setting Analysis Conditions

4-51
 Creating an Analysis Method 4
Setting Analysis Conditions

4-52
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Report Format Review and

Setting Analysis Conditions

Modification
If you want to vary the default format for reports,
use the Format commands under the Report menu.
You can add or remove column information.

Checking columns

To view what is printed for unknown, calibrator or

summary reports:

1 From the Report menu, choose Column Formats.

2 When the Report Column Format dialog

appears, click on the option button to see the
columns available for calibrator, unknown, and
summary reports.

Column Contents. The contents of each column

currently specified for the report type. The
names of the columns are listed in the order,
from left to right, that they appear on the report.

4-53
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Contents (or Expression if you clicked on the

Setting Analysis Conditions

Custom check box). The contents of the selected

column. The types of contents that can appear in
a report type are set by Gilson. To view
additional selections click on the down arrow.

You see the Expression label if you indicated a

custom calculation for the column. You can then
type the formula that UniPoint uses to generate
the amount that appears in the column, or click
on the Builder button to display the Expression
Builder dialog. See page 4-58 for procedures on
specifying a custom calculation.

Note: You must add the column for the custom

expression to each report format if you want
UniPoint to generate the information. Highlight
the text in the Expression text box and press
ctrl+c to copy the text to the Clipboard. Then
choose the option button in the Report Type
area. Click on the Custom button and click in the
Expression text box and press CTRL+v. Then click
Insert. Use the up or down arrow button to move
the new column to the appropriate location.

Custom. Choose the Custom check box if you

want to include a column that is not part of
UniPoint’s default columns. When you click on
the Custom check box, a Builder button appears
and the Contents text box becomes the
Expression text box. If you click on the Builder
button, you see the Expression Builder dialog.
See page 4-58 for procedures on specifying a
custom calculation.

Heading. The descriptive text that appears at the

top of a column and identifies the type of
information that appears within the column.

Width. The width of the column in which the

information is placed. For most columns, the
default value is appropriate. However, you may
need to widen the columns for sample
description and peak name depending on your
application.

4-54
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Factor. A number by which each value in a

Setting Analysis Conditions

column is multiplied.

Justify. How information in the column is

aligned.

Format. How numbers are displayed: decimal,

with or without commas, or scientific notation.

Decimals. The number of positions displayed

after the decimal point.

Individual Peaks (for summary report formats

only). When selected, causes the information
specified in the Column Contents list box to be
reported for each integrated peak.

Statistics (for summary report formats only).

When selected, causes the mean, standard
deviation, standard error, and number average
to be reported for each numerical entry specified
in the Column Contents list box. (This includes
items such as injection number and level amount
in addition to area and height.)

Note: If you remove the X from both the

Individual Peaks and Statistics check boxes, no
summary report information is generated.

3 If you want to customize a report’s contents,

refer to the sidebars below. Otherwise, choose
OK to exit the dialog.

Note: If you are controlling a Gilson fraction

collector via UniPoint, add the Fraction Site(s)
column to report formats. The column lists tube
locations for eluent collected for a peak.

4-55
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Changing an attribute
Setting Analysis Conditions

To assign a new attribute to a report column:

1 Select the column in the Column Contents list

box. The current attributes for the column
appear in the text and drop-down list boxes.

2 Use the text and drop-down list boxes to make

the necessary changes.

3 Click Change.

4 If you are done making modifications, choose

OK to exit the dialog. When the report is
generated, UniPoint formats text in the column
using the new attributes.

Renaming a column

To change a column heading in a report:

1 Select the column in the Column Contents list

box.

2 Type a new heading in the Heading box.

3 Click Change.

4 If you are done making modifications, choose

OK to exit the dialog. When the report is
generated, UniPoint assigns the new heading to
the column.

4-56
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Inserting a column

Setting Analysis Conditions

In the table, columns are inserted to the left of the
column selected in the Column Contents list box.
You can place the highlight after the last column to
insert a column there.

To add a column:

1 Select the appropriate column in the Column

Contents list box. Or, click beneath the last
column to add a column there.

2 Use the text and drop-down list boxes to set the

attributes for the new column.

3 Click Insert.

4 If you are done adding columns, choose OK to

exit the dialog. When the report is generated,
UniPoint includes the column.

Removing a column

To remove a column:

1 Select the column in the Column Contents list

box.

2 Click Delete.

3 If you are done making modifications, choose

OK to exit the dialog. When the report is
generated, UniPoint does not include the
column.

If you need that column later, use the inserting a

column procedures.

Changing the position of a column

To move a column:

1 Select the column in the Column Contents list

box.

2 Click on the up and down buttons to change the

position of the column in the report.
4-57
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Report Customization
Setting Analysis Conditions

In UniPoint, you can specify custom calculations

that enable you to generate report results to meet
your needs. You can indicate custom calculations in
report columns, report annotations, and peak labels.

Note: For a description of the calculations that

UniPoint currently uses to generate its
chromatography calculations, refer to Appendix C,
Calculations.

Inserting custom calculation into report

column

The following example shows you how to include a

column in individual and summary reports that uses
the United States Pharmacopoeia calculation to
generate the plate number for each peak. The United
States Pharmacopoeia (USP) calculation is as
follows:

Note: UniPoint uses the British Pharmacopoeia

calculation to generate plate number, which is as
follows:

To insert a report column that will generate the USP

plate number for each reported peak:

1 Create or open the analysis method.

2 Choose Column Formats from the Report menu.

4-58
Creating an Analysis Method 4

3 Select the option button of the report to which

Setting Analysis Conditions

the column will be added. In this example, the
Unknown report type is selected.

4 Click in the Custom check box.

5 Click on Builder to access the Expression Builder

dialog that will assist you in specifying your
custom calculations.

The Expression Builder dialog lists UniPoint

quantities, mathematical operators, peak names,
and variable names that can be used in your
calculation. To learn more about the dialog, click
on its Help button. For the items in the
Calculable Quantities list box, the description
includes syntax and usage information.

4-59
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

6 In the Expression text box, type the custom

Setting Analysis Conditions

calculation to generate the USP plate number for

each reported peak:

RETENTION_TIME/WIDTH(0)^2*16

The (0) argument in the equation identifies the

fraction peak height, which in this example is 0
because the calculation requires the width at the
baseline.

Be aware that instead of typing the calculation,

you can double-click on an identifier (such as
WIDTH) and have it appear at the cursor
location in the Expression text box.

7 Click on OK to return to the Report Column

Format dialog.

8 In the Heading text box, indicate a description

for the custom calculation. For this example, the
heading could be USP Plate.

9 Click Insert.

10 Use the up and down buttons to position the

column in the report.

4-60
Creating an Analysis Method 4

11 To include the column in another report type,

Setting Analysis Conditions

highlight the calculation in the Expression text
box and press ctrl+c to copy the calculation.

12 In the Report Type area, choose the option

button for another kind of report.

13 Click on Custom.

14 If necessary, click in the Expression text box and

then press ctrl+v to paste the calculation.

15 Use the up and down button to position the

column in the report.

16 Repeat steps 12 - 15 if you want to include the

calculation in summary reports.

The following example shows the USP Plate

column and the results generated for each peak.

4-61
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Adding custom calculation into report

Setting Analysis Conditions

annotation

A calculation in the annotation pertains to the entire

report while a calculation for a report column
pertains to each peak listed in the report.

To include a custom calculation in the annotation:

1 Create or open the analysis method.

2 Choose Report Output from the Report menu.

3 When the Report Output dialog appears, choose

the Annotation button.

The Annotation Contents dialog appears.

4 Type the text for the calculation in the

Custom Information text box. The
calculation must be within curly brackets,
{}. See the examples below.

Or, click on Builder to access the

Expression Builder dialog and use its
options to specify the calculation. Once
again, the calculation entered in the
Expression text box must be within curly
brackets.

Example 1: To display the total area for three

integrated peaks, the custom calculation
would be: {AREA(1)+AREA(2)+AREA(3)}

Example 2: To insert text identifying the custom

calculation, type the text but do not place it within
brackets, for example: Total Peak Area =
{AREA(1)+AREA(2)+AREA(3)}

4-62
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Adding custom calculation into peak label

Setting Analysis Conditions

UniPoint allows you to modify what is displayed
next to a peak in the chromatogram plot printed in
reports. You can include the peak name plus
additional information next to each integrated peak,
for example, the peak area can be listed.

To identify what you want to appear next to peaks:

1 Create or open the analysis method.

2 Choose Peak Table from the Analysis menu.

3 Use the Peak Table dialog to set peak

information.

4 Choose the Options button to display the Peak

Table Options dialog.

5 In the Peak Annotation box, type text or indicate

a calculation that will be performed and its
results listed next to the peak label. Refer to the
following examples.

Example 1: To display the peak name and its area,

indicate the following in the text box:
{PEAK_NAME}{AREA}

Example 2: To insert text identifying the expression

after the peak name, type the text but do not place it
within brackets, for example:
{PEAK_NAME} Area={AREA}

4-63
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

The following diagrams show the peak name and

Setting Analysis Conditions

area as it would appear depending on what you

entered in the Peak Annotation box. The captions
under the diagrams identify what was entered in the
Peak Annotation box.

Instead of area, you could display amount,

asymmetry, plates, and so on, or your own custom
calculation after the peak name. You can use the
Expression Builder to create the calculation used to
generate the result that will appear next to the peak.
To access the Expression Builder, select the Builder
button in the Peak Table Options dialog. Remember
to place the calculation within brackets.

4-64
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Variables

Setting Analysis Conditions

To make your analysis methods more flexible, you
can indicate a variable name instead of entering a
value in a command parameter box. A variable
name can be any combination of letters and
numbers and can contain special characters (_, $, ?,
@) as long as it is not the first character or a
mathematical operator (+, -, *, /, %). It cannot
include spaces. Valid variable names would be
PeakWidth and Peak_Sensitivity.

UniPoint does not differentiate between upper and

lower case letters in a variable name. For example, it
views the names PeakWidth, peakwidth, and
PEAKWIDTH as identifying the same value.

The command parameter specified for an event can

also be the result of performing a mathematical
function on two variables or a variable and number.
For example, PeakWidth * 2 is a valid command
parameter. You can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*),
divide (/), and return the remainder (%).

When setting up the Operations window for a run,

UniPoint prompts you for a value to assign to each
variable.

4-65
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

To see what variable names have been set for an

Setting Analysis Conditions

analysis method and to indicate lower and upper

limits for and a default for each variable, do the
following:

1 From the Analysis menu, choose Variables.

2 When the dialog appears, choose the variable

name in the list box.

3 Check the prompt that appears whenever the

software references the variable. The prompt can
be any combination of letters and numbers and
can contain special characters and spaces.

4 To indicate minimum and maximum values for

the variable, indicate the numbers in the Values
Limits box. Separate the values with a colon, for
example, 1:100. If the input is required, type an R
before the minimum value, for example, R1:100.

You can indicate variable names instead of limit

values, for example, 1:PeakWidth.

5 If you want to see a default value for the variable

name, type that in the Default Value box.

6 To remove an unused variable name, choose it in

the list box and choose Delete.

7 Click OK when finished.

4-66
Creating an Analysis Method 4

If you add, change, or delete variable names

Setting Analysis Conditions

If you add, change, or delete variable names and the
analysis method is used in an operations list, you
need to recreate the operations list or modify each
step in the list that uses the analysis method, as
outlined below.

1 Open the operations list.

2 Double-click on the step that executes the

analysis method.

3 In the Step Entry dialog, click in the Analysis

Method box and use the Browse to reselect the
analysis method.

The parameter text boxes at the bottom of the

dialog update to reflect the changes in the
analysis method. If a variable is no longer used
by the method, its parameter box is grayed.

4 Enter the correct value in each parameter box

and click on Change to update the operations
table.

5 Use the scroll arrows to display information for

the next step that uses the analysis method.

6 Repeat steps 3–5 for each step that uses the

analysis method.

7 Choose Done when finished modifying steps.

8 To remove the table column for a variable that is

no longer used:
a) Display the Format Columns dialog by
choosing its command from the Table menu
or double-clicking on the header row in the
table.
b) In the Column Contents list box, choose the
variable name and choose Delete.
c) Choose OK to exit.

9 Save and close the operations list using the File

menu.

4-67
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Error Handling
Setting Analysis Conditions

UniPoint can perform validation and system

performance checks on peaks in samples.

The Error Handling dialog identifies the error

conditions that UniPoint should be aware of when
analyzing data using the method. To display the
dialog box:

1 From the Analysis menu, choose Error

Handling.

4-68
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Activating error handling

Setting Analysis Conditions

Selecting a peak name and indicating error
conditions for it activates error handling. What
happens during a run or re-analysis processing then
depends on whether an error control method is
entered and whether the Continue on error check
box is selected.

• If neither a control method nor the Continue

check box is selected, the run or re-analysis
processing is stopped when the error condition
is met.

• If both a control method and the Continue check

box are selected, UniPoint does one of the
following:

* during a run, it executes the error handling

method and then proceeds to the next step in
the operations list.

* during re-analysis processing, it proceeds to

the next step in the re-analysis list.

• If a control method is indicated but the Continue

check box is not selected, UniPoint does one of
the following:

* during a run, it executes the error handling

method and then stops the run.

* during re-analysis processing, it stops

processing.

• If a method is not indicated, but the Continue

check box is selected, UniPoint finishes the
current step and proceeds to the next step in the
operations list or re-analysis list.

4-69
 Creating an Analysis Method 4

Indicating error conditions

Setting Analysis Conditions

To specify error conditions:

1 In the Error Handling dialog, indicate

parameters as described below.

Peak Names. Choose the names of the peak to

monitor. The list box shows the peaks set in the
peak table.

Error Method. Specify the path to and name of

the control method to execute when the selected
error condition is met. If necessary, click in this
text box and then choose the Browse button to
select the file.

Continue on error. Choose this check box if the

run or re-analysis processing should continue
even if an error has been encountered. Refer to
activating error handling, above, to see how this
check box affects what happens during the run
or re-analysis.

Error Conditions. In the list box, choose the peak

calculation or value to monitor.

Using the option buttons, choose one of the

mathematical operators: greater than, less than,
or outside range.

In the text box(es), type the monitor value(s).

2 Repeat for the next peak.

3 When finished, choose OK to exit the dialog box.

4-70
Creating an Analysis Method 4

Removing error conditions

Setting Analysis Conditions

To cancel an error condition set for a peak.

1 Choose the peak name in the list box.

2 Choose Clear.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to remove any other error

conditions.

4 Click OK to exit the dialog box.

4-71
Creating an Operations List 5

Using the options in the Operations window, you specify the list of steps to execute during
a run. A step in the list can identify a sample to inject and the control and analysis
conditions to process that sample. Or, a step may identify a control method to use for
system startup or shutdown. This section describes the components of the Operations
window and how to generate the operations list.

The Operations window is also where you start and monitor the progress of a run. In
addition, it is where you perform manual control for developing methods, described in
Section 7, Manual HPLC System Control.

5-1
 Creating an Operations List 5

Operations Window
Operations Window

You access the Operations window by creating an

operations file or by opening an existing file.
Following is an Operations window. When you first
display the window, the graph pane may not be
shown. Choose Show Graph from the Graph menu.

Refer to Section 14, Common Procedures for more

information on manipulating parts of the table or
graph displayed in a document window.

5-2
Creating an Operations List 5

Menu Bar

Operations Window
Choose available functions from the drop-down
menus found beneath the items on the menu bar.

Menu Description
File Create, save, print, delete files
or exit a window or UniPoint.

Edit Locate, make changes to, or

transfer information.

List Entry Set step-by-step instructions

to perform during a run.

Manual Control HPLC system

manually.

Run Start, stop, pause run and

indicate file naming
parameters.

Table Display or modify appearance

of the table pane.

Graph Display or modify appearance

of the graph pane.

Window Re-arrange windows or icons,

or activate a window; display
annotation or toolbar.

Help Learn about UniPoint.

Table Pane
Lists the steps to execute during a run.

Double-clicking on a row automatically displays the

dialog box used to set up parameters for the step.

Using the right mouse button, you can double-click

on the control or analysis method in a step and
display the window that shows the instructions set
in the method.

5-3
 Creating an Operations List 5

Graph Pane
Operations Window

Shows the run-time chromatographic plot of

acquired data, gradient profile of the control
method, plus run-time events. (See page 14-19 for a
description of the lines and symbols used for run-
time events.)

The trace begins at the data collection begin time

(usually synchronized with injection).

For the gradient profile, the mobile phase

composition (Y axis - labeled % Mobile Phase) is
plotted with respect to time (X axis).

Toolbar
Provides tools for manipulating the graph and for
starting, pausing, and stopping the run and/or
stopping pump flow. To activate a tool, just click on
its icon.

navigator tool Displays Navigator.

open tool Displays Open dialog.

save tool Stores operations list

to disk. If it has not
been saved, displays
the Save As dialog.

print tool Displays Print dialog.

arrow tool Turns off magnifying

glass and cross-hairs
tools.

magnifying glass tool For enlarging portion of

graph.

cross-hairs tool For identifying the mV

(or user units) and
time values for a point
on the trace.

5-4
Creating an Operations List 5

Operations Window
full-scale tool For returning graph
axes to minimum and
maximum values for
displayed trace(s).

original view tool For returning graph

axes to minimum and
maximum values set in
control method’s Strip
Chart Options dialog.

stop tool For terminating run.

pause tool For pausing run.

go tool For starting run.

stop pumps tool For stopping pumps.

To turn off/on the toolbar, choose its command

from the Window menu.

Legend Box
Identifies the symbols and lines shown in the graph.
To turn on/off the legend, choose its command from
the Graph menu.

For each trace being collected, the legend identifies

the following:

By double-clicking on an item in the legend, you can

access the Attributes dialog. Use that dialog box to
remove events from display or to change the size of
symbols and lines shown in the graph.

Note: The symbols and lines used for run-time

events (such as detector autozero) are not identified
in the legend.
5-5
 Creating an Operations List 5

Status Box
Operations Window

Displays status information for the components of

the HPLC system. You see pressure information and
contact status in this box. In addition, during the
run, you see user comments indicated in the method
or routines file being executed.

For system control to occur, the message System

Status must be displayed in this box.

If the message Disconnected is shown, you can set

up and modify the list; however, it cannot be run. To
run the list, manually start the Method Executor.

If you see the message No Control Method - Edit

Only Mode, you must set up and save a control
method before controlling system components via
an Operations window.

Right-Click Menu
Choose available functions from the right-click
menu accessed from select cells in the table pane.

Menu Description
Open Internal Displays a read-only copy of
Referenced File the file referenced in the
selected cell.

Open Referenced Displays the file at a specific

File path referenced in the selected
cell

Format Columns Displays the Format Columns

dialog

Font Displays the Font dialog

Note: If changes are made to a referenced file, then

then both the referenced file and the Operations List
must be saved for changes to take effect.

5-6
Creating an Operations List 5

Annotation Box

Setting Up an Operations List

Displays user comments for the operations list. To
turn on/off the annotation, choose its command
from the Window menu.

To add comments, use the Notes command in the

Edit menu.

Status Bar
Shows operational status or help message if a menu
command is highlighted.

5-7
 Creating an Operations List 5

Setting Up an Operations List

Setting Up an Operations List

You can set up and make changes to the operations

list using the Run Entry dialog or using the
commands in the Edit menu. If you are building a
new operations list, you can use the Express Entry
dialog or the Step Entry dialog to get started. If you
are making changes to an existing operations file,
use the commands in the Edit menu or Step Entry
dialog.

Multi-system users. Make sure only one configuration

file is referenced by the steps in the list.

5-8
Creating an Operations List 5

Before Creating List

Setting Up an Operations List

Before you set up an operations list, create the
control and, optionally, analysis methods to use
during the run.

If injected samples are analyzed and reported on by

more than one analysis method, you need to add
columns to the table. To add a column for an
additional analysis method:

1 Double-click on the top line in the table to reveal

the Format Columns dialog. (Or choose Format
Columns from the Table menu.)

2 Select a column in the Column Contents list box.

(In the operations table, the new column inserts
to the left of this column.)

3 Choose Analysis Method 2 in the Contents drop-

down list box.

4 Make any additional changes in the other text

boxes.

5 Choose Insert.

6 Repeat steps 2 - 5 to insert another analysis

method column if necessary.

7 When finished, choose Done to exit the dialog.

The table displays the new column(s).

If the operations list had information in it you

see <Replace> in each row of the added column.
You can use the Replace command in the Edit
menu to quickly substitute <Replace> with the
path to and name of the analysis method to use
during the run.

5-9
 Creating an Operations List 5

Using Express Entry Dialog for List

Setting Up an Operations List

Setup
To quickly generate the operations list, you can use
the Express Entry dialog. This method of list setup is
preferable if you are injecting all unknowns or
calibrators, or you are injecting a group of
calibrators followed by a group of unknowns. If you
are randomly injecting calibrators and unknowns,
refer to Using Step Entry Dialog for List Setup and
Modification on page 5-13.

1 Choose Express from the List Entry menu.

2 Use the options in the Express Entry dialog to set

information for the operations list.

3 Choose Generate to create the list. If steps are

currently set in the operations list, they are
replaced by the newly generated steps.

5-10
Creating an Operations List 5

Following is a description of the options in the

Setting Up an Operations List

Express Entry dialog.

Calib Levels. For calibration analyses, type the

number of calibration levels being injected for
calibrator samples.

Repeats/Level. If you are making multiple injections

of each calibrator at a level, type the number of
repeats here. UniPoint averages each level’s peak
data and uses the average peak size to build the
calibration curve for each standard peak.

A value of 1 represents a “no-repeat” condition or in

other words one injection per calibration level.

Number of Unknowns. Tell UniPoint how many

unknown samples are injected after the calibrators.

Repeats/Unknown. If you are making multiple

injections of each unknown, type the number of
repeats here. A value of 1 represents a “no-repeat”
condition or in other words one injection per
unknown.

Number of Cycles. If running a multi-cycle

calibration and unknown analysis, indicate the
number of cycles here.

For example, a calibration analysis consists of 4

calibration levels with 3 repeats per level and 5
unknown samples with 2 repeats per unknown.
How many steps are generated for 1 calibration
cycle? For 2 cycles?

1 cycle:
Steps = (4 levels x 3 repeats per level) + (5 unknowns
x 2 repeats per unknown) = 22

2 cycles:
Steps = (22 injections per cycle x 2 cycles) = 44

Control Method. Type, or use Browse to specify, the

path to and file name of the control method used to
control devices.

5-11
 Creating an Operations List 5

Analysis Method. Type, or use Browse to specify,

Setting Up an Operations List

the path to and file name of the analysis method

used to analyze collected data.

Additional text boxes. Other text boxes may

automatically appear depending on the parameters
set in your control and analysis methods. For
example, if an injector protocol requests inputs, such
as sample volume and sample location, text boxes to
answer those inputs appear. If one of the inputs
requests the fraction site at which to begin
collection, refer to Setting Up Operations List for
Fraction Collection on page 5-20.

If you indicated in the analysis method that actual

and nominal amounts should be entered for samples
or that unknowns should be grouped for additional
reporting, text boxes appear for those also.

If you added columns using the Format Columns

dialog, you see text boxes to indicate information for
those columns. For example, you may have added a
column for a second analysis method.

5-12
Creating an Operations List 5

Using Step Entry Dialog for List Setup

Setting Up an Operations List

and Modification
To indicate steps in the operations list, you can use
the Step Entry dialog. This setup method is useful if
you are randomly injecting calibrators.

The Step Entry dialog can also be used to modify or

delete steps in an existing operations list.

1 Choose Step from the List Entry menu. The Step

Entry dialog appears. (If the table already has
one or more steps, you can double-click on a row
to quickly access the dialog.)

2 Use the options in the dialog box to create or

modify the operations list. The text boxes that
appear in the dialog box vary depending on
conditions set in the control or analysis method
specified for a step. The Step up and down
arrows in the upper right corner enable you to
scroll through existing operations steps.

Description. Text describing the sample. If you

enter a number in the description, you can have
UniPoint automatically increment the number
when multiple entries are generated. To see the
Inc. box for incrementing the sample description,
include a number in the Description box (for
example, Sample 1) before you choose the
Multiple button.

5-13
 Creating an Operations List 5

Control Method. The path to and file name of

Setting Up an Operations List

the control method used to control devices.

Double-click in the text box and then use the
Browse dialog that appears to select the file.

Analysis Method. The path to and file name of

the analysis method used to analyze data
collected for the sample. Double-click in the text
box and then use the Browse dialog that appears
to select the file.

Additional text boxes. Other text boxes may

automatically appear depending on the
parameters set in your control and analysis
methods. For example, if an injector protocol
requests inputs, such as sample volume and
sample location, text boxes to answer those
inputs appear. If one of the inputs requests the
fraction site at which to begin collection, refer to
Setting Up Operations List for Fraction
Collection on page 5-20.

If you indicated in the analysis method that

actual and nominal amounts should be entered
for samples or that unknowns should be
grouped for additional reporting, text boxes
appear for those also.

If you added columns using the Format

Columns dialog, you see text boxes to indicate
information for those columns. For example, you
may have added a column for a second analysis
method.

5-14
Creating an Operations List 5

Adding step

Setting Up an Operations List

To add the first step to a new list or add a step to the
bottom of the list:

1 Make sure New Step appears in the upper right

corner of the dialog box. If not, choose New.

2 Specify information in the text boxes. For file

names, you must indicate the complete path to
the file. Therefore, click in the text box and then
use the Browse button to select the file.

3 Choose Insert when finished indicating the

step’s information.

4 Repeat to add more steps.

Inserting step between steps

To insert a step before the first step or between two

existing steps:

1 Use the Step up or down arrow to select the step

before which the new step inserts. For example,
to place a step between steps 3 and 4, display
information for step 4 in the text boxes.

2 Use the text boxes to specify information for the

step.

3 Choose Insert.

5-15
 Creating an Operations List 5

Generating multiple steps

Setting Up an Operations List

The easiest way to set up the operations list is to

generate a list of all of the steps and then modify the
steps as necessary.

1 Choose the Multiple button. You see additional

options. Refer to the dialog box on next page.

Inc. An Increment box appears next to text boxes

that prompt you for a value, such as Calib. Level.
If you do not want to increment the value for
each step, indicate 0 (zero) or leave the box
blank.

Num. Steps to Generate. How many steps to add

to the bottom of the list.

Num. Repeats per Step. How many multiples of

the step to generate. This is especially useful for
specifying multiple injections of the same
calibrator or unknown.

2 Indicate information in the text boxes.

3 Choose Generate.

If you already have one or more steps indicated,

the steps are added to the bottom of the existing
list.

4 Make the necessary changes to each step. See

Modifying step, on the next page.

5-16
Creating an Operations List 5

Deleting step

Setting Up an Operations List

To remove a step:

1 Use the Step up or down arrow so the

information for the step is displayed.

2 Choose Delete.

Modifying step

To change options for a step:

1 Use the Step up or down arrow so the

information for the step is displayed.

2 Use the text boxes to make the necessary

changes to the step.

3 Choose Change.

5-17
 Creating an Operations List 5

Using the Tray File to Generate the

Setting Up an Operations List

Operations List
When creating an operations list, you can browse to
the tray file, select multiple tube sites, and have
UniPoint generate steps in the operations list.

1 Create or open an Operations window.

2 Choose Step from the List Entry menu.

3 In the Step Entry dialog, indicate control method

and analysis method information.

4 Enter values for all variables except the sample

location variable (usually labeled TUBE or
SAMPLE_LOCATION).

5 Click in the text box for the sample location

variable and click on Browse. Or, you can
double-click in the text box.

6 When the Browse Tray window appears, choose

multiple tube sites as described below.

To select random tubes within one zone:

a) If necessary, click within the zone to make it
active. Its tubes turn from gray to blue to
indicate the zone is active.
b) Press the Ctrl key and select each tube.
Selected tubes are red.

To select a range of tubes within one zone:

a) If necessary, click within the zone to make it
active. Its tubes turn from gray to blue to
indicate the zone is active.
b) Click on the beginning tube and then press
the Shift key and click on the last tube.
Selected tubes are red.

Note: UniPoint will allow you to click and drag

over more than one zone. However, be aware
that when the software places the tube sites in
the operations list, it sorts the tube sites by
number only. The software does not sort by tube
site within zone. Therefore, you may need to
move steps so they are ordered the way that you
5-18 want them.
Creating an Operations List 5

7 Choose the Add Step(s) button. A message box

Setting Up an Operations List

appears specifying the number of steps that were
added.

8 Click on OK when the message appears that tells

how many steps were added. Then click on
Done to return to the Step Entry dialog.

9 Click on Done to exit the Step Entry dialog.

10 Review the operations list and if necessary enter

or change the sample description for each
sample. To enter sample descriptions, use the
Step Entry dialog or the Paste Special command
within the Edit menu.

5-19
 Creating an Operations List 5

Setting Up Operations List for

Setting Up an Operations List

Fraction Collection
If you are doing fraction collection, UniPoint can
keep track of the tubes used for each injection
(referred to as continuous collection). Or, you can
indicate the tube at which to start collection for each
injection (referred to as specific site collection).

With continuous collection, you indicate the zone in

which collection occurs. For the first injection,
collection starts in the first tube of the zone. For the
second and each subsequent sample collected into
the zone, collection will begin in the next available
numbered tube. (See Examples 2 and 3, on the next
page.)

With specific site collection, you indicate both the

zone and tube at which collection starts for each
sample. (See Example 1, on the next page.)

You may use both continuous collection and specific

site collection within the same operations list.

Following are example operations lists. In the

operations lists, the TUBE column identifies the
location of the sample to be injected. The
FRACTION_SITE column identifies where collection
begins for the injected sample. TUBE and
FRACTION_SITE were variables in the control
method.

5-20
Creating an Operations List 5

Example 1

Setting Up an Operations List

Specific site collection: collection of each
sample’s eluent into same set of tubes (one
zone)

If the fractions for each injection are collected into

the same set of tubes, ensure that the zone:tube for
the FRACTION_SITE variable is the same for each
sample, for example, FRACTIONS:1.

Description Control Method Analysis Method TUBE FRACTION_SITE

Injection 1 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:1 FRACTIONS:1
Injection 2 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:2 FRACTIONS:1
Injection 3 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:3 FRACTIONS:1
Injection 4 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:4 FRACTIONS:1
Injection 5 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:5 FRACTIONS:1

Example 2

Continuous collection: collection of each

sample’s eluent into its own set of tubes
(one zone)

If the fractions for each injection are collected into a

different set of tubes, indicate the zone name,
followed by a colon, into which collection begins in
each step. Refer to the FRACTION_SITE column.

Description Control Method Analysis Method TUBE FRACTION_SITE

Injection 1 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:1 FRACTIONS:
Injection 2 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:2 FRACTIONS:
Injection 3 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:3 FRACTIONS:
Injection 4 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:4 FRACTIONS:
Injection 5 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:5 FRACTIONS:

5-21
 Creating an Operations List 5

Example 3
Setting Up an Operations List

Continuous collection: collection of each

sample’s eluent into its own set of tubes
(multiple zones)

If the fractions for each injection are collected into a

different set of tubes, indicate the zone name,
followed by a colon, into which collection begins in
each step. The following example uses two zones.
Fractions from standard injections are collected into
one zone (STD_FRACTIONS), and fractions from
unknown injections are collected into another zone
(UNK_FRACTIONS).

Description Control Method Analysis Method TUBE FRACTION_SITE

Injection 1 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN STD_TUBE:1 STD_FRACTIONS:
Injection 2 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN STD_TUBE:2 STD_FRACTIONS:
Injection 3 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN STD_TUBE:3 STD_FRACTIONS:
Injection 4 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN UNK_TUBE:1 UNK_FRACTIONS:
Injection 5 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN UNK_TUBE:2 UNK_FRACTIONS:
Injection 6 C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN UNK_TUBE:3 UNK_FRACTIONS:

5-22
Creating an Operations List 5

Generating Operations List When

Setting Up an Operations List

Re-Injecting Collected Fractions
When setting up an operations list to re-inject
collected fractions, you can browse to an open
Results window and select fraction site information
to add to the operations list. This feature works with
HPLC systems that use a 233 XL or 215/819 for
sample injection and fraction collection.

Following is a description of how to browse to the

Results window to generate steps in the Operations
window.

Note: Before creating or opening the operations list,

make any necessary modifications to the control and
analysis methods. For example, in the control
method, remove fraction collector events unless you
are collecting eluent for the re-injected fractions.
Choose Save As from the File menu and save the
control method to a new name.

1 Display the Results window by opening the data

(.GDT) file or report (.GR?) file.

2 Create or open an Operations window.

3 Choose Step from the List Entry menu.

4 In the Step Entry dialog, indicate control method

and analysis method information.

5 Enter values for all variables except the sample

location variable (usually labeled TUBE or
SAMPLE_LOCATION).

6 Click in the text box for the sample location

variable and click on Browse. Or, you can
double-click in the text box.

7 When the Browse Tray window appears, click on

the Link to Results button. The Results window
then appears, along with the Samples dialog,
sample tray, and fraction collector tray.

5-23
 Creating an Operations List 5

8 Use the Samples dialog to select the appropriate

Setting Up an Operations List

sample.

9 Select fraction sites by doing one of the

following:

In the fraction collector tray, hold down the Ctrl

key and click on each fraction site.

Select the cross-hairs tool. Position the mouse

pointer in the chromatogram plot. Then hold
down the Ctrl key and click between the fraction
collector begin and end marks to select fraction
sites. Or, click and drag to draw a rectangle
around the desired fractions.

10 Choose the Add Steps button.

11 Repeat steps 8 - 10 if you want to select fractions

collected for other samples.

12 When finished, choose Done in the Fraction

Collector Sites window. The Operations window
appears and its table lists steps for the selected
fraction sites.

13 Review the list and if necessary enter or change

the sample description for each fraction.

5-24
Creating an Operations List 5

Modifying the Operations List

Modifying the Operations List

Once an operations list is set up, you can use the
commands in the Edit menu or Microsoft® Excel to
make changes. If you need help on deleting,
copying, and pasting rows or on finding and
replacing text, see Section 14, Common Procedures.

Exporting and Importing an

Operations List
1 Open a new or existing Operations List.

2 While pressing the SHIFT key, select Save As from

the File menu. Name and save the file as a .GXP
file.

3 From Microsoft® Excel, open the .GXP file that

you just created and saved. A Text Import
Wizard will launch. Accept all default settings
by clicking Finish.

4 Make desired changes within the columns.

5 Save and close the file, keeping the existing

name and formatting.

6 From the UniPoint Operations List window,

open the .GXP file.

5-25
 Creating an Operations List 5

Reviewing Where Run-Generated Files

Modifying the Operations List

Are Stored
During the run, UniPoint can generate data, report
(which include chromatogram plots of acquired
traces), calibration, log, and re-analysis list files.

UniPoint automatically creates a data/report folder

for these files and assigns default names to the run-
generated files.

1 Choose Storage from the Run menu to display

the Run File Storage dialog.

Note: If you have not saved the operations list

and assigned a name, you see a message box.
Use the Save As or Save command in the File
menu to store the operations list to disk.

2 In the Run File Storage dialog, check the names

assigned to files.

3 To modify default names, choose <Templates>

and make the changes. Then select <Files> to
review how the changes affect the file names.

If you indicate a folder name that does not exist,

UniPoint creates it for you during the run. As a
default, UniPoint uses the name of the
operations list as the folder name.

4 Choose OK to accept the settings and exit the

dialog.
5-26
Creating an Operations List 5

Following is a description of the areas of the Run

Modifying the Operations List

File Storage dialog and how UniPoint assigns
names.

Output Directory. Specifies the data/report folder

into which run-generated files are stored. As a
default folder name, UniPoint:
• uses the name assigned to the operations list
• adds a 3-digit extension (001 is assigned the
1st time the operations list is run, 002 is
assigned the 2nd time, and so on)

Data File. Specifies the path and file name where

information for collected data is stored. To assign
the file name, UniPoint uses the name of the
operations list but adds the .GDT extension.
Information for all samples injected during the run
is stored here.

Log File. Specifies the path and file name where run-
time events are stored. To assign the name, UniPoint
uses the same naming scheme as for the data file but
adds the .GLG extension.

Save Log. Indicates if a listing of run-time events is

generated.

Method File. If multiple analysis methods are used

to analyze injected samples, select the appropriate
method file name from the list box. You can then
view and if necessary change the path and file name
to use for storing report and calibration information.

Report File. Specifies the path and file name where

report information for all samples is stored. As a
default file name, UniPoint:
• uses file name assigned to the analysis
method
• assigns the extension .GR1
If data is later re-analyzed using the same
analysis method, the software increments the
number in the extension. (Up to 9 report files
can be created using the same analysis
method and stored in the same folder.)

5-27
 Creating an Operations List 5

Calibration File. Specifies the path and file name for

Modifying the Operations List

calibration plots generated for standard peaks. To

assign the name, UniPoint uses the same naming
scheme as for a report file but adds the .GB1
extension.

Disk Space. Shows how much room is available on

the disk and how much is required for the run. If
there is not enough space, do either or both of the
following:
• remove unneeded files from the disk before
starting the run
• save the output files to another fixed or
network disk drive.

Templates. Allows you to change the default file or

folder naming scheme used by UniPoint. When you
choose the <Templates> button, the software places
question marks in the output folder name and file
names. The placement of the question marks
identifies which part of the name automatically
increments when the software assigns names. You
can remove or change the placement of the question
mark(s) in a name to meet your needs. However, do
not modify the first two characters in the file name
extension for any file type.

Choose <Files> to see how a change to a template

affects the name assigned to the file or folder.

5-28
Starting an Operations List 6

The Operations window is where you start and monitor the progress of a run. The parts of
the window were described in Section 5.

While the run is in progress, you can:

• modify steps that have not yet been executed. This includes modifying a control method
or analysis method file so updated conditions are used, or adding a step to inject a
priority sample.
• use the toolbar to manipulate the appearance of the run-time graph.
• perform other types of processing in the UniPoint, for example, view the results from a
previous run, create the operations list for the next run, or execute a re-analysis.
• access and use another Windows® program, such as Microsoft® Word.

6-1
 Starting an Operations List 6

Method Executor
Method Executor

The Method Executor is an intermediary between

UniPoint and Gilson GSIOC devices. It performs the
steps in a run and enables the computer to perform
other tasks while UniPoint is running.

When you open or create an Operations window,

UniPoint searches for and tries to start a Method
Executor for programmed and manual control of the
HPLC system. You see the message System Status in
the status box of the Operations window if a
Method Executor is available.

UniPoint only allows one Method Executor to

communicate with an HPLC system configuration at
a time. If you open multiple Operations windows,
another Method Executor is not started if the
Operations window references a configuration that
is currently monitored by a Method Executor.

If you are viewing a new Operations window,

UniPoint checks the configuration file associated
with the last saved control method (the “default”
control method) and determines if a Method
Executor has been started for it. If you opened an
existing operations list, the software checks the
configuration associated with the control method
named in the first step of the list to see if a Method
Executor has been started for it.

Once a Method Executor has been started for an

HPLC system, it continues monitoring system
components until you exit UniPoint.

6-2
Starting an Operations List 6

Manually Starting the Method

Method Executor
Executor
If an Operations window is “disconnected” from
system components, you can manually start a
Method Executor for it by doing the following:

1 If another Operations window is linked to the

Method Executor, close that window. Or,
disconnect it by choosing Method Executor from
the File menu and then click Shutdown Method
Executor.

2 In the Operations window to connect to the

Method Executor, choose Method Executor from
the File menu and then click Start Method
Executor.

6-3
 Starting an Operations List 6

Starting a Run
Starting a Run

To get ready for and begin a run:

1 Make sure all system modules are turned on and

are ready to run (pumps are primed, column is
equilibrated, samples are in place, printer has
paper and is turned on, and so on).

2 Check that the correct operations list is selected

and all files used by the list exist.

3 Make sure a Method Executor is available. You

see the message System Status in the status box.

4 Choose Start from the Run menu or the go tool

( ) from the toolbar.

6-4
Starting an Operations List 6

During the Run

During the Run

When the run starts, you may want to focus your
attention on a few elements of the Operations
window. These elements are described below.

Status Box
When you open an operations list, and throughout
the run, a status box is displayed. The status box
displays information for the components of the
system. You see pressure information and contact
status in this box. In addition, during the run, you
see user comments indicated in the method,
protocol, or routines file being executed.

Table Pane
The table lists the steps to execute and highlights the
current step during the run.

Graph Pane
A run-time chromatographic plot of acquired data,
gradient profile of the control method, and run-time
events are displayed in the graph pane (Graph
menu—Show Graph).

The trace begins at the data collection begin time

(usually synchronized with injection).

For the gradient profile, the mobile phase

composition (Y-axis—labeled % Mobile Phase) is
plotted with respect to time (X-axis).

Status Bar
The status bar shows the operational status and help
messages.

If an analysis method used in a step identified more

than the maximum number of peaks (600),
UniPoint will sound an audible warning and
display a message in the status bar.

6-5
 Starting an Operations List 6

Manipulating Run-Time Graph

Manipulating Run-Time Graph

As data is acquired, the run-time plot is scaled

according to the channel scaling parameters set in
the control method for the current step. However,
you can change the scaling by zooming.

Zooming
You can use the magnifying glass tool to enlarge a
region of interest. To zoom:

1 Choose the magnifying glass tool ( ).

2 Place the mouse pointer to one side of the region

of interest in the graph.

3 Click and hold the left mouse button.

4 Drag the mouse to draw a zoom box around the

desired peaks. For example:

• To enlarge the size of peaks and still have the

chromatogram plot update as new data is
collected, extend the box slightly past the
end of the traces before releasing the mouse
button.

6-6
Starting an Operations List 6

• To scale peaks to a desired height, draw the

Manipulating Run-Time Graph

box using the height of the peak of interest or
the Y-axis as a reference, and then release the
mouse button. (See diagram below.)

• To display a time period of interest, draw the

box using the X-axis as a reference, and then
release the mouse button. (See diagram
below.)

5 Be aware of the following:

• If the zoom box extended past the end of the

displayed trace(s), the plot continues to
update as additional data is acquired.
However, the time period duration shown in
the X-axis remains the same. To display the
entire chromatogram plot, choose the full-
scale tool.

• If the zoom box did not extend past the end

of the displayed trace(s), the plot does not
update as additional data is acquired. The
chromatogram plot remains static. It begins
to update again if you choose the arrow tool
( ) or the full-scale tool ( ) or when data
for the next injected sample begins to appear.

6-7
 Starting an Operations List 6

Moving Plot Along X-Axis

Manipulating Run-Time Graph

To move the plot along the X-axis:

1 Use the magnifying glass tool ( ) as described

above to enlarge part of the plot.

2 Use the scroll bar that appears along the bottom

of the plot. To examine peaks with longer
retention times, move the scroll box to the left.
To examine peaks with shorter retention times,
move the box to the right.

Finding Peak Information

To determine retention time and voltage
information:

1 Click on the cross-hairs tool ( ).

2 Move the mouse pointer to the peak of interest.

In the information line at the bottom of the
window, you see:
• retention time
• mV height (or specified user-defined units)

If you are looking at a test chromatogram, this is

a convenient way to determine the retention
time of a peak.

3 Click on the arrow tool ( ) to turn off the cross-

hairs tool ( ).

Returning X- and Y-Axes to Control

Method Settings

Choose the original view tool ( ) from the toolbar

or its command from the Graph menu to return the
X- and Y-axes to the minimum and maximum
settings in the control method. UniPoint uses the
values in the method’s Strip Chart Options dialog.

6-8
Starting an Operations List 6

Removing/Replacing Traces and

Manipulating Run-Time Graph

Symbols from Display
To remove one or more traces or symbols:

1 Double-click on an item in the legend. Or,

choose Attributes from the Graph menu.

2 When the Attributes dialog appears, choose the

description for the item to remove from the
Legend list box.

3 Remove the X from the Display/Symbol check

box.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any additional items to

remove.

5 To disable display of peak names, remove the X

from the Display Peak Names check box.

6 To disable display of run-time events (such as

detector autozero), remove the X from the
Display Event check box. (For a description of
symbols and lines for run-time events, see page
14-19.)

7 Choose OK.

To re-display an item, follow the instructions above

but insert the X in the Display check box.

Displaying/Removing Gridlines
You can turn off and on the display of gridlines in
the graph:

1 In the Graph menu of the document window,

choose the Signal Axis (for the Y-axis) and Time
Axis (for the X-axis).

2 When the dialog box appears, remove or insert

the check mark in the Major or Minor check
boxes and choose OK.

3 Repeat for the other axis.

6-9
 Starting an Operations List 6

Interrupting a Run
Interrupting a Run

You can choose to pause, stop flow, or terminate a

run in progress.

Pause Run

To pause a run, choose Pause from the Run menu or

its tool ( ) from the toolbar.

This option causes the run time and gradient

progression to enter a timed hold. The duration of
the pause is indicated in the status area. Mobile
phase continues to flow at the current composition
and flow rate. If you pause a run, data collection is
not interrupted. It proceeds until the data collection
time for the current control method elapses.

To continue the gradient progression, choose Pause

again from the Run menu or its tool from the
toolbar. The run time and the gradient profile
continue as programmed.

Stop Flow
To stop flow, choose Stop All Pumps from the
Manual menu or its tool ( ) from the toolbar.

This option causes the run time and gradient

progression to enter a timed hold. The duration of
the hold is indicated in the status area. However,
unlike the Pause option, mobile phase does not flow.
Like the pause option, data collection is not
interrupted. It proceeds until the data collection time
elapses.

To restart the flow and remain in the timed hold,

choose Mobile Phase from the Manual menu. Then
click on Start Flow in the dialog box.

To restart the flow and continue the run as

programmed in the control method, choose Pause
from the Run menu or its tool ( ) from the toolbar.

6-10
Starting an Operations List 6

Stop Run

Interrupting a Run
To stop the run before it completes, choose Stop
from the Run menu or its tool ( ) from the toolbar.

This option stops the run. When asked, verify that

you want to quit the run by clicking on Yes. If you
choose No, the run continues.

If you choose Yes, a message box appears that asks

you whether or not to save collected data (unless
you’re using the ERM features in UniPoint, see
Section 16, Using Electronic Record Management
Features). Choosing Yes saves the data collected for
the operations step on which the run was stopped to
the data file, along with the data collected for any
previous steps. If you choose No, UniPoint does not
save the data collected for the step to the data file.

Note: If you stop the run on the first data collection

step and indicate that you do not want to save data,
UniPoint asks if you want to delete the data/report
output directory that was also created for the run
and any files, such as the log file, stored in it.

If you stop a run and no data was collected in any of

the executed steps, UniPoint automatically deletes
the data/report output directory and any files in it,
such as the log file.

The mobile phase composition and flow conditions

in effect at the time of termination remain in effect.
Flow does not stop automatically after a run! To stop
flow, choose Stop All Pumps from the Run menu or
its tool ( ) from the toolbar.

6-11
 Starting an Operations List 6

Resuming a Run After Termination

Resuming a Run After Termination

You can restart a run that was stopped while in

progress. You can resume the run at the same step at
which it was terminated. Or, you can resume the run
at an earlier step if you want to repeat a series of
steps.

1 Choose Resume from the Run menu.

2 Type the number of the step at which to resume.

You can indicate the same step number at which
the run was terminated. Or, specify the number
of a step prior to that one so you can repeat steps
within the run.

The information for each sample is added to the

end of the data and report files created for the
terminated run. If you repeat a series of steps,
there is duplicate information for the repeated
injections. To generate meaningful reports, you
can do a batch re-analysis that omits any “bad”
injections.

6-12
Starting an Operations List 6

3 You will see a Fraction Collection area at the

Resuming a Run After Termination

bottom of the Resume Run dialog if the data
(.GDT) file specified in the File text box contains
any fraction collection events.

If the steps in your operations list identify the zone

and tube number (specific site collection), UniPoint
will collect into the specified tube when you resume
the run and will not use the information in the
Fraction Collection list box. Therefore, you can
disregard the information in the Fraction Collection
list box.

If the steps in your operations list identify just the

zone name (continuous collection), UniPoint uses
the information in the Fraction Collection list box to
identify the tube at which to start collection for a
zone. You can review and if necessary modify the
information in the Fraction Collection list box,
described below.

In the Fraction Collection list box, UniPoint lists

each zone used in the data file specified in the File
text box and lists the next tube to be accessed in the
zone. Be aware that every zone required for the
resumed run may not be listed if the previous run
was terminated before all of the zones were used at
least once. During the resumed run, collection
begins in tube 1 for any unlisted zone. Also, be
aware that a listed zone may not be required by any
of the steps in the resumed run.

6-13
 Starting an Operations List 6

When the run is resumed, fraction collection will

Resuming a Run After Termination

begin in the specified tube for the first step that uses
a zone. For each subsequent step that identifies the
zone, collection will begin in the next available
numbered tube in the zone.

If you want to change the start tube for a zone in the

Fraction Collector list box, do one of the following.

• Click on the zone:tube item in the list box so it

appears in the Fraction Collection text box.
Replace the tube number with the new tube
number; do not change the zone name. Click on
Change to modify the zone:tube item in the
Fraction Collection list box.

• Click on the zone:tube item in the list box so it

appears in the Fraction Collection text box. Use
the Browse button to access the Tray Editor
Browse dialog. To choose the fraction site, click
within the zone, on the tray image, so its tubes
become cyan (light blue). Click on the desired
tube so it becomes red. Click on OK to return to
the Resume Run dialog. When the dialog re-
appears, the selected fraction site appears in the
Fraction Collection text box. Click Change to
modify the zone:tube item in the Fraction
Collection list box.

6-14
Starting an Operations List 6

After the Run

After the Run

Status of UniPoint
A run is complete once UniPoint has finished all of
the steps in the operations list (or after you have
selected Stop).

The mobile phase composition and flow conditions

in effect when the run is finished remain in effect.
Flow does not stop automatically after a run! To stop
flow, choose Stop All Pumps from the Run menu or
its tool ( ) from the toolbar.

If the method was set to save data and analysis

reports to the fixed disk, those data and report
files can be viewed and/or printed using the
Results window; see Section 8. Stored data can
also be re-analyzed using new analysis conditions;
see Section 10.

If the run was a calibration run, the internal

calibration curves used to analyze unknowns were
saved to a calibration file. This file is named for the
analysis method and has the .GB? extension. See
Section 9 for information on viewing calibration
plots.

6-15
 Starting an Operations List 6

Shutting Down the HPLC System

After the Run

Shutdown methods are control method files that

include conditions that you want in effect after each
run. A shutdown method might reduce the flow rate
to zero and extinguish the lamp on a detector. You
create shutdown methods as you would any other
control method.

To automatically shut down your HPLC system at

the end of a run, specify the name of the shutdown
control method as the last step in the operations list.

If your operations list does not automatically

execute a shutdown method, Gilson recommends
the following shutdown procedure:

1 Choose Mobile Phase from the Manual menu.

2 In the Time box, specify the ramp time over

which to achieve the desired shutdown
conditions.

3 In the Flow and % boxes, specify shutdown

conditions appropriate to your column.

4 Choose Begin.

5 After achieving the desired composition and

flow rate, turn off the pumps and mixer.

Note: When pumping salt solutions, leave the

pump running at a very slow flow rate (0.05
mL/min.) to avoid precipitating salt crystal
deposits that might scratch the pump head’s
piston.

If the system will remain unused for a long time,

rinse the salt solutions from the pump heads
with HPLC-grade water before shutdown.

6 Choose Done to exit the Manual Mobile Phase

Control dialog.

6-16
Starting an Operations List 6

Viewing Log File

After the Run

To display the log file produced during a run:

1 Choose Open from the File menu.

2 Locate and choose the name of the log file. It is

stored in the data/report output directory
created for the run and has the extension .GLG.

3 Choose OK. The file appears in a text editor box.

You can add your own comments, change the
font, and print the log file.

6-17
Manual HPLC System Control 7

In addition to timed runs, UniPoint also provides manual control over HPLC system
components. Manual control is useful for getting the system up and running, for method
development, and for checking HPLC system operation before a run.

Note: Before running your system in manual mode, be sure that the devices in the HPLC
system are turned on and the appropriate connections are made as described in the
UniPoint System Installation Guide.

Manual control is available from the Manual menu of an Operations

window. The first command in the menu stops all pumps. The middle
group of commands displays dialog boxes for issuing instructions to
system components. The last command is for checking or selecting the
manual control method.

When a manual mode command is issued, the system responds

immediately. There are no timed event schedules in manual mode, but you
can instruct the pumps to achieve a specific flow over time.

Note: A protocol file cannot be run at the same time as other types of manual control.

When you open or create an Operations window, UniPoint searches for and tries to start a
Method Executor for programmed and manual control of the HPLC system. You see the
System Status message in the status box of the Operations window if a Method Executor is
available.

7-1
 Manual HPLC System Control 7

Manual Control Method

Manual Control Method

For manual control to occur, UniPoint needs the

system configuration and device description
information set in a control method. By default, the
software uses the control method in the first step of
the operations list. If no steps have been set, it
recalls the name of the last control method saved to
disk.

Use the following procedures to see which method

is used for manual control and change that method
if necessary.

1 Choose Control Method from the Manual menu.

2 Review the name of the control method listed in

the File Name box. This is the method used for
manual operation.

3 Do one of the following:

• Click on Cancel if the control method listed
is appropriate.
• Or, use the options in the dialog box to select
a different control method and click on OK.

7-2
Manual HPLC System Control 7

Modifying the Control Method

Manual Control Method

During manual control, you may realize that a
device or one of its resources, such as an output
contact or data channel, has not been assigned a
description. You can modify the manual control
method and reflect these changes in the Operations
window.

1 Open the document window for the control

method.

2 Make the necessary changes using the Device

menu.

3 Save and close the control method.

4 Reselect the method using the Control Method

command in the Manual menu of the Operations
window. UniPoint reads the information in the
updated control method so it can be used for
manual control.

7-3
 Manual HPLC System Control 7

Control of Mobile Phase Pumps

Control of Mobile Phase Pumps and Manometric Module

and Manometric Module

In the Mobile Phase Control dialog, you can zero the
manometric module and instruct Gilson pumps to
achieve a desired mobile phase composition and
flow rate over a specified time. To display this
dialog box:

1 Choose Mobile Phase from the Manual menu.

Note: If you are using UniPoint with SF Pressure

Control, you will also see a text box for setting the
Pressure for the 821 Pressure Regulator. Pressure is
the pressure to achieve at the column outlet. Values
between 0 and 40 MPa (400 bar or 8700 psi) are
valid.

7-4
Manual HPLC System Control 7

Zeroing the Manometric Module

Control of Mobile Phase Pumps and Manometric Module

Caution! Before zeroing the manometric module,
there must be no pressure on the HPLC system.
Check that the pumps are not pumping and the
prime/purge valve is open before following these
procedures.

To zero the manometric module:

1 Click on the Zero Mano. Module button.

2 When the caution box appears, once again

ensure there is no pressure on the HPLC system.

3 Click on OK to zero the manometric module and

return to the Mobile Phase Control box.

Or, click on Cancel to return to the Mobile Phase

Control box without zeroing the manometric
module.

7-5
 Manual HPLC System Control 7

Controlling the Pumps

Control of Mobile Phase Pumps and Manometric Module

To control the pumps:

1 In the Time box, type the amount of time to

ramp from the current flow and composition
conditions to the desired conditions.

The limit of resolution is 0.01 min. Press

backspace to correct typing errors.

For immediate results, type 0 min. Use this with

caution - column shock can result from drastic
shifts in composition or flow.

2 In the Flow box, type the desired flow rate. You

can set a flow resolution of 0.001 times the
maximum flow of the pump head. At or below
10% of the maximum flow, settable resolution is
0.0001 times the maximum flow.

3 In the mobile phase composition box for each

pump except the first one, type the desired
percent composition from that pump.

4 After specifying all parameters, click on one of

the command buttons. The labels of the some of
the buttons change once the button is selected.
For example, when you click on Begin, it
changes to End.

Begin/End. Choose Begin to ramp the pumps

from the existing flow and composition
conditions to the new conditions you just set.

Choose End to stop ramping to new conditions.

Mobile phase continues to flow at the flow rate
and composition in effect when you chose End.
To ramp again to new conditions, choose Begin.

7-6
Manual HPLC System Control 7

Hold/Resume. Choose Hold to temporarily stop

Control of Mobile Phase Pumps and Manometric Module

the ramping of the pumps to new conditions.
Mobile phase continues to flow at the flow rate
and composition in effect when you chose Hold.

To continue ramping after a “hold” state has

been entered, choose Resume.

Stop Flow. Choose Stop Flow to stop the pumps.

Mobile phase does not continue to flow. To
restart flow, click on Begin.

Unlock/Lock. Choose Unlock to return control of

the pumps to their front panels. The front panel
settings on the pumps immediately become
active.

To restore control to UniPoint, choose Lock.

5 Choose Done to remove the Mobile Phase

Control dialog from the screen. When you close
this dialog box, the conditions indicated remain
in effect.

7-7
 Manual HPLC System Control 7

Strip Chart Control

Strip Chart Control

The Manual Strip Chart dialog allows you to set

scaling options for and to start and stop data
collection. You can view a strip chart for one, two, or
several data channels in the graph pane of the
Operations window.

1 Choose Strip Chart from the Manual menu.

2 Review and if necessary modify the options in

the dialog box. The default conditions are those
set in the manual control method.

The data rate, strip chart speed, and auto-range

options pertain to data collection for all
channels. The other options in the dialog relate
to the data channel whose description is
currently highlighted in the list box.

Channel. Select the channel to set or modify its

display, offset, or minimum and maximum
signal axis options.

Display. Remove the X from the check box if you

do not want to see the channel once data
collection is initiated using the Start command
button.

% Offset. Use this parameter to move the

channel’s trace away from the horizontal (time)
axis and from other channel traces. Express the
offset as a percent displacement from the
horizontal axis (0%). The default value is 0%
offset.

7-8
Manual HPLC System Control 7

Min (mVolt) and Max (mVolt). Set the lower and

Strip Chart Control

upper limits for the signal axis. Be aware of the
following:

• If the Auto Range check box is selected the

software disregards these values and uses
the minimum and maximum heights for all
channels to determine the signal axis.

• If Auto Range is not selected and you

indicate different minimum and maximum
values for each channel being collected, the
software uses the lowest and highest values
entered to determine the signal axis. For
example, if 0 and 10ÿmV were entered for
the minimum and maximum values for the
254 nm channel and 0 and 100 mV were
entered for the 280 nm channel, the signal
axis would be 0 to 100 mV.

Auto Range. If this check box is selected,

UniPoint automatically scales incoming data to
its minimum and maximum on the on-screen
strip chart.

Data Rate. The number of data points collected

per second for all channels. The maximum value
is 80 points per second.

Display Time. Identifies the time period to

display on the X-axis of the strip chart.

3 To begin viewing data from the channels, choose

Start. The traces for the channels appear in the
graph pane of the Operations window. The
legend identifies the channels.

7-9
 Manual HPLC System Control 7

4 To get a better view of the data in the graph

Strip Chart Control

pane, choose Done to remove the Manual Strip

Chart dialog from the screen.

Data collection continues until you choose Stop

in the Manual Strip Chart dialog or close the
Operations window. When data collection is
halted, a dialog box appears that enables you to
print or save the collected data.

If you select to save the strip chart, it is stored to

the output directory identified in the Run File
Storage dialog. UniPoint assigns the file name
STRIP??M.GDT where ?? is a number (01-99)
that is incremented each time a manual strip
chart is saved to the directory. UniPoint also
assigns the description Manual to the sample.

If you select to print the strip chart, you see an

Operations Strip Chart Print dialog. This dialog
identifies the connected printer and enables you
to indicate strip chart speed (mm/min) and set
printer options.

7-10
Manual HPLC System Control 7

Contact Control

Contact Control
The I/O Contact Control dialog offers control over
output contacts. You can open, close, or pulse
output contacts.

Before opening the I/O Contact Control dialog, you

can check the state of an output contact by referring
to the status box.

1 Choose Contacts from the Manual menu.

2 To change the state of or pulse a contact, click on

its name in the list box. Then choose Open,
Close, or Pulse.

3 Choose Done to remove the I/O Contact Control

dialog from the screen. When you close this box,
each output contact remains in its current state.

7-11
 Manual HPLC System Control 7

Control of Injector, Detector,

Control of Injector, Detector, Collector, Computer, and Other Devices

Collector, and Other Devices

During manual control, you can send instructions to
the injector, detector, fraction collector, and any
other Gilson device that has been set in the
configuration file of the manual control method.

To issue a command to one of these devices:

1 Choose the device name from the Manual menu.

The Generic command enables you to issue
commands for devices not included under one of
the other commands.

2 Use the areas in the dialog to select the

command to issue and choose the Send
command.

3 When finished issuing commands, choose Done.

7-12
Manual HPLC System Control 7

GSIOC Command Strings

GSIOC Command Strings

Each device has a set of commands that it
understands. Most, but not all, of these commands
have been provided in the dialog boxes accessed
from the Manual menu. If there is another feature
that you would like to perform with a device, refer
to its User’s Guide. A complete list of available
GSIOC commands is listed there.

To issue a command string to a device:

1 Choose Generic from the Manual menu.

2 If necessary, choose the Custom> button when

the Generic Device Control dialog appears. If the
Custom> button is already active, its label
becomes List>. Therefore, if you see a List>
button, proceed to the next step because the
options necessary for sending a GSIOC
command string are already shown.

3 Type the command string in the Command box.

7-13
 Manual HPLC System Control 7

4 Using the options buttons, choose the type of

GSIOC Command Strings

command. The documentation for the GSIOC

command tells what type of command it is.

Buffered commands send instructions to a device.

These commands are executed one at a time.

Immediate commands request status information

from a device. These commands are executed
immediately, temporarily interrupting other
commands in progress.

5 Monitor the unit’s response to your command in

the Response area.

6 Choose Done to remove the dialog box from the

screen.

7-14
Results 8

The Results window enables you to view chromatogram plots and analysis information for
collected data. You can do this by opening a data file or report file.

Note: If your system includes a 170 Diode Array Detector, refer to the detector user’s guide
for information on viewing and manipulating acquired diode array data.

From a run, UniPoint produces a file containing the channel data collected and stored for all
injected samples. This data file contains time and signal information for each sample. No
analysis amounts are stored in a data file. Therefore, when you open a data file, you do not
see analysis information unless you associate an analysis method and optionally a calibration
file with the data file. (Procedures for associating method and calibration files with a data file
are in this section.)

To view results of data analysis, you select the report file generated during a run or re-
analysis processing. Along with the calculations, the report file identifies the data file,
analysis method, and, if applicable, calibration file used to generate amounts.

8-1
 Results 8

Results Window
Results Window

The following illustrations show the components of

the Results window that can be displayed for a data
file and a report file.

Refer to Section 14, Common Procedures for more

information on manipulating parts of the table or
graph displayed in a document window.

Results window for data file

Results window for report file

8-2
Results 8

Menu Bar

Results Window
Choose available functions from the drop-down
menus found beneath the items on the menu bar.
Some menu items are not available if a report file is
open.

Menu Description
File Create, save, print, delete files or exit
a window or UniPoint.

Edit Transfer information.

View Select sample data or report and

associated tray file(s) to view.

Linking Associate method and calibration

files with displayed data.

Analysis Modify integration, peak, and data

channel parameters.

Comparisons Generate new trace by subtracting or

dividing two traces or removing
baseline shift from a trace.

Table Display or modify appearance of the

table pane.

Graph Display or modify appearance of the

graph pane.

Window Re-arrange windows or icons, or

activate a window; display file
annotation or toolbar.

Help Learn about UniPoint.

8-3
 Results 8

Table Pane
Results Window

Shows information for integrated peaks. If no

information is shown in the table for a report, no
peaks were integrated.

The columns in the table depend on the report type

and format specified in the analysis method used to
produce the report file or linked to the data file.

Note: As you can see in the example data file

window on the previous page, you do not see the
table pane if you have not linked to an analysis
method.

For external standard, internal standard or percent

normalization reports, note the following when
looking at amounts:

• If a linear regression or point-to-point curve fit

was used to determine amounts for an unknown
sample, the software lists amounts for areas (or
heights) that are up to 10% above the highest
level amounts on the calibration curve. Beyond
that, it lists ** high ** for the amount.

• If a quadratic or cubic curve fit was used, the

software lists **high** or ** low ** for areas (or
heights) that are above or below the highest and
lowest level amounts on the calibration curve.

• If the calibration curve was invalid or the

amount was calculated as a negative value, the
software lists ** error ** for the amount
associated with a peak.

• If an integrated peak was not named in the

analysis method’s peak table, the software lists
0.00 for its amount(s).

• If you are viewing a data file and a calibration

table has not been linked, you see ** N/A ** for
amounts, indicating they are not available.

8-4
Results 8

Graph Pane

Results Window
Shows the chromatogram plot for collected traces
plus run-time events and peak names, if data file is
linked to an analysis method or report file is
displayed. (For a description of run-time symbols
and lines, see page 14-19.)

Legend Box
Identifies the traces shown in the graph. If there is a
> in front of a description, that trace’s peak
information is reported in the table pane.

By double-clicking on the legend, you can access the

Attributes dialog to change how traces appear and
remove traces, run-time events, and peak names
from display. See page 14-18.

Summary Graph
Shows the complete chromatogram plot for the
selected traces.

8-5
 Results 8

Toolbar
Results Window

Allows for manipulating the appearance of the

chromatogram plot plus provides quick access to file
maintenance and selection options. To activate the
tool, just click on its icon.

navigator tool Displays Navigator.

log on/log off tool Displays the UniPoint

Log On dialog

open tool Displays Open dialog.

save tool Displays Save Report

dialog. (Not available
if report file is open or
if data file is not linked
to an analysis method.)

print tool Displays Print dialog.

arrow tool Turns off magnifying

glass, move trace, and
cross-hairs tools.

magnifying glass tool For enlarging area of

graph.

cross-hairs tool For identifying mV (or

user units) and time
values for point on
trace.

move trace tool For moving trace(s) to

different location in
graph.

adjust baseline tool For modifying the

baseline beneath a
peak. (Not available if
report file is open or if
data file is not linked
to an analysis method.)
8-6
Results 8

full-scale tool For returning graph

Results Window
axes to minimum and
maximum values for
displayed trace(s).

original view tool Returns graph to the

settings shown when
the window was first
opened, or if a data file
is linked to an analysis
method to the settings
in the method.

integration tool Displays the

Integration Events
dialog.

peak table tool Displays the Peak

Table dialog.

analysis channel tool Displays the Analysis

Channel dialog.

spectral library tool Displays the Spectral

Library Entry dialog.

To turn off/on the toolbar, choose its command

from the Window menu.

Annotation Box
Lists information for the displayed data or report.
To turn off/on the annotation, choose its command
from the Window menu.

Status Bar
Displays help message if a menu command is
highlighted. Displays mV (or user units) and time
values for point on trace if cross-hairs tool is being
used.

8-7
 Results 8

Opening Report and Data Files

Opening Report and Data Files

To view results from a chromatographic run, you

can choose a report file to view both trace and
analysis information or a data file to view traces.
Both file types display the Results window.

Selecting Report File Information to

View
To select a report file to view:

1 From the File menu, choose Open. Or, use the

Navigator to click on the Results option and then
click on Open.

2 When the Open dialog appears, type or select a

report file. If the file is not listed in the File
Name box, do one or more of the following:
• In the Drives box, select a different drive.
• In the Directories box, select a different
folder.

When you select a report file, additional options

appear in the Open dialog.

8-8
Results 8

3 When the desired report file is shown in the File

Opening Report and Data Files

Name box, do one of the following:
• Click OK to view report information for the
first sample and then view report and
summary report information for all other
samples.
• Or, highlight the description of a sample or
summary report in the Report list box and
then click on OK. This enables you to
initially display report information for a
sample other than the first injection.

The Results window appears, displaying the

report information and chromatogram plot for
the selected sample. The traces are scaled to the
settings specified in the analysis method.

The title bar identifies the name of the report file

and the injection number of the sample whose
information is shown. If multiple traces were
collected for the sample, the table pane contains
information for the analysis channel selected in
the analysis method.

Note: If the data file associated with a report file

was deleted, only the report information
appears; no chromatogram plot is shown.

8-9
 Results 8

4 To view the report for another sample, choose

Opening Report and Data Files

Samples from the View menu. In the list box,

double-click on the description. It may take a
few seconds for the report’s information to
display in the Results window.

You can keep the Report dialog on-screen and

browse through each report by selecting its
name and then choosing View. To move the
Reports dialog, click on its title bar and drag it to
a new location.

To size the Report dialog, position the mouse

pointer at the side or corner of the box. Click and
drag the box to the desired size.

Choose Done to remove the Reports box.

5 If injector and/or fraction collector tray

information is available for the report file, use
the commands in the View menu to display the
tray files. The Display All command
automatically sizes and shows the Results
window, Samples dialog, injector tray (if
available), and fraction collector tray (if
available).

Refer to Appendix A, Sample Tracking for more

information on setting pre-run parameters so
you can view injector and fraction collector tray
information after the run.

8-10
Results 8

Selecting Data File Information to

Opening Report and Data Files

View
You can select samples from one or more data files
and view their data in the Results window.

Note: If an analysis method is open, UniPoint uses

the conditions in that method to try to integrate
peaks. If you do not want analysis to occur, close the
method before opening the data file.

If you have multiple analysis methods open, you see

the Analysis Method Link dialog and then you can
select the method to use.

1 From the File menu, choose Open.

2 When the Open dialog appears, type or select a

data file. If the file is not listed in the File Name
box, do one or more of the following:
• In the Drives box, select a different drive.
• In the Directories box, select a different
folder.

3 Refer to the side bars below depending on what

you want to view.

8-11
 Results 8

Step through traces collected for each

Opening Report and Data Files

injected sample

To view the data collected for the first injected

sample and then view data collected for any
additional injections:

1 When the desired data file is shown in the File

Name box, do one of the following:
• Click on OK to see the trace(s) for the first
sample.
• Or, highlight the description of a different
sample in the list box and then click on OK.
This enables you to initially display the
trace(s) for a sample other than the first
injection.

The Results window appears, displaying the

trace(s) for the first sample or the selected
sample. The traces are displayed at full scale.

The title bar identifies the name of the data file

and the injection number of the sample whose
information is shown.

2 To view the trace(s) for another sample, choose

Samples from the View menu. In the list box,
double-click on the sample description. It may
take a few seconds before the sample
information is displayed.

You can keep the list box on-screen and browse

through each sample by selecting its name and
then choosing View. To move the Samples
dialog, click on its title bar and drag it to a new
location.

Using the Samples dialog, you can also select a

sample and add its trace(s) to the chromatogram
plot in the graph pane. To do this, press the CTRL
key then double-click on the sample’s
description. The chromatogram plot updates to
show the additional trace(s) and real-time events
for the selected sample. The title bar does not
update.

8-12
Results 8

To size the Samples dialog, position the mouse

Opening Report and Data Files

pointer at the side or corner of the box. Click and
drag the box to the desired size.

Choose Done to remove the Samples dialog.

3 If injector and/or fraction collector tray

information is available for the data file, use the
commands in the View menu to display the tray
files. The Display All command automatically
sizes and shows the Results window, Samples
dialog, injector tray (if available), and fraction
collector tray (if available).

Refer to Appendix A, Sample Tracking for more

information on setting pre-run parameters so
you can view injector and fraction collector tray
information after the run.

4 To analyze displayed data and see report

information, link to an analysis method. See
page 8-24 for details.

8-13
 Results 8

View each trace in its own window

Opening Report and Data Files

To view each trace collected for a sample in its own

document window:

1 When the desired data file is shown in the File

Name box of the Open dialog, choose the
sample(s) in the Sample list box. To select
multiple samples, hold down the CTRL key while
clicking on each sample name.

2 Choose the data channel(s) for the trace(s) to

display.

3 Choose the Add button to insert the sample and

channel combinations into the bottom-most list
box.

4 Continue adding information to the bottom-

most list box. You can select samples from
another file by choosing a different data file in
the File Name box.

5 Choose OK when you are done selecting

samples.

A Results window appears for each of the

selected traces. The traces are displayed at full
scale.

8-14
Results 8

6 Use the commands in the Window menu to re-

Opening Report and Data Files

arrange the document windows. Also, use the
Window menu to make a window active.

8-15
 Results 8

Compare traces for different samples in the

Opening Report and Data Files

same window

You can view traces collected for different samples

in the same document window by doing the
following:

1 When the desired data file is shown in the File

Name box of the Open dialog, choose the
sample(s) in the Sample list box. To select
multiple samples, hold down the CTRL key while
clicking on each sample name.

2 Choose the data channel(s) of the trace(s) to

display.

3 Choose the Add button to insert the sample and

channel combination(s) into the bottom list box.
Up to eight trace(s) can be compared at one time.

4 Continue adding information to the bottom list

box. To view sample information from a
different data file, type or select the name of the
data file so it appears in the File Name box. Then
use the Sample and Channel list boxes.

5 Choose the Compare check box.

8-16
Results 8

6 Choose OK. The Results window appears and

Opening Report and Data Files

displays full-scale trace(s) for the selected
samples. And, the title bar displays COMPARE.

8-17
 Results 8

Locating and Opening a Data File

Opening Report and Data Files

Using Sample Description

UniPoint can search for a string of text that appears
in the sample description located in one or more
data files. If the software finds the text string, it lists
the complete path for the file. You can then choose
to open the file and view the data collected for the
sample.

To search for a sample description:

1 From the File menu, choose Sample Search. The

Sample Search dialog appears.

2 In the Sample Search Pattern box, type the string

of text to find.

3 Use the Start Directory and Drives boxes to

specify the path of the data files to search. The
software searches all data files located in the
path, including all subdirectories, listed above
the Start Directory list box.

8-18
Results 8

4 To further pinpoint the search:

Opening Report and Data Files

• Select the Match Whole Word Only check
box to find occurrences of the text that are
complete words and not part of larger words.
• Select the Match Case check box to find
occurrences of the search text that appear in
the same upper and lower case combination
indicated in the Sample Search Pattern box.

5 Click Search.

6 To print a listing of the files whose sample

descriptions include the search text, choose Print
when the search completes.

7 To view information associated with a sample

description, choose it in the Matching Samples/
Files list box. The Selected Sample Information
area shows annotation information for the
selected sample.

To view the chromatogram plot for the sample,

choose Open to display the Results window.

8 To remove the Sample Search dialog from

display, choose Done.

8-19
 Results 8

Overlaying (or Merging) Additional

Opening Report and Data Files

Chromatogram Data
If a data file is open, you can select sample
information from the same data file or another data
file, and view it along with the trace(s) already
displayed. (You cannot overlay or merge data into a
report file.)

Overlaying data from the same file

Using the Samples dialog, you can also select a

sample and add its trace(s) to the chromatogram
plot in the graph pane.

1 Choose Samples from the Edit menu.

2 When the Samples dialog appears, press the CTRL

key then double-click on the sample’s description
in the list box. The chromatogram plot updates to
show the additional trace(s) and real-time events
for the selected sample. The title bar does not
update.

3 To close the dialog box, double-click on its

control-menu box.

8-20
Results 8

Overlaying data from a different file

Opening Report and Data Files

To display sample data from a different file:

1 If multiple Results windows are displayed,

choose the appropriate window by clicking on
its title bar.

2 Choose Merge from the File menu.

3 Use the dialog to select a data file, the sample,

and its trace(s). Then choose Add to insert its
information into the list box.

4 Choose OK. The information is shown in the

selected Results window (see next page).

8-21
 Results 8
Opening Report and Data Files

Before overlaying trace(s)

After overlaying trace(s)

8-22
Results 8

Removing overlaid trace(s)

Opening Report and Data Files

To remove one or more overlaid traces from the
graph:

1 Choose Remove Trace from the Graph menu.

2 When the Trace Removal dialog appears, choose

the description for the trace in the list box and
then choose Remove.

3 Click Done to exit the dialog.

8-23
 Results 8

Analyzing Data or Analyzing it in a

Analyzing Data or Analyzing it in a Different Way

Different Way
The Results window enables you to link displayed
data with an analysis method or a calibration plot so
the data can be analyzed using new conditions. It
also lets you modify analysis parameters so you can
see how the changes affect the integration of peaks.
You can then store the outcome of the analysis to a
report file.

Linking to an Analysis Method

If you opened a data file and want to integrate
peaks, you need to link to an analysis method file.

1 Choose Analysis Method from the Linking

menu.

2 Select the name of the method in the list box. If

the method’s name is not displayed:
a) Click Browse.
b) When the Browse dialog appears, locate the
method and choose OK.
c) When the Analysis Method Link dialog
appears again, select the method in the list
box and choose OK.

Note: If the analysis method identified more

than the maximum number of peaks (600),
UniPoint will sound an audible warning and
display a message at the bottom left of the
screen. Modifications to the analysis method
will be required before it can be linked to the
data file.

8-24
Results 8

The software opens the document window for

Analyzing Data or Analyzing it in a Different Way

the method and puts its icon at the bottom of the
window. In addition, the software uses the
conditions in the method to scale the
chromatogram plot and to generate new
reporting information. If a calibration report
type is indicated in the method but a pre-loaded
calibration file is not, you need to link to a
calibration table to see amounts for unknown
samples, described on next page.

In the legend, the trace with a > sign in front of

its description is the one reported in the table
pane. If an additional trace can be analyzed
using the conditions in the linked method,
choose the Analysis Channel command in the
Analysis menu. The table pane reports areas (or
heights) for the channel. If report information
cannot be generated, the table pane is blank.

3 If necessary, use the commands in the Analysis

menu to modify analysis parameters. You can:
• change the peak table. See page 8-42.
• change integration events. See page 8-43.
• change channel scaling parameters. See page
4-15.

If you made any changes to method conditions,

you are prompted to save them when you close
the Results window.

4 To save report information for the displayed

information, choose Save Report from the File
menu. (See Generating New Report File on page
8-44 for information on using the dialog box.)

8-25
 Analyzing Data or Analyzing it in a Different Way

8-26
Results

After method link

Before method link
8
Results 8

Linking to a Calibration File

Analyzing Data or Analyzing it in a Different Way

To report amounts for unknown samples, you can
link to a calibration file previously generated during
a run or re-analysis processing.

Before linking to a calibration file, you must link to

an analysis method, as described above.

1 Choose Calibration from the Linking menu.

2 Select the name of the calibration in the list box.

If the calibration file’s name is not displayed:
a) Choose Browse.
b) When the Browse dialog appears, locate the
file name and choose OK.
c) When the Calibration Link dialog appears
again, select the method in the list box and
choose OK.

The software opens the document window for

the calibration file and puts its icon at the bottom
of the window. In addition, the software uses the
calibration curve to generate amounts for
unknown samples and displays that information
in the table pane when an unknown sample is
shown in the graph pane.

3 To save report information for the displayed

information, chose Save Report from the File
menu.

8-27
 Results 8
Analyzing Data or Analyzing it in a Different Way

Before calibration link

After calibration link

8-28
Results 8

Linking to a Control Method

Analyzing Data or Analyzing it in a Different Way

To view the method conditions used to collect
sample data, you can link to the control method.

1 Choose Control Method from the Linking menu.

2 Select the name of the method in the list box. If

the method’s name is not displayed:
a) Choose Browse.
b) When the Browse dialog appears, locate the
method and choose OK.
c) When the Control Method Link dialog
appears again, select the method in the list
box and choose OK.

The software opens the document window for

the method and puts its icon at the bottom of the
window. And, the graph pane in the Results
window is updated to display the events set in
the method. You also see an additional Y-axis
that helps identify mobile phase percentage.

Since the legend automatically sizes itself to

display its information, the legend may block
the chromatogram plot so it cannot be viewed.
Choose Legend in the Graph menu to remove
it, or drag the legend to a new location.

3 Notice that the beginning of the trace(s) is

adjusted to reflect the start of data collection set
in the control method.

4 To identify symbols and lines shown in the

graph, choose Attributes from the Graph menu.
Or, double-click on an item in the legend.

Note: The symbols and lines used for run-time

events (such as detector autozero) are not
identified in the legend. See page 14-19 for a
8-29
description of those symbols and lines.
 Analyzing Data or Analyzing it in a Different Way

8-30
Results

After method link

Before method link
8
Results 8

Manipulating Graph and Table

Manipulating Graph and Table

Viewing and Scaling Techniques in
Graph Pane
The following procedures are applicable whether
you are viewing a report file or data file.

Finding peak information

To determine retention time and voltage

information:

1 Click on the cross-hairs tool ( ).

2 Move the mouse pointer to the peak of interest.

In the information line at the bottom of the
window, you see:
• retention time
• mV height (or specified user-defined units)
• peak name, if the data has been linked to an
analysis method or if you are viewing a
report file

If you are looking at a test chromatogram, this is

a convenient way to determine the retention
time of a peak.

3 Click on the arrow tool ( ) to turn off the cross-

hairs tool ( ).

8-31
 Results 8

Zooming
Manipulating Graph and Table

To enlarge an area of the graph:

1 Click on the magnifying glass tool ( ).

2 Place the mouse pointer to one side of the region

of interest in either the graph or summary graph,
if displayed.

3 Click and hold the left mouse button.

4 Drag the mouse to draw a box around the

desired peaks. Release the mouse button. The
region of interest now fills the graph, while the
summary graph, if displayed, shows the plot of
the entire data set. A box within the summary
graph identifies the region that was enlarged.

5 To display the entire chromatogram plot, click

on the full-scale tool ( ).

Moving plot along X-axis

To move the plot along the X-axis:

1 Zoom on part of the plot.

2 Use the scroll bar that appears along the

bottom of the plot. To examine peaks with
longer retention times, move the scroll box to
the right. To examine peaks with shorter
retention times, move the box to the left.

8-32
Results 8

Moving traces within plot

Manipulating Graph and Table

You can move one or more of the trace(s). This
option can be used to offset a chromatogram that is
overlapping another. It can also be helpful when
subtracting or dividing chromatograms since you
can adjust for varying retention times by aligning
peaks in chromatograms.

1 Click on the move trace tool ( ).

2 In the legend, click on the description of each

trace to move. The associated trace line in the
chromatogram plot becomes highlighted.

3 Move the mouse pointer into the graph pane.

4 Click and hold down the mouse button to move

the trace to the desired location. By holding
down the CTRL key while moving the trace, the
trace only moves vertically. By holding down
the SHIFT key, the trace can only be moved
horizontally.

5 To remove the highlight from each selected

trace, click on its description in the legend.

6 Click on the arrow tool ( ) to turn off the move

trace tool ( ).

8-33
 Results 8

Scaling peaks to a desired height

Manipulating Graph and Table

To scale peaks to the same height, do either of the

following:

• Zoom using the Y-axis as a reference for the

beginning and ending of the expansion box.
When you release the mouse button, all peaks
are scaled to that height.

• Display the Signal Axis dialog by choosing its

command from the Graph menu or by clicking
the right mouse button while the mouse pointer
is on the Y-axis in the graph. When the dialog
appears, indicate the scaling values in the
Minimum and Maximum boxes. Then choose
OK.

Displaying time period of interest

To display the traces within a certain time period, do

either of the following:

• Zoom using the X-axis as a reference for the

beginning and ending of the expansion box.
When you release the mouse button, only
information within the selected time frame is
shown in the graph.

• Display the Time Axis dialog by choosing its

command from the Graph menu or by clicking
the right mouse button while the mouse pointer
is on the X-axis in the graph. When the dialog
appears, indicate the time period using the
Minimum and Maximum boxes. Then choose
OK.

Displaying trace(s) at full scale settings

To return to a full-scale display along the X- and Y-

axis:

1 Choose the full-scale tool ( ) from the toolbar.

If you moved any traces, they are returned to
their original locations.

8-34
Results 8

Offsetting traces

Manipulating Graph and Table

To have UniPoint offset traces in the plot:

1 Optionally, remove the display of any real-time

events because they are not offset along with the
traces. Use the Attributes command in the Graph
menu.

2 Click on the move trace tool ( ).

3 Move the mouse pointer into the graph pane.

The mouse pointer resembles the move trace
tool.

4 Click the right mouse button to reveal the pop-

up menu, shown at right. Then using the left
mouse button, click on Stagger Traces.
The mouse pointer changes to the following
shape:

5 Using the left mouse button, click then drag the

mouse pointer to draw the offset line (refer to
the left-hand diagram below). This line identifies
the angle at which each of the traces will be
offset from the other. The starting point of the
line is where the start of the first trace is
positioned. The ending point of the line is where
the start of the last trace is positioned. Each
additional trace is evenly spaced between the
first and last trace.

When you release the mouse button, UniPoint

staggers the traces (refer to the right-hand
diagram below).

6 To “unstagger” the traces, re-display the pop-up

menu and click on Remove Shifts.

8-35
 Results 8

Removing/replacing traces and symbols

Manipulating Graph and Table

from display

To remove one or more traces or symbols:

1 Double-click on an item in the legend. Or,

choose Attributes from the Graph menu.

2 When the Attributes dialog appears, choose the

description for the item to remove from the
Legend list box.

3 Remove the X from the Display/Symbol check

box.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any additional items to

remove.

5 To disable display of peak names, remove the X

from the Display Peak Names check box.

6 To disable display of run-time events (such as

detector autozero), remove the X from the
Display Event check box. (For a description of
run-time event symbols/lines, see page 14-19.)

7 Choose OK.

To re-display an item, follow the instructions above

but insert the X in the Display check box.

Displaying/removing gridlines

You can turn off and on the display of gridlines in

the graph:

1 In the Graph menu of the document window,

choose the Signal Axis (for the Y-axis) or Time
Axis (for the X-axis) command.

2 When the dialog box appears, remove or insert

an X in the Major or Minor check boxes and
choose OK.

3 Repeat for the other axis.

8-36
Results 8

Returning to original view

Manipulating Graph and Table

To return the graph display to its “original
appearance:”

1 Choose Original View from the Graph menu or

its tool ( ) from the toolbar. If you are viewing
a report file or a data file that is not linked to an
analysis method, the graph returns to its
appearance when the file was first opened. If
you turned off any traces or modified the colors
of traces, they are returned to their previous
settings.

If you are viewing a data file that is linked to an

analysis method, the software uses the settings
in the method to display the information in the
graph.

8-37
 Results 8

Peak Integration Techniques

Manipulating Graph and Table

When you have a data file open and have linked to

an analysis method, you can modify peak
information for the analysis channel. To store the
results for future review, see Generating New
Report File on page 8-44.

The following procedures are not available if you

are viewing a report file.

Checking/changing analysis channel

To quickly determine which trace is reported in the

table pane, look at the legend. The trace with a >
sign before its description is the analysis channel.

If an additional trace can be analyzed using the

conditions in the linked analysis method, choose the
Analysis Channel command in the Analysis menu.
The table pane reports peak information for the data
channel. If report information cannot be generated,
the table pane is blank.

8-38
Results 8

Adjusting baseline

Manipulating Graph and Table

To adjust the baseline beneath a peak:

1 Zoom on the peak, if necessary.

2 Click on the adjust baseline tool ( ). Begin

points (up triangle) and end points (down
triangle) appear on the baseline under each
integrated peak.

3 Click and drag the begin or end point for the

peak’s baseline. Peak information in the table
pane automatically updates.

4 Click on the arrow tool ( ) to remove peak

begin and end points from display in the
chromatogram plot.

8-39
 Results 8

Integrating peak
Manipulating Graph and Table

To integrate a peak:

1 Zoom on the peak, if necessary.

2 Click on the adjust baseline tool ( ). Begin

points (up triangle) and end points (down
triangle) appear on the baselines under each
integrated peak.

3 Move the mouse pointer to the peak to integrate.

Using the right mouse button, click on the peak.
When the menu appears, choose Insert Baseline.

4 Move the mouse pointer to the begin point for

the peak.

5 Click and drag the mouse pointer below the

peak to draw its baseline. Release the mouse
button to set the end point for the peak.

To name the peak in the peak table, see changing

peak table, on the next page.

6 Click on the arrow tool ( ) to remove peak

begin and end points from display in the
chromatogram plot.

8-40
Results 8

Removing peak integration

Manipulating Graph and Table

To inhibit integration of a peak:

1 Zoom on the peak, if necessary.

2 Click on the adjust baseline tool ( ). Begin

points (up triangle) and end points (down
triangle) appear on the baselines under each
integrated peak.

3 Move the mouse pointer to the peak. Click on

the right mouse button. When the menu appears,
choose Delete Baseline.

4 Click on the begin or end point of the baseline to

remove.

5 Click on the arrow tool ( ) to remove peak

begin and end points from display in the
chromatogram plot.

Reverting to method baselines

If you made modifications to baselines and want to

return to conditions as set in the linked analysis
method.

1 Click on the adjust baseline tool ( ).

2 Move the mouse pointer onto the chromatogram

plot.

3 Click on the right mouse button. When the menu

appears, choose Reset Baselines.

4 Click on the arrow tool ( ) to remove peak

begin and end points from display in the
chromatogram plot.

8-41
 Results 8

Changing peak table

Manipulating Graph and Table

To modify the peak table:

1 Choose Peak Table from the Analysis menu.

2 Use the dialog as described on page 4-20.

Shortcut. To quickly specify the name and retention

time for a peak, do the following:

1 Choose the cross-hairs tool ( ).

2 Move it to the peak.

3 Click the right mouse button.

4 When the dialog appears, check and if necessary

modify the retention time and type the name of
the peak. (The software puts a default peak
name in the text box, for example, Peak 2.)

5 Choose OK.

6 Repeat steps 2–5 for each peak.

8-42
Results 8

Changing integration events

Manipulating Graph and Table

To modify integration events:

1 Choose Integration Events from the Analysis

menu.

2 Use the dialog as described on page 4-8.

Changing channel scaling

To modify channel scales set in the linked analysis

method:

1 Choose Data Channels from the Analysis menu.

2 Use the dialog as described on page 4-15.

8-43
 Results 8

Generating New Report File

Generating New Report File

(Non-ERM Environment Only)

When you link a data file to an analysis method, and
if appropriate, a calibration file, you can store the
results for the currently displayed trace(s) to a report
file.

1 Choose Report Save from the File menu.

2 Indicate information in the dialog box. And,

choose OK.

3 To include information for another sample in the

report file:
a) Display the next sample using the Samples
command in the Edit menu.
b) Display the Report Save As dialog. The name
of the report file automatically displays.
c) Make sure the Append check box is selected.
d) Choose OK.

4 Repeat step 3 for each additional sample whose

information is included in the file.

8-44
Results 8

Comparison Commands

Comparison Commands
Using the commands in the Comparisons menu, you
can perform mathematical calculations on one or
two traces to produce another trace. (This menu is
not available if report file information is displayed
in the Results window.)

Subtracting Two Traces

You can generate a chromatogram that represents
the subtraction of the heights of two
chromatograms. This option can be used for
subtracting a background chromatogram from a
chromatogram.

1 Choose Subtract from the Comparisons menu.

2 In the Channel 1 list box, choose the name of the

trace from which data is subtracted.

3 In the Channel 2 list box, choose the name of the

trace whose data is subtracted.

4 Choose OK.

The resulting comparison trace appears in the

chromatogram plot. The legend identifies the
trace.

5 To save the comparison, create a report file for

the information displayed in the window. See
page 8-44.

8-45
 Results 8

Dividing Two Traces

Comparison Commands

You can generate a trace that represents the ratio of

the heights of two chromatograms. The ratio scale is
logarithmic.

UniPoint uses each peak’s baseline as the threshold

value dividing the traces. (That is why you must
link to an analysis method before this command
becomes available.) UniPoint begins the calculation
for the ratio 10% above the baseline.

You can use the ratio feature to check peak purity.

Since many variables affect the ratio, it is
recommended that you refer to sources such as the
following articles if you are going to use the Ratio
command.

Paul A. Webb, Dean Ball, and Tony Thornton. “Real-

time absorbance ratio and absorbance difference
measurements using dual-wavelength HPLC
detectors.” Journal of Chromatographic Science, 21:
447-453 (1983).

Haiyung Cheng and R. Rao Gadde. “Absorbance

ratio plots in high performance liquid
chromatography.” Journal of Chromatographic
Science, 23: 227-230 (1985).

8-46
Results 8

To display a ratio chromatogram:

Comparison Commands
1 Choose Ratio from the Comparisons menu.

2 In the Channel 1 list box, choose the name of the

trace whose data is in the numerator.

3 In the Channel 2 list box, choose the name of the

trace whose data is in the denominator.

4 Choose OK.

The resulting comparison trace appears in the

chromatogram plot. The legend identifies the
trace.

5 To save the comparison, create a report file for

the information displayed in the window. See
page 8-44.

8-47
 Results 8

Removing Shift from a Trace

Comparison Commands

Using the Shift Removal option, you can generate a

new trace that represents a reduction of a trace’s
non-peak heights to zero. Any non-integrated peaks
are also reduced to zero. Since the resulting trace has
no baseline artifacts, peaks are more defined.

The Shift Removal option performs the same

function as subtracting a baseline trace from another
trace.

1 Choose Shift Removal from the Comparisons

menu.

2 Choose the name of the trace in the Channel list

box.

3 Choose OK.

The resulting comparison trace appears in the

chromatogram plot.

Normalizing Traces
Using the Normalize All command in the
Comparisons menu, you can display traces on the
same scale. When the traces are normalized, there is
a maximum amplitude of 1000 units between the
lowest and highest signal points.

To turn off normalization, choose Original View

from the Graph menu or its tool ( ) from the
toolbar.

8-48
Calibrations 9

Calibration plots are generated during an HPLC run or a batch re-analysis of calibrator
samples.

To view calibration plots, you use the Calibration window. Using the options in the
window, you can modify the appearance of a plot and save it to a new file name. Once
saved, its name can be entered into an analysis method and used as a pre-stored calibration
for future runs and re-analyses. Or, you can link to the calibration file while viewing a data
file in the Results window and display peak amounts.

9-1
 Calibrations 9

Calibration Window
Calibration Window

The following illustration shows the Calibration

window.

Refer to Section 14, Common Procedures for more

information on manipulating parts of the table or
graph displayed in a document window.

Menu Bar
Choose available functions from the drop-down
menus found beneath the items on the menu bar.

Menu Description
File Create, save, print, delete files
or exit a window or UniPoint.
Edit Transfer information.
View Select standard peak or
calibration table to view.
Curve Fit Select type of curve to display.
Table Display or modify appearance
of the table pane.
Graph Display or modify appearance
of the graph pane.
Window Re-arrange windows or icons,
or activate a window; display
file annotation or toolbar.
Help Learn about UniPoint.

9-2
Calibrations 9

Table Pane

Calibration Window
The table is the summary report generated for the
displayed calibration curve. This report includes the
statistical data used to produce the calibration curve
for the peak. It also indicates if calibration data has
been removed or is absent for a calibration level.

If you ran a single level calibration, a response factor

is the only thing listed in the table. The response
factor is the amount at the calibration level divided
by the area. The resulting ratio is multiplied by the
area of an unknown to determine the amount listed
in the unknown’s report.

Graph Pane
The graph pane shows the calibration plot:

X axis Amount

Y-axis Area (or height)

solid vertical lines Level amounts entered

into the peak table for the
peak

squares Peak area (or height) for a

repeat

red lines Thicker red line is the

mean; thinner red lines
identify standard
deviations from the mean

9-3
 Calibrations 9

Toolbar
Calibration Window

Allows for manipulating the appearance of the

calibration curve plus provides quick access to file
maintenance and selection options. To activate a
tool, just click on its icon.

navigator tool Displays Navigator

log on/log off tool Displays the

UniPoint Log On
dialog

open tool Displays Open

dialog

save tool Displays Save As

dialog

print tool Displays Print dialog

arrow tool Turns off magnifying

glass and cross-hairs
tools

magnifying glass tool For enlarging area of

graph

cross-hairs tool For identifying

amount and area
value for point on
plot

full-scale tool For returning graph

axes to minimum
and maximum
values for displayed
calibration curve

To turn off/on the toolbar, choose its command

from the Window menu.

9-4
Calibrations 9

Legend Box

Calibration Window
Identifies the symbols shown in the calibration
table. To turn off/on the legend, choose its
command from the Graph menu.

Annotation Box
Lists information for each of the samples used to
build the calibration plot. It also lists statistical
information for the displayed calibration curve. To
turn off/on the annotation, choose its command
from the Window menu.

Status Bar
Displays help message if a menu command is
highlighted.

9-5
 Calibrations 9

Building Calibrations
Building Calibrations

To build calibrations using data collected from

calibrators, use the Re-Analysis window. See Batch
Re-Analysis Processing for more information. Here
is a review of the steps to perform:

1 Open the re-analysis file that contains

information for the calibrators.

Or, generate a new re-analysis list using the

options in the Re-Analysis window.

2 Make any changes to the re-analysis steps. Each

step lists information about the sample and the
analysis method(s) to use during re-analysis
processing.

If you only want to re-analyze calibrators, delete

any steps for unknown samples.

3 Execute the re-analysis.

9-6
Calibrations 9

Viewing Calibrations

Viewing Calibrations
Since calibration plots are used to calculate amounts
for unknown samples, you should examine the
calibration curve generated for each standard peak.
Viewing calibration plots is especially important if
quadratic or cubic was the curve fitting method
used to generate them.

Opening File
To open a calibration file:

1 From the File menu, choose Open. Or, use the

Navigator to click on the Calibrations option and
then click on Open.

2 When the Open dialog appears, type or select a

calibration file. If the file is not listed in the File
Name box, do one or more of the following:
• In the Drives box, select a different drive.
• In the Directories box, select a different
folder.

3 If multiple calibrations were generated from a

run and you want to view a table other than the
first one generated, choose the specific table in
the bottom list box.

4 Choose OK.

The Calibration window shows the summary

report and calibration plot generated for the first
standard peak of the selected calibration.

If you see an error message, refer to page 9-14. 9-7

 Calibrations 9

Determining Area (or Height) at Given

Viewing Calibrations

Point on Curve
Use the cross-hairs tool to determine the area (or
height) at a given point on the curve:

1 Click on the cross-hairs tool ( ). Then move

the mouse pointer to the calibration plot.

You see curve intersect lines. These lines show

where an area (or height-horizontal arrow) and
its associated amount (vertical arrow) intersect
the curve. Amount and area (or height) values
are shown in the message line at the bottom of
the application window.

By moving these lines, you can identify the

amount calculated for an area (or height).

2 Move the mouse pointer along the Y-axis.

When you do, the curve intersect lines also

move.

3 When the mouse pointer is in the desired

location, refer to the area (or height) and its
associated amount displayed in the message
line. Because of screen resolution, you may not
be able to position the mouse pointer exactly at
the desired area (or height).

4 Click on the arrow tool ( ) to turn off the cross-

hairs tool ( ).

9-8
Calibrations 9

Changing Curve Fitting Method

Viewing Calibrations
You can view a different curve fitting method for
the calibration curve.

1 Choose the method from the CurveFit menu.

Zooming
To enlarge an area of the calibration plot:

1 Click on the magnifying glass tool ( ).

2 Place the mouse pointer to one side of the region

of interest in the graph.

3 Click and drag to draw a box around the region.

Release the mouse button. The region of interest
now fills the graph.

4 To display the entire calibration plot, click on the

full-scale tool ( ).

9-9
 Calibrations 9

Getting File Information for a Repeat

Viewing Calibrations

To learn about the injected sample associated with a

repeat:

1 Zoom on the repeat’s square, if necessary.

2 Click on the square using the right mouse

button.

3 When the menu appears, click on Info. A dialog

giving information on the repeat appears.

4 Choose OK to remove the dialog.

Disabling/Restoring Repeats
You remove or re-apply the value of one or more
repeats from or to the calibration calculation.

1 Zoom on the repeat’s square, if necessary.

2 Click on the square using the right mouse

button.

3 When the menu appears, choose Disable Point.

The calibration curve is automatically redrawn

using the new mean and deviations, and the
report information is updated.

4 To remove a calibration level, disable each

repeat at that level.

To enable one or more repeats:

1 Click on the repeat’s square using the right

mouse button.

2 When the menu appears, choose Restore Point.

3 To re-apply a calibration level, restore each

9-10 repeat.
Calibrations 9

Displaying/Removing Gridlines

Viewing Calibrations
You can turn off and on the display of gridlines in
the graph:

1 In the Graph menu of the document window,

choose the Area/Height Axis (for the Y-axis) or
Amount Axis (for the X-axis) command.

2 When the dialog box appears, remove or insert

an X in the Major or Minor check boxes and
choose OK.

3 Repeat for the other axis.

Selecting Another Peak

To view and, if necessary, modify the calibration
curve for another peak:

1 Choose Peaks from the View menu.

2 From the list box, select the peak name and

choose View. (Or, double-click on the name.) It
may take a few seconds for the calibration plot
for the peak to display.

You can keep the list box on-screen and view the
calibration plot for each additional peak in the
calibration. To move the Peaks dialog, click on
the title bar and drag the dialog to the desired
location.

To size the Peaks dialog, position the mouse

pointer at the side or corner of the box. Click and
drag the box to the desired size.

3 Choose Done to remove the dialog.

9-11
 Calibrations 9

Selecting Another Calibration

Viewing Calibrations

If multiple calibration tables were generated for

injected samples:

1 Choose Calibrations from the View menu.

2 From the list box, select the calibration

description and choose View. (Or, double-click
on the description.) It may take a few seconds
for the calibration plot for the currently selected
peak to display.

You can keep the list box on-screen and view the
calibration plot for the selected peak in each
calibration. To move the Calibrations dialog,
click on the title bar and drag the dialog to the
desired location.

To size the Calibrations dialog, position the

mouse pointer at the side or corner of the box.
Click and drag the box to the desired size.

3 Choose Done to remove the dialog.

9-12
Calibrations 9

Merging Calibrations

Merging Calibrations
You can merge the calibration table information
stored in another file with that for the currently
open calibration file.

1 Choose Merge from the File menu.

2 Use the dialog to select a calibration file and

choose OK.

The table and calibration plot for the currently

selected peak updates to incorporate the
information from the merged file.

Use the features of the Calibration window as

described earlier in this section to view
calibration curves and reports for other standard
peaks.

3 To save the new calibration table for future use,

choose Save As from the File menu and indicate
a new name for the file.

9-13
 Calibrations 9

Error Messages
Merging Calibrations

If no calibration plot is drawn in the graph pane, an

error message appears in the upper left corner. That
message is Peak not identified or method is
incompatible with data. If you get this message:

1 Use the Results window to view the sample data

used to produce the calibration curves. After
linking to the analysis method, change the
analysis parameters until baselines are drawn
beneath peaks.

2 Then use the Re-Analysis window to analyze the

data again and rebuild calibration curves for
standard peak.

If all or a portion of a calibration curve is flat or

contains a negative slope, an error message appears
to the left of the peak name, for example, Invalid
calibration of Phenol. If you get this message:

• Remove one or more calibration levels from the

calibration curve by removing each repeat at
those levels.

Or preferably, re-inject the calibrator samples

and have the software generate new calibration
curves for standard peaks.

9-14
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Description
The Re-Analysis window enables you to perform a post-run batch analysis on previously
acquired data. The data to analyze can be from one or several data files.

When you execute a run, UniPoint automatically generates a re-analysis file (.GAR) and
places it in the data/report folder. The file contains a list of the injected samples and the
analysis method(s) used during the run. You can use and if necessary modify the
information in this file before executing a batch re-analysis.

To determine if a batch re-analysis is required, refer to the reports generated at run time or
view the data in the Results window and link to the appropriate analysis method. You may
decide to do a re-analysis for any of the following reasons:
• peaks were not integrated correctly
• peaks were not named
• injections were not labeled correctly
• wrong actual and nominal amounts were entered for samples
• you want a different report type generated for samples
• you want to remove background information
• you want to analyze unknown samples using calibration curves in a calibration file
(the name of the calibration file is set in the Report Type dialog)

The following parameters set in an analysis method affect how data are analyzed:
• analysis events (peak width and sensitivity, baseline construction techniques)
• analysis channel
• quantification technique (area or height)
• peak table information
• reporting parameters (you may want to turn off report print until after the re-analysis)
• chromatogram scaling parameters
• background subtraction

Refer to Section 4 for more information on how to set analysis parameters. Make the
necessary changes to the analysis method so data is analyzed correctly. Then perform the
batch re-analysis to generate new reports.

10-1
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

To get ready for and start a batch re-analysis, you:

Description

1 Open an existing re-analysis (.GAR) file. Or,

create a re-analysis list using the List Entry
menu in the Re-Analysis window.
2 Make any modifications to the re-analysis file
using the Edit menu or Step Entry dialog.
3 Check that peaks are integrated by previewing
the re-analysis.
4 Optionally, indicate that you want to manually
adjust baselines during processing.
5 Check where re-analysis output is stored.
6 Start processing.

10-2
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Re-Analysis Window

Re-Analysis Window
Using the options in the Re-Analysis window, you
specify information that UniPoint uses to re-analyze
data. You access this window by creating or opening
a re-analysis file.

The following illustration shows the Re-Analysis

window. When you first access the window, the
graph pane may not be displayed. Choose Show
Graph from the Graph menu.

Refer to Section 14, Common Procedures for more

information on manipulating parts of the table or
graph displayed in a document window.

10-3
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Menu Bar
Re-Analysis Window

Choose available functions from the drop-down

menus found beneath the items on the menu bar.

Menu Description
File Create, save, print, delete files or exit
a window or UniPoint.
Edit Locate, make changes to, or transfer
information.
List Entry Set step-by-step instructions to
execute during a re-analysis.
Analyze Start, stop, pause a re-analysis and
indicate file naming parameters.
Table Display or modify appearance of the
table pane.
Graph Display or modify appearance of the
graph pane.
Window Re-arrange windows or icons, or
activate a window; display file
annotation or toolbar.
Help Learn about UniPoint.

Table Pane
Lists the steps for re-analysis processing.

Double-clicking on a row for a step displays the

dialog box used to set up the step.

Using the right mouse button, you can double-click

on a step and display the window that shows the
instructions set in the analysis method. (If multiple
methods are listed, displays instructions for first
method.)

Double-clicking on the top (header) row displays a

dialog for manipulating the columns shown in the
table.

10-4
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Graph Pane

Re-Analysis Window
During re-analysis processing or if previewing the
re-analysis, shows a chromatogram plot of the data
being re-analyzed.

If previewing the re-analysis and there are multiple

analysis methods named in the re-analysis list, you
see an Analysis Method box with option buttons in
it. Choose the option button for another method to
see how peaks are integrated.

Legend Box
During re-analysis, identifies the traces shown in
the graph.

Right-Click Menu
Choose available functions from the right-click
menu accessed from select cells in the table pane.

Menu Description
Open Internal Displays a read-only copy of
Referenced File the file referenced in the
selected cell.

Open Referenced Displays the file at a specific

File path referenced in the selected
cell

Format Columns Displays the Format Columns

dialog

Font Displays the Font dialog

Note: If changes are made to a referenced file, then

then both the referenced file and the Re-Analysis
must be saved for changes to take effect.

10-5
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Toolbar
Re-Analysis Window

Provides quick access to options for starting and

stopping processing, manipulating the
chromatogram plot, and file maintenance and
selection. To activate a tool, just click on its icon.

navigator tool Displays Navigator.

log on/log off tool Displays the UniPoint

Log On dialog

open tool Displays Open dialog.

save tool Displays Save As

dialog.

print tool Displays Print dialog.

arrow tool Turns off magnifying

glass tool.

magnifying glass tool For enlarging portion

of graph.

adjust baseline tool For manual adjustment

of peak baselines
during re-analysis
processing.

full-scale tool For returning graph

axes to minimum and
maximum values for
displayed data.

10-6
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Re-Analysis Window
stop tool For terminating re-
analysis processing.

pause tool For pausing re-analysis

processing.

go tool For starting re-analysis

processing.

To turn off/on the toolbar, choose its command

from the Window menu.

Status Box
Displays status information during re-analysis
processing.

Annotation Box
Displays any user-entered comments about the re-
analysis list. To turn off/on the annotation, choose
its command from the Window menu.

To add comments, use the Notes command in the

Edit menu.

Status Bar
Shows operational status or help message if a menu
command is highlighted.

10-7
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

In most cases, the quickest way to set up a re-

analysis list is to open and modify a previously
created re-analysis list. At run time, UniPoint
automatically generates a re-analysis file (.GAR
extension) for the samples being processed and
stores it in the data/report directory. To perform a
re-analysis on those samples, open the file and make
any necessary changes. You can make changes by
double-clicking on a row and accessing the Step
Entry dialog (see page 10-13).

You can also build a new re-analysis list using the

Express Entry dialog (see page 10-9) or using the
Step Entry dialog.

Before Creating or Modifying the List

Before you set up a re-analysis list, you should have
created or modified each analysis method used
during processing.

To add a column for an additional analysis method:

1 Double-click on the top line in the table to reveal

the Format Columns dialog. (Or, choose Format
Columns from the Table menu.)

2 Select a column in the Column Contents list box.

(The new column inserts to the left of the
selected column.)

3 Choose Analysis Method 2 in the Contents

drop-down list box.

10-8
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

4 Make any additional changes in the other text

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

boxes.

5 Choose Insert.

6 Choose Done to exit the dialog.

The table displays the new column. If the re-

analysis table already had information in it, you
see the text <Replace> in the new column.

Use the Replace command in the Edit menu to

quickly substitute <Replace> with the path to
and name of the analysis method to use during
re-analysis processing.

7 Repeat steps 2 - 6 to insert another analysis

method column if necessary.

10-9
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Using Express Entry Dialog for List

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

Setup
For rapid list setup, you can use the Express Entry
dialog.

1 Choose Express Setup from the List Entry menu.

2 Use the options in the dialog to set information

for the re-analysis list.

3 Choose Generate to create the list. If steps are

currently set in the re-analysis list, they are
replaced by the newly generated steps.

Following is the default Express Entry dialog and a

description of its options. Additional fields may
appear in the dialog if you added columns to the
table or if additional columns were indicated in the
re-analysis file generated by the run.

Calib Levels. For calibration analyses, type the

number of calibration levels being analyzed for
calibrator samples.

Repeats/Level. If multiple injections were performed

for each calibrator at a level, type the number of
repeats here. UniPoint averages each level’s peak
data and uses the average peak size to build the
calibration curve for each standard peak.

A value of 1 represents a “no-repeat” condition or in

other words one injection per calibration level.

10-10
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Number of Unknowns. Tell UniPoint how many

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

unknown samples are analyzed after the calibrators.

Repeats/Unknown. If multiple injections were

performed for each unknown, type the number of
repeats here. A value of 1 represents a “no-repeat”
condition or in other words one injection per
unknown.

Number of Cycles. To repeat the entire calibration

and unknown analysis more than once, indicate that
here.

Example. A calibration analysis consists of 4 calibration

levels with 3 repeats/level and 5 unknown samples
with 2 repeats per unknown. How many steps are
generated for 1 calibration cycle? For 2 cycles?

1 cycle:
Steps = (4 levels x 3 repeats per level) + (5 unknowns
x 2 repeats per unknown) = 22

2 cycles:
Steps = (22 injections per cycle x 2 cycles) = 44

Inj. Number. Type the number of the injection to use

to generate the list, usually 1.

Data File. Type, or browse to select, the path to and

file name of the data file containing the sample
information to analyze.

Analysis Method. Type, or browse to select, the

path to and file name of the analysis method used to
analyze collected data.

10-11
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Additional text boxes. Other text boxes may

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

automatically appear depending on the parameters

set in the control and analysis methods, used during
the run. For example, if an injector protocol requests
inputs, such as sample volume, a text box to
indicate that appears in the Express Entry dialog.
UniPoint does not use the information in these text
boxes during re-analysis. You can display the text
boxes, if they provide helpful identification. Or, you
can remove them from display using the Format
Columns dialog accessed via the Table menu.

If you indicated in the analysis method that

actual and nominal amounts should be entered
for samples, text boxes appear for those also. See
page 4-47 for a description of actual and nominal
amounts.

If you added columns using the Format Columns

dialog, you see text boxes to indicate information for
those columns. For example, you may have added a
column for an additional analysis method.

10-12
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Using Step Entry Dialog for List

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

Setup and Modification
To indicate steps in the re-analysis list, you can use
the Step Entry dialog. Use this setup method if
sample data was collected via multiple runs.

The Step Entry dialog can also be used to modify or

delete steps in an existing re-analysis list. To display
the dialog:

1 Choose Step from the List Entry menu. The Step

Entry dialog appears. (If the table already has
one or more steps, you can double-click on a row
to quickly access the dialog.)

2 Use the options in the dialog to create or modify

the re-analysis list. Refer to the instructions
starting on page 5-13.

Following is a default Step Entry dialog and a

description of its options. Additional fields may
appear in the dialog if you added columns to the
table or if additional columns were indicated in the
re-analysis list file generated by the run.

The Step up and down arrows in the upper right

corner enable you to step through the re-analysis
list.

10-13
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Injection Number. The position at which the

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

sample was injected during the run. This number

helps to identify the sample if no description is
indicated.

Data File. The path to and name of the file containing

the channel data for the sample. Double-click in the
text box and then use the Browse dialog that appears
to select the file.

Analysis Method. The path to and file name of the

analysis method used to analyze data collected for
the sample. Double-click in the text box and then
use the Browse dialog that appears to select the file.

Description. Text describing the sample. If you

enter a number in the description, you can have
UniPoint automatically increment the number
when multiple entries are generated. To see the
Inc. box for incrementing the description, include a
number in the Description box (for example,
Sample 1) before you choose the Multiple button.

Calib. Level. If the sample is a calibrator, its

calibration level. If the sample is an unknown, leave
the text box blank or enter 0 (zero).

Additional text boxes. Other text boxes may

automatically appear depending on the parameters
set in your analysis method(s). For example, if the
analysis method requests that actual and nominal
amounts should be entered for samples, text boxes
appear for those. See page 4-46 for a description of
actual and nominal amounts.

If you added columns using the Format Columns

dialog, you see text boxes to indicate information
for those columns, such as for additional analysis
methods.

10-14
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Adding step

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

To add the first step to a new list or add a step to the
bottom of the list:

1 Make sure New Step appears in the upper right

corner of the dialog box. If not, choose New.

2 Indicate information in the text boxes. For file

names, you must indicate the complete path to
the file. Therefore, click in the text box and then
use the Browse button to select the file.

3 Choose Insert.

4 Repeat to add more steps.

Inserting step between steps

To insert a step before the first step or between two

existing steps:

1 Use the up or down arrow to select the step

before which the new step inserts. For example,
to insert a step between Steps 3 and 4, display
information for step 4 in the text boxes.

2 Type information for the step.

3 Click Insert.

10-15
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Generating multiple steps

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

The easiest way to set up the re-analysis list is to

generate a list of all steps and then modify the steps
as necessary.

1 Choose the Multiple button. You see additional

options.

Inc. An Increment box appears next to text

boxes that prompt you for a value, such as
Calib. Level or Injection Number. If you do not
want to increment the value for each step,
indicate 0 (zero).

Number of Steps to Generate. How many steps

to add to the bottom of the list.

Number of Repeats per Step. How many

multiples of the step should be generated. This is
especially useful for multiple injections at the
same calibration level.

2 Indicate information in the default text boxes.

3 Choose Generate. If you already have one or

more steps indicated, the steps are added to the
bottom of the list.

4 Make the necessary changes to each step. See

Modifying step on the next page.

10-16
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Deleting step

Setting Up a Re-Analysis List

To remove a step:

1 Use the Step up or down arrow so the

information for the step is displayed.

2 Choose Delete.

Modifying step

To change options for a step:

1 Use the Step up or down arrow so the

information for the step is displayed.

2 Use the text boxes to make the necessary changes

to the step.

3 Click Change.

10-17
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Indicating Baseline Adjustment

Indicating Baseline Adjustment

During a re-analysis processing, you can view and

possibly modify the baseline generated for samples.
To set parameters for baseline adjustment:

1 Choose Baseline Adjust from the Analyze menu.

2 Indicate options, described below, in the dialog

box. Then choose OK to exit.

Analysis Method. Lists the name of each

method used during re-analysis processing.
Choose the method name and then select from
among the other options in the dialog.

Manual Baseline Adjust. Indicates if you want

to modify the system-generated baseline for
peaks during re-analysis.

Use Manual Baseline. Indicates if you want to

view a manual baseline used to generate peak
information for the data. This baseline was
generated either during a previous batch re-
analysis or during an individual re-analysis
using the Results window.

Report File. Type, or use the Browse button to

select, the name of the report file that contains
the previously-generated manual baseline(s).

10-18
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Reviewing Where Files are Stored

Reviewing Where Files are Stored

During the re-analysis, UniPoint generates new
report files (which include chromatogram plots of
acquired traces) and, if appropriate, calibration files.

1 Choose Storage from the Analyze menu.

If the re-analysis list is not named, you see a

message box. Use the Save As or Save
command in the File menu to store the list to
disk.

2 When the Re-Analysis File Storage dialog

appears, check the name of the data/report
output directory in which the files are saved. In
addition, check the names assigned to files.

3 To modify default names, choose <Templates>

and make the changes. Then select <Files> to
review how the changes affect the file names.

If you indicate a directory name that does not

exist, UniPoint creates it for you during the re-
analysis. As a default, UniPoint uses the name of
the re-analysis list as the directory name.

4 Choose OK to accept the settings and exit the

dialog.

10-19
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Following is a description of the areas of the Re-

Reviewing Where Files are Stored

Analysis File Storage dialog and how UniPoint

assigns names.

Output Directory. Specifies the directory into which

files are stored.

Method File. If multiple analysis methods are used

to analyze data, select the appropriate method file
name from the list box. View and if necessary
change the path and file name used for storing
report and calibration information.

Report File. Specifies the path and file name where

information for reports is stored. As a default file
name, UniPoint:
• uses file name assigned to the analysis method,
• assigns the extension .GR?
where the question mark is replaced with a
number between 1 and 9 each time the analysis
method is used to analyze the data.

Calibration File. Specifies the path and file name for

the calibration plots generated for standard peaks.
To assign the name, UniPoint using the same
naming scheme as for a report file but adds the .GB?
extension.

Disk Space. Shows how much room is available on

the disk and how much is required for the re-
analysis. If there is not enough space:
• remove unneeded files from the disk before
starting the re-analysis
• save the files to another fixed or network disk
drive.

10-20
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Templates. Allows you to change the default file or

Reviewing Where Files are Stored

directory naming scheme used by UniPoint. When
you choose the <Templates> button, the software
places question marks in the directory or file name.
The placement of the question marks identifies
which part of the name automatically increments
when the software assigns names. You can remove
or change the placement of the question marks in a
name to meet your needs. However, do not modify
the first two characters in the file name extension for
the report or calibration file.

Choose <Files> to see how a change to a file name’s

template affects the name to assign to the file.

10-21
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Previewing the Re-Analysis

Previewing the Re-Analysis

Before executing the re-analysis, you can view the

chromatogram plot for some of the data and make
sure the integration parameters are appropriate.

1 Open or set up the re-analysis list.

2 Choose the Analysis menu and make sure

Preview Re-Analysis has a check mark next to it.

3 Make sure the graph pane is displayed.

4 Click on a step in the table. The graph updates

and displays the chromatogram plot for the
trace(s) collected for the sample.

5 Use the magnifying glass tool ( ) and full-scale

tool ( ) as necessary to get a better look at the
chromatogram plot.

Zooming. Choose the magnifying glass tool ( ).

Place the mouse pointer to one side of the region
of interest in the chromatogram plot. Click and
hold the left mouse button. Drag the mouse to
draw a box around the desired peaks. Release
the mouse button. The region of interest now
fills the graph. A box within the summary graph
identifies the region that was enlarged.

Returning plot to full-scale. To display the

entire chromatogram plot, choose the full-scale
tool ( ).

6 If there are multiple analysis methods named in

the re-analysis list, you see an Analysis Method
box with option buttons in it. Choose the option
button for another method to see how peaks are
integrated.

7 Repeat steps 4 - 6 to view additional

chromatogram plots to make sure peaks are
integrated properly.

8 If necessary, open, make any changes to, and

save the updated analysis method(s). You can
then click on the same step or different step to
10-22 see how the change affects peak integration.
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Executing the Re-Analysis

Executing the Re-Analysis

1 Choose Start from the Analyze menu or its tool
( ) from the toolbar.

The software begins processing the first sample

using the conditions in the analysis method. The
status box and status line in the document
window identifies step and method information.

If baseline adjustment was selected for the

method, processing automatically “pauses” so
you can make any necessary modifications to
the baseline. See manually adjusting baselines
below. Click on Continue in the message box
when you are finished making changes.

Before continuing to the next step, the software

processes the sample using the conditions set in
any additional analysis methods.

The software displays the message Re-analysis

finished when processing completes.

Manually adjusting baselines

When re-analysis processing pauses for baseline

adjustment, the software displays the begin point
(up triangle) and end point (down triangle) for each
integrated peak. You can adjust a peak’s baseline,
integrate a peak, or disable integration of a peak.
When finished making adjustments, click on the
Continue button in the Manual Baseline Adjust
message box.

Adjusting a peak’s baseline. To adjust the baseline

beneath a peak, zoom on the peak. Point and drag
the peak’s begin or end point.

10-23
 Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Integrating a peak. To integrate a peak not

Executing the Re-Analysis

currently integrated, zoom on the peak. Using the

right mouse button, click on the peak. When the
menu appears, choose Insert Baseline. Move the
mouse pointer to the starting point for the peak.
Click and drag the mouse pointer below a peak to
draw its baseline. Release the mouse button to set
the end point for the peak.

Removing peak integration. To inhibit integration of

a peak, zoom on the peak. Using the right mouse
button, click on the peak. When the menu appears,
choose Delete Baseline. Then click on the begin or
end point of the baseline to remove.

Manually pausing re-analysis

You can pause the re-analysis by choose Pause in

the Analyze menu or the pause tool ( ). Pause
mode is for viewing only; you cannot adjust the
baseline beneath peaks and have those changes
stored to the generated report file.

Stopping re-analysis

To stop the re-analysis before it completes, choose

Stop in the Analyze menu or the stop tool ( ).
UniPoint completes the current step before
stopping the re-analysis.

10-24
Batch Re-Analysis Processing 10

Resuming a Re-Analysis After

Resuming a Re-Analysis After Termination

Termination
You can restart a re-analysis that was terminated
while in progress. You can resume the re-analysis at
the same step at which it was stopped. Or, resume
the re-analysis at an earlier step to repeat a series of
steps.

1 Choose Resume from the Analyze menu.

2 Type the number of the step at which the re-

analysis resumes. You can indicate the same
step number at which the re-analysis was
terminated. Or, specify the number of a prior
step prior to repeat steps within the list.

The information for each sample is appended to

the report files created for the terminated re-
analysis. If you repeat a series of steps, there is
duplicate information for the repeated steps.

10-25
Routines and Protocols 11

UniPoint features fully integrated setup and control of Gilson sampling injectors, detectors,
fraction collectors, peristaltic pumps and other peripheral instruments (valve actuator,
temperature regulator) via pre-stored and/or user-created protocols, routines and
commands. No programming knowledge is necessary to automate basic sample preparation
and injection routines, detector configuration and setup, fraction collection, valve switching
and other system component operations.

Using Injector and Generic routines and protocols allows individual GSIOC instruments to
be controlled completely from UniPoint - there is no need to use each component’s keypad
for setup and operation.

11-1
 Routines and Protocols 11

Protocols
Protocols

A protocol consists of a set of instructions executed

one after another by an instrument.

There are two kinds of protocols that can be created:

1 Injector protocols to control a sampling injector

and its dilutor

2 Generic protocols to control any Gilson

instrument connected along the GSIOC

Each protocol has an internal specific configuration

associated with it, allowing only specific instruments
to be used.

Indicating a timed event for it in a control method

starts the protocol (see step 1 below). Each step in the
protocol is performed independently of what is going
on in the control method, unless synchronization
events have been established between them. If
coordination is needed between the control method
and the protocol, synchronization commands need to
be indicated in both locations.

A protocol can also be started in the Operations

window using the Manual menu. This enables you
to test the protocol before it becomes part of a
control method.

11-2
Routines and Protocols 11

Routines

Routines
Routines consist of a set of instructions executed as
part of a protocol. They can make creating protocols
easier because the name of the routine identifies
what it does (for example, Rinse Needle Inside). As
a result, when you set events for routines in a
protocol, you can more quickly identify what is
happening instead of reading through individual
commands.

There are two kinds of routines that can be created:

1 Injector routines to control sampling injectors

2 Generic routines to control any Gilson

instrument connected along the GSIOC

One or more routines can be stored to the same file.

Storing multiple routines in one file makes them
easier to retrieve when using them in a protocol.

Commonly used steps from a protocol can be made

into a routine to save time.

Each routine also has an internal specific

configuration associated with it, allowing only
specific instruments to be used.

An example of the Rinse protocol (RINSE.GIP) is

shown below. This protocol consists of five routines,
shown in the Command-Routine Name column.

11-3
 Routines and Protocols 11

An example of the Rinse Needle Inside routine is

Routines

shown below. This routine consists of six commands.

To make routines and protocols more flexible, you

can assign a variable name (for example,
INSIDE_RINSE_VOLUME) instead of a numeric
value for many command parameters. Refer to the
Variables section starting on page 3-15 for more
details.

We use the special character * when assigning

descriptions in the example routines files supplied
with UniPoint. For more information on the special
character *, see page 11-18.

11-4
Routines and Protocols 11

Injector Folders

Injector Folders
Gilson supplies nine folders of injector routines and
protocols with UniPoint. The folders are installed in
the C:\GILSON\UNIPOINT folder when the
software is installed on your computer.

INJ_RP Folder
The INJ_RP folder consists of the following protocol
files for use with Version A and XL samplers and
the 234 Autoinjector:

DILN.GIP Dilutes the sample using diluent

from a tube. Performs multiple
aspirations and dispenses to mix
diluent and sample.

DILN_RVR.GIP Dilutes the sample using diluent

from the dilutor reservoir.

INJ_CENL.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses centered loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

INJ_PARL.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

INJ_TOTL.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

11-5
 Routines and Protocols 11

MIX.GIP Mixes by aspirating and

Injector Folders

dispensing sample volume

RINSE.GIP Cleans the needle inside and

outside and the injection port

FC233PAR.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample on

the 233XL Auto Injector; uses
partial loop fill injection technique
to load and inject the sample;
includes system synchronization
command to coordinate the
protocol and control method at
the time of injection. Includes a
second system synchronization
command to signal the control
method that all injection steps are
complete and the 233 XL system
can proceed with fraction
collection.

FC233TOT.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample on

the 233XL Auto Injector; uses
total loop fill injection technique
to load and inject the sample;
includes system synchronization
command to coordinate the
protocol and control method at
the time of injection. Includes a
second system synchronization
command to signal the control
method that all injection steps are
complete and the 233 XL system
can proceed with fraction
collection.

An example routines file (INJ_ROUT.GIR) is also

found in the INJ_RP folder. This single file consists
of the following routines: air gap, aspirate, dilution,
dilution/reservoir, dispense, home, injection/
centered loop fill, injection/partial loop fill,
injection/total loop fill, mix, reservoir, rinse
injection port, rinse needle inside, rinse needle
outside, sample location and synchronize.

11-6
Routines and Protocols 11

INJ_215 Folder

Injector Folders
The INJ_215 folder consists of the following protocol
files for use with the 215 Liquid Handler and 819
Injection Module when being controlled by
UniPoint as a sampling injector, or as a sampling
injector and fraction collector in combinatorial
chromatography systems:

215_PREP.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method. This protocol
uses preparative flow rates to
aspirate and dispense the sample.

215PAR.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method. This protocol
uses analytical flow rates to
aspirate and dispense the sample.

215TOT.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method. This protocol
uses analytical flow rates to
aspirate and dispense the sample.

11-7
 Routines and Protocols 11

FC215PAR.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

Injector Folders

uses partial loop fill injection

technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method at the time of
injection. Includes a second
system synchronization
command to signal the control
method that all injection steps are
complete and the system can
proceed with fraction collection.
This protocol uses analytical flow
rates to aspirate and dispense the
sample.

FC215TOT.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method at the time of
injection. Includes a second
system synchronization
command to signal the control
method that all injection steps are
complete and the system can
proceed with fraction collection.
This protocol uses analytical flow
rates to aspirate and dispense the
sample.

11-8
Routines and Protocols 11

Two example routine files (215_ROUT.GIR and

Injector Folders
215_PREP.GIR) are also found in the INJ_215 folder.

The 215_ROUT.GIR routines file incorporates

routines used to aspirate and dispense at analytical
flow rates. This routines file consists of the
following routines: air gap, aspirate, dilution,
dilution from reservoir, dispense, home, injection/
partial loop fill, injection/total loop fill, mix, rinse
injection port, rinse needle inside, rinse needle
outside, sample location and synchronize.
The 215_PREP.GIR routines file incorporates
routines used to aspirate and dispense at
preparative flow rates. This routines file consists of
the following routines: air gap, aspirate, dilution,
dilution from reservoir, dispense, home, injection/
partial loop fill, injection/total loop fill, mix, rinse
injection port, rinse needle inside, rinse needle
outside, sample location and synchronize.

11-9
 Routines and Protocols 11

INJ_235 Folder
Injector Folders

The INJ_235 folder consists of the following protocol

files for use with the 235/235P Autoinjectors when
being controlled by UniPoint as a sampling injector in
a chromatography system:

235_CEN.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses centered loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

235_PAR.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

235_TOT.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

An example routines file (235_ROUT.GIR) is also

found in the INJ_235 folder. This single file consists
of the following routines: air gap 3 µL, air gap 6 µL,
aspirate from reservoir, aspirate from reservoir at
0.3 mL/min., aspirate sample volume, aspirate
sample volume at 0.1 mL/min., aspirate/dispense
from reservoir, dilution, dilution from reservoir,
dispense sample volume, home, injection/centered
loop fill, injection/partial loop fill, injection/total
loop fill, mix, needle dip, rinse injection port, rinse
needle inside, rinse needle outside, sample location
and synchronize.

11-10
Routines and Protocols 11

INJ_235S Folder

Injector Folders
The INJ_235S folder consists of the following
protocol files for use with the SP 235/SP 235P
Septum Piercing Autoinjectors when being
controlled by UniPoint as a sampling injector in a
chromatography system:

235S_CEN.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses centered loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

235S_PAR.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

235S_TOT.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

An example routines file (235S_ROU.GIR) is also

found in the INJ_235S folder. This single file consists
of the following routines: air gap 3 µL, air gap 6 µL,
aspirate from reservoir, aspirate from reservoir at 0.3
mL/min., aspirate sample volume, aspirate/
dispense from reservoir, dilution, dilution from
reservoir, dispense sample volume, home, injection/
centered loop fill, injection/partial loop fill,
injection/total loop fill, mix, needle dip, rinse
injection port, rinse needle inside, rinse needle
outside, sample location and synchronize.

11-11
 Routines and Protocols 11

INJ_235T Folder
Injector Folders

The INJ_235T folder consists of the following protocol

files for use with the 235/235P Autoinjectors fitted
with a Tee Injection Port (shown below) when being
controlled by UniPoint as a sampling injector in a
chromatography system:

235CEN_T.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses centered loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

235PAR_T.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

235TOT_T.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

Tee Injection Port on a 235 Autoinjector
uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

An example routines file (235_ROUT.GIR) is also

found in the INJ_235T folder. This single file
consists of the following routines: air gap 3 µL, air
gap 6 µL, aspirate from reservoir, aspirate from
reservoir at 0.3 mL/min., aspirate sample volume,
aspirate sample volume at 0.1 mL/min., aspirate/
dispense from reservoir, dilution, dilution from
reservoir, dispense sample volume, home,
injection/centered loop fill, injection/partial loop
fill, injection/total loop fill, mix, needle dip, rinse
above seal, rinse injection port, rinse needle inside,
rinse needle outside, sample location and
synchronize.

11-12
Routines and Protocols 11

INJ_MIC Folder

Injector Folders
The INJ_MIC folder consists of the following
protocol files for use with the Micro 215 Liquid
Handler and 841 Micro Injection Module when
being controlled by UniPoint as a sampling injector
in a chromatography system:

MIC_CEN.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses centered loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

MIC_PAR.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

MIC_TOT.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

A single example routines file (MICRO215.GIR) is

also found in the INJ_MIC folder. This routines file
consists of the following routines: air gap/variable,
aspirate from reservoir, aspirate sample volume,
dilution, dilution from reservoir, dispense sample
volume, home, injection/centered loop fill,
injection/partial loop fill, injection/total loop fill,
mix, rinse injection port, rinse needle inside, rinse
needle outside, sample location and synchronize.

11-13
 Routines and Protocols 11

INJ_MICT Folder
Injector Folders

The INJ_MICT folder consists of the following

protocol files for use with the Micro 215 Liquid
Handler and 841 Micro Injection Module fitted with
a Tee Injection Port (shown below) when being
controlled by UniPoint as a sampling injector in a
chromatography system:

MICCEN_T.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses centered loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

MICPAR_T.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

Tee Injection Port on an 841 Micro MICTOT_T.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;
Injection Module uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

A single example routines file (MICRO215.GIR) is

also found in the INJ_MICT folder. This routines file
consists of the following routines: air gap/variable,
aspirate from reservoir, aspirate sample volume,
dilution, dilution from reservoir, dispense sample
volume, home, injection/centered loop fill,
injection/partial loop fill, injection/total loop fill,
mix, rinse above seal, rinse injection port, rinse
needle inside, rinse needle outside, sample location
and synchronize.

11-14
Routines and Protocols 11

INJ_MUL Folder

Injector Folders
The INJ_MUL folder consists of the following
protocol files for use with the Multiple Probe 215
Liquid Handler and 889 Multiple Injection Module
when being controlled by UniPoint as a sampling
injector in a chromatography system:

PAR_DLAY.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample

plus a push volume; uses partial
loop fill injection technique to
load and inject the sample with a
wait time to switch the multiple
injection valves; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

TOT_DLAY.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample

plus a push volume; uses total
loop fill injection technique to
load and inject the sample with a
wait time to switch the multiple
injection valves; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

A single example routines file (MULTI215.GIR) is

also found in the INJ_MUL folder. This routines file
consists of the following routines: air gap/variable,
aspirate from reservoir, aspirate sample volume,
dilution, dilution from reservoir, dispense sample
volume, home, injection/partial loop fill with delay,
injection/total loop fill with delay, mix, rinse
injection port, rinse needle inside, rinse needle
outside, sample location, switch to inject with delay
and synchronize.

11-15
 Routines and Protocols 11

INJ215SW Folder
Injector Folders

The INJ215SW folder consists of the following

protocol files for use with the 215 SW and 819
Injection Module when being controlled by UniPoint
as a sampling injector in a chromatography system:

215SWCEN.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

215SWPAR.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses partial loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

215SWTOT.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample; includes system
synchronization command to
coordinate the protocol and
control method.

A single routines file (215SW.GIR) is also found in the

INJ215SW folder. This routines file consists of the
following routines: air gap, aspirate left syringe from
reservoir, aspirate right syringe from reservoir,
aspirate right syringe from reservoir at 0.3 mL/
min., aspirate small volume, aspirate small volume
at 0.1 mL/min., dilution from reservoir, dilution
large volume, dilution small volume, dispense large
volume, dispense small volume, home, injection/
centered loop fill, injection/partial loop fill, injection/
partial loop fill on left 819, injection/total loop fill, mix,
rinse injection port, rinse injection port after inject,
rinse needle inside, rinse needle outside, sample
location and synchronize.

11-16
Routines and Protocols 11

INJ_845Z Folder

Injector Folders
The INJ_845Z folder consists of the following
protocol files for use with the 215 Liquid Handler
and 845Z Injection Module when being controlled
by UniPoint as a sampling injector in a
chromatography system:

845ZTOT.GIP Locates and aspirates a sample;

uses total loop fill injection
technique to load and inject the
sample.

A single routines file (845Z.GIR) is also found in the

INJ_845Z folder. This routines file consists of the
following routines: air gap, aspirate, dilution, dilution
from reservoir, dispense, home, injection/total loop
fill, mix, rinse needle for 845Z, rinse needle inside,
rinse needle outside, sample location and
synchronize.

11-17
 Routines and Protocols 11

Using Pre-Stored Routines and

Using Pre-Stored Routines and Protocols

Protocols

Special Considerations when Using

Pre-Stored Routines and Protocols

Special character *

We use the special character * when assigning

descriptions in the example routines files supplied
with UniPoint. This causes the software to skip
the device configuration checks it performs when
a routines file is associated with a protocol file.
Therefore, one protocol file created using the *
character can be used to control any Gilson
sampling injector model within a sampler family
(Version A, XL and 234 samplers for example).

Note: Use this symbol with care in your files.

Problems may occur at run time if device
parameters do not match.

Example: If the configuration for the protocol file

has a 231 XL injector and the configuration for the
control method has a 234 injector, the software does
not warn you of any mismatches if the description
for the 231 XL injector is injector*. It does warn you
if the description is injector.

System configuration

Each pre-stored routines file and pre-stored protocol

file is based on an internal system configuration
consisting of a sampler and injection module, as
appropriate. This configuration will be noted as
<internal> in the system configuration dialog. It is
important to note that the syringe size set in this
pre-stored <internal> system configuration
determines the limits for volumes (and flow rates)
aspirated and dispensed when using the pre-stored
protocols.

11-18
Routines and Protocols 11

Relative path

Using Pre-Stored Routines and Protocols

The pre-stored routines files have been browsed into
the protocols using the relative path feature. You
can see this by opening any pre-stored protocol,
then selecting the Device – Injector dialog. Click
once on the routine file description in the Injector
Routines Files list box to highlight it. Notice that the
filename displayed at the top of the dialog box does
not include a path – for example, it is shown as
.\215_rout.gir. When the file name is preceded by a
.\ and not by a complete path, it is known as a
relative path. By browsing the routines file into the
protocol with a relative path designation, UniPoint
will not look to a specific path for the routines file,
but will use the matching file in the current folder.

To designate the routines file with a relative path

when making a new protocol, click Browse in the
Device - Injector dialog and locate the appropriate
routines file. Manually type in .\ before the name of
the file in the File name entry box. Then click OK to
browse in the file, and note the relative path
designation at the top of the dialog box.

11-19
 Routines and Protocols 11

Using Any of the Pre-Stored Injector

Using Pre-Stored Routines and Protocols

Protocol Files without Modifications

1 Create a working folder using Windows
Explorer. If possible, create this folder on the
root directory (C:\folder). ALWAYS name your
folder with ≤ 8 characters using alphanumeric
characters.

Note: Do not use the C:\GILSON\UNIPOINT

or C:\GILSON folders as your working folder.

2 Copy the appropriate folder of routines and

protocols to your working folder, using
Windows Explorer.

3 If desired, view any routine or protocol by

opening it from the UniPoint Navigator.

4 Set up one or more protocols in your control

method.

From the Device - Injector dialog:

• Click Browse to load the protocol(s) into the

method.

• Select the injector in the Devices list box, and

click Tray Editor to select or create a tray file
(See Section 12 for more information on the
Tray Editor).

• After the tray file has been created and

saved, close the Tray Editor.

11-20
Routines and Protocols 11

From the Event - Injector dialog:

Using Pre-Stored Routines and Protocols

• Insert a timed event in the control method to
start the protocol(s). (For an example of this
control method see page 11-23.)

In the Injector - Protocol File Description

box choose your originally browsed in
protocol. Enter the variables (in this
example AIRGAP_VOLUME, TUBE and
LOOP_VOLUME) and then click Done.

11-21
 Routines and Protocols 11

From the Event - System dialog:

Using Pre-Stored Routines and Protocols

• Insert a synchronize timed event in the

control method to coordinate the system
injection between the protocol and the
control method.

5 Create an operations list that uses this control

method.

6 Run the Operations list controlling your HPLC

system.

11-22
Routines and Protocols 11

In the example shown on page 11-21, the protocol is

Using Pre-Stored Routines and Protocols

placed in the control method (shown below) at 0.10
minutes or after the initial system events (setting
initial flow rate, mobile phase composition and
detector parameters) are programmed. The
synchronize is placed in the control method at 0.15
minutes or after the scheduled protocol time. This
allows the protocol to start its steps (home, air gap,
etc) at 0.10 minutes while the control method at time
0.15 will synchronize (or wait) for the matching
synchronize within the protocol. When the two
synchronizes occur, sample injection occurs.

11-23
 Routines and Protocols 11

Routines
Routines

Make a New Injector Routine by

Modifying an Existing Routine
1 Close ALL open windows in UniPoint.

2 From the Navigator, open the appropriate

routines file by selecting Advanced - Injector
Routines - Open. Choose View - Routines.

3 Open the routine that is closest to the new routine

you want to create (choose Edit - Routines - select
from list and click View).

4 Highlight all lines and then copy the steps of

this routine.

11-24
Routines and Protocols 11

5 Open a new routine (choose Edit - New Routine).

Routines
6 Paste in the copied steps.

7 Make the desired changes to this routine.

8 Save the new routine to the appropriate routines

file (choose File - Save).

• Enter a unique description for the routine

(this description will appear in the Routines
list box, for example Air Gap with Variable
Volume).

Note: If you modify a routine and save it

without giving it a new description, the
change(s) are reflected everywhere that
routine is used.

• Click OK and then select the appropriate file

name in the save as box to save this new
routine to an existing routines file.

11-25
 Routines and Protocols 11

Make a New Injector Routine Using

Routines

Commands
1 Close ALL open windows in UniPoint.

2 From the Navigator, open the appropriate

routines file by selecting Advanced - Injector
Routines - Open.

3 Open a new routine (choose Edit - New

Routine).

4 Access the Device menu to check and/or assign

descriptions for the system components.

5 Use the Event menu to insert each step

(command) for the routine.

6 Save the new routine to the routines file (choose

File - Save).

• Enter a unique description for the routine

(this description will appear in the Routines
list box, for example Air Gap with Variable
Volume).

• Click OK and then select the appropriate

filename in the save as box to save this new
routine to the existing routines file.

11-26
Routines and Protocols 11

Protocols

Protocols
Make a New Injector Protocol from an
Existing Protocol
1 Close ALL open windows in UniPoint.

2 Open the protocol that is closest in function to

the new protocol you want to create.

3 Choose File - Save As to save this protocol file

with a new name in your working folder.

• Enter a unique description for the new

protocol (this description will appear in the
control method, for example Partial Loop Fill
Injection).

• Click OK and then enter a unique filename

for the new protocol, being sure to save it
into your working folder.

4 Modify the protocol as desired (for example,

insert a new routine you have created).

5 Save the changes to the protocol (choose File -

Save).

11-27
 Routines and Protocols 11

Make a New Injector Protocol Using

Protocols

Routines and/or Commands

1 Close ALL open windows in UniPoint.

2 From Navigator choose Advanced - Injector

Protocol - New.

3 Access the Device menu to check and/or assign

descriptions for the system components.

4 If you have created and are using routines files,

access the Device - Injector dialog to browse in
these files and make them available for use in
the protocol file.

• Use the relative path feature when browsing

in the routines file. (See page 11-19 for more
information on the relative path.)

Note: When creating a new injector protocol,

multiple routines can be browsed in for more
options.

11-28
Routines and Protocols 11

5 Use the Event menu to indicate each step for the

Protocols
protocol.

• Select Injector commands, or routines from

the routines files.

6 Save the new protocol (choose File - Save) to

your working folder.

• Enter a unique description for the protocol

(this description will appear in the control
method, for example Partial Loop Fill
Injection).

• Click OK, then enter a unique filename for

the new protocol, being sure to save it into
your working folder.

11-29
 Routines and Protocols 11

Control Methods and Operations

Control Methods and Operations Lists

Lists
Using a New or Modified Protocol in an
Existing Control Method
1 Close ALL open windows in UniPoint.

2 From the UniPoint Navigator screen, open the

control method.

3 Delete current line containing a protocol in the

method.

4 Save the control method and discard variables

when asked this question.

5 From the Device - Injector dialog, browse to

bring in the new protocol.

6 From the Event - Injector dialog, change the

timed event to start the new protocol.

7 Choose File - Save to save this change to the

control method.

8 Create and save a new operations list that uses

this modified control method.

11-30
Routines and Protocols 11

Using a New or Modified Protocol in a

Control Methods and Operations Lists

New Control Method
1 Close ALL open windows in UniPoint.

2 From the UniPoint Navigator Screen:

• Choose File - Default System Configuration

to check that the correct system
configuration is currently loaded.

• Choose to create a new control method.

3 From the control method Device menu

• Set descriptions and options for all of the

components in your system.

• Create the tray file. For more information on

the tray file, see Section 12.

• In the Device - Injector dialog, browse to

bring in the new protocol.

4 From the control method Event menu

• Specify the timed instructions to send to all

of the components in your system.

• In the Event - Injector dialog, insert a timed

event to start the new protocol.

5 Save the control method (choose File - Save),

being sure to save it into your working folder.

6 Create and save a new operations list that uses

this modified control method.

11-31
Tray Editor 12

This section introduces the Tray Editor Software supplied with the Gilson UniPoint System
Software. You use the Tray Editor to create a tray file that contains rack, zone and tube
information for your Gilson injector or fraction collector. UniPoint then uses this
information to access tubes during a run.

Setting up a tray file consists of the following:

• Choosing the template for the work area of the auto-injector or fraction collector. (When
you open the Tray Editor from UniPoint, the template is automatically selected and
displayed.)

• Placing each rack into the appropriate location in the template.

• Identifying the zone names to assign to groups of tubes. (By default, UniPoint sets up
the descriptions TUBES and FRACTIONS for you. You can use these names or specify
different names.)

• Assigning a zone and number to each tube location used.

This section describes how to do the above. However, first you learn how to start the Tray
Editor and learn about the Tray Editor window.

12-1
 Tray Editor 12

Starting the Tray Editor

Starting the Tray Editor

You can start the Tray Editor using UniPoint.

You access the Tray Editor by selecting its command

button in the Injector and Fraction Collector dialogs
of the Device menu. This menu is available in the
Control Method, Protocol, and Routines windows.

When the Tray Editor window appears, you see a

work area containing a template for the work area of
the device. See diagram on next page.

12-2
Tray Editor 12

Tray Editor Window

Tray Editor Window

Following is an example Tray Editor window with
tray information already set up.

12-3
 Tray Editor 12

Menu Bar
Tray Editor Window

Choose Tray Editor functions from the drop-down

menus found beneath the seven items on the menu
bar.

Menu Description
File Create, open, save or print files; exit
the Tray Editor.
Edit Add or remove zones, racks, and
tubes.
View Change size of graphic; remove
toolbar and status bar.
Zone Select a zone.
Options Change tubing numbering or place
rack in custom position.
Window Re-arrange windows or icons, or
activate a window.
Help Learn about the Tray Editor.

Template
Displays a graphical representation of instrument’s
work area. It illustrates the position of racks and
tubes.

12-4
Tray Editor 12

Toolbar

Tray Editor Window

Consists of several tools that represent various
functions of the Tray Editor. The table below
describes each of the tools, from left to right. To
activate a tool, just click on its icon.

Tool Description
New Creates a tray file.

Open Recalls existing tray

file.

Save Stores tray file to disk.

Print Generates a printout of

the active tray file.

About Displays current

software version and
copyright information.

Zone Sets the names

assigned to groups of
tubes.

Left and Right Arrows Activates each zone in

turn. The name of the
active zone appears in
the status bar located
at the bottom of the
window and described
below.

Tube Numbering Identifies how blocks

of tubes are numbered.

The toolbar can be turned on and off from the View

menu.

12-5
 Tray Editor 12

Status Bar
Tray Editor Window

Shows the following information, from left to right:

Field Description
message Shows operational status of Tray
Editor or a help message if a menu
command is being highlighted.
X Location Shows the X-axis position, in
millimeters, of the mouse pointer.
Y Location Shows the Y-axis position, in
millimeters, of the mouse pointer.
zone indicator Shows the name of the currently
selected zone. If no zone is active,
then No Zone Selected appears.

The status bar can be turned on and off from the

View menu.

12-6
Tray Editor 12

Setting Up a Tray File

Setting Up a Tray File

The following sections take you through creating a
tray file. As stated earlier, you do the following to
set up a tray:

• Choose a template.
• Insert rack(s).
• Set up zone names.
• Assign zone name and numbers to tubes.
• Save the tray file.

Choosing a Template
The first step in creating a tray file is to select a
template file supplied with the Tray Editor.
Unless their destination was changed when the
Tray Editor was installed, these files are located at
C:\GILSON\TRAY\RACKS.

A template file identifies the work area of Gilson

injectors and fraction collectors. Each template file
contains rack locations on an instrument bed
outline. The instrument bed outline represents the
actual limitations of the instrument probe or
dispense head. The area outside of this outline is
inaccessible to the probe or dispense head.

The name of each template file identifies the

following:

• the model number of the device, for example,

m203 is for the FC 203 Fraction Collector or
m234 is for the 234 Autoinjector.

• if applicable, the version of the device, such as

m203b for version B of the 203 Fraction
Collector, m231a for the non-XL version of the
231 Auto-Sampling Injector, and m231x for an
XL version of the 231 Auto-Sampling Injector.

• type of rack locator installed “_an” for narrow

antlers, “_aw” for wide antlers “_p” for tray,
“fn” for funnel adapter, or “mt” for microplate
adapter.

12-7
 Tray Editor 12

When you open the Tray Editor from UniPoint, the

Setting Up a Tray File

template is automatically selected for the installed

injector or fraction collector and displayed on-
screen. To create a second tray file for the injector or
fraction collector while in the Tray Editor, you must
select a template.

1 Choose New from the File menu. Or, click on

the New tool in the toolbar.

2 When the dialog box appears, type or select the

file to open. If the file is not listed in the File
Name list box, do one or both of the following:
In the Drives box, select a different drive.
In the Directories box, select a different folder.

3 Choose OK after selecting a template file.

The Tray Editor displays a document window

with a graphical representation of the
instrument’s work area. (An example template is
shown on page 12-3.) On-screen, the blue outline
represents the area that can be accessed by the
device. The gray rectangles identify locations for
racks.

12-8
Tray Editor 12

Defining Racks

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

Once a template file has been selected, you identify
the rack.

Unless their destination was changed when

UniPoint was installed, rack files are located at
C:\GILSON\TRAY\RACKS.

For rack files, the file name identifies the rack code
and has the extension .GRK, for example,
CODE_028.GRK. Also, be aware of the following:

• Some rack codes can be installed on a tray or on

wide antlers. The file name with the “T” after the
code number is for use with a tray, for example,
CODE_30T.GRK. The other file is for use with
wide antlers, for example, CODE_030.GRK.

• If using rack code 29, the file CODE_29L.GRK

is for use with large Eppendorf vials and
CODE_29S.GRK is for use with small
Eppendorf vials.

12-9
 Tray Editor 12

Identifying rack information

Setting Up a Tray File

To identify information for pre-determined rack

locations, follow the procedures below.

Note: Refer to page 12-25 if using non-Gilson racks

or placing racks in non-standard location in the
work area.

1 Click on one of the rack positions in the template

to select it. A red outline appears whenever a
rack position is selected. Then choose Add Rack
from the Edit menu.

Or, double-click on the rack location in the

template.

The Select rack to add dialog appears. The File

Name list box displays valid rack files for the
selected position.

2 In the File Name box, type or select the file to

open. If the rack file is not listed in the File
Name list box, do one or both of the following:
In the Drives box, select a different drive.
In the Directories box, select a different folder.

3 Click on OK.

Note: If you see the Custom Placement dialog at

this point, that feature has been turned on. Just
click on OK. The Tray Editor positions
information in the correct location. To turn off
custom placement, choose its command from the
Options menu. For more information on custom
placement of racks, see page 12-25.

The template now displays tube locations that

can be accessed for the rack.

4 Repeat the above until each rack has been

defined.

12-10
Tray Editor 12

Deleting rack

Setting Up a Tray File

If a rack was just defined, you can choose Undo Last
Add from the Edit menu. This command is only
available immediately after a rack file has been
opened. Once another action is performed, this
command is dimmed.

You can also delete a rack by double-clicking

outside of a tube or insert. You see message box
asking you to verify the deletion.

12-11
 Tray Editor 12

Setting Up and Modifying Zone Names

Setting Up a Tray File

After identifying racks, you name the groups of

tubes to process, for example Reagents, Samples,
and so on.

When you access the Tray Editor from UniPoint, the

Tray Editor automatically assigns the default zone
names, TUBES and FRACTIONS, and lists them in
the Zone menu. You can use those zone names or
different ones.

Note: If you use the New command in the Tray

Editor to create a new template, the Tray Editor
assigns the default zone names, Zone 1 - 4.

To the right of the zone name is its identifier (or

shortcut key). When the template window is on-
screen, pressing the letter (A - Z) on the keyboard
enables you to activate the zone without having to
use the Zone menu. When the zone is inactive, this
is also the letter that appears in any tubes associated
with the zone.

The No Zone Selected command makes all zones

inactive. Only the identifier (A - Z) appears in tubes
assigned to a zone.

To view the dialog box for managing zones, choose

Zone Names from the Edit menu. Or, click on the
Zones tool in the toolbar.

You see the Edit Zones dialog that enables you to

identify up to 26 zone names (identified by a letter
between A and Z). Refer to the procedures below to
make changes to, add, and remove zones. The new
and updated zone names are then listed in the Zone
menu.

12-12
Tray Editor 12

Changing a zone name

Setting Up a Tray File

To modify a zone name:

1 Select the zone to replace.

2 In the text box, type the new name.

3 Click on Replace to change the old name to the

new name.

Adding a new name

To identify another zone name:

1 In the text box, type the new name.

2 Click on Add to add the new name to the list. In

addition, the Tray Editor also indicates the 1-
letter identifier for quickly activating the zone.
When a zone is inactive and tubes have been
assigned to it, this letter appears in the tubes
associated with the zone.

New zones are added to the list in the order they

are entered. To change the order, use the
changing a zone name procedures, above.

Removing a zone name

To delete a zone name:

1 Choose the zone to delete. The name of the zone

appears in the text box.

2 Click on Delete to remove the zone from the list.

Remaining zones move up in the order to
replace the deleted zone.

12-13
 Tray Editor 12

Assigning Zone and Number to Tubes

Setting Up a Tray File

You can select tubes to put into different zones that

you have named for your convenience.

Numbering tubes establishes identification

information for each one. The liquid handling
program can then refer to a specific tube by zone
name and sequence number.

When adding tubes to and removing them from a

zone, note the following:

• Tubes can be numbered individually, across

single rows or columns, or in blocks.

• Tubes from more than one rack can be in the

same zone.

• Tubes in the same zone can have different

numbering patterns.

Numbering tubes individually

Tubes can be numbered one at a time without an

apparent pattern. To number tubes individually:

1 Select a zone from the Zone menu.

2 Click on tubes in the order that you want them

numbered in the zone. To remove a tube from a
zone, click on the tube again. Higher numbered
tubes are renumbered to maintain the sequence.

12-14
Tray Editor 12

Numbering tubes in a single column or row

Setting Up a Tray File

Tubes can be numbered sequentially across a
column or row. The numbering order is determined
by the direction they are selected. For example,
tubes that are selected from left to right display
numbers in ascending order from left to right. If
tubes are selected across racks, the numbering
sequence is not interrupted.

To number tubes in a column or

row:

1 Select a zone from the Zone

menu.

2 Position the mouse pointer just

outside the first tube to assign to
the zone.

3 While holding down the left

mouse button, drag the mouse
in the direction you want the
tubes numbered. You can select
a row of tubes across multiple
racks.

4 When all of the tubes have been

selected in the single row or
column, release the mouse
button.

Tubes can be numbered from

left to right, right to left, back to
front, or front to back

Re-selecting tubes remove them

from the zone.

Note: If you select multiple rows or columns, the

Tray Editor thinks you are selecting a block of
tubes and uses the default numbering pattern.
This pattern is set using the Tube Numbering
command in the Options menu.

12-15
 Tray Editor 12

Numbering blocks of tubes

Setting Up a Tray File

Tubes can be numbered in a selected pattern across

multiple columns and rows. The numbering order is
determined by the pattern selected in the
Numbering Patterns dialog. To number blocks of
tubes:

1 Select a zone from the Zone menu.

2 Choose Tube Numbering from the Options

menu. The Numbering Pattern dialog appears.

3 Select where numbering begins and the pattern

to use. As you can see, numbering patterns can
be rectangular or serpentine.

By selecting each of the Starting corner option

buttons and then looking at the pattern
diagrams, you can see how the numbering of
tubes is affected. There are 16 different
numbering patterns available. (The numbering
patterns shown in the dialog box are
representative and can be expanded to include
as many tubes as needed.)

4 Click on OK to close the dialog box and return to

the Tray Editor window so you can select tubes.

5 Point the mouse just outside of one of the corner

tubes to assign to the zone.

12-16
Tray Editor 12

6 Holding down the left mouse button, drag the

Setting Up a Tray File

mouse until all of the tubes have been selected.
You can select multiple racks. Release the mouse
button.

When you are numbering a block of tubes, the

direction they are selected does not affect the
pattern.

When the selected block of tubes expands across

racks, the numbering sequences are not
interrupted and the pattern continues as if the
rack outlines do not exist.

7 Repeat the above to assign numbers to

additional blocks of tubes. Remember to change
the zone and tube numbering scheme if
necessary before selecting the tubes.

12-17
 Tray Editor 12

Changing tube numbers

Setting Up a Tray File

You can change the numbers assigned to tubes in a

zone as described below:

1 Choose a zone name from the Zone menu to

select and highlight all of the tubes associated
with a zone.

2 Select a tube or group of tubes to renumber. This

action removes the tubes from the current zone
and removes the numbers as well. Gray filled
circles appear for the tubes.

Remaining tubes in that zone adjust their

numbering so that no numbers are skipped.

3 Select the tubes again in the pattern that you

want them numbered.

Removing tubes from zone

To remove tubes from a zone:

1 Choose No Zone Selected from the Zone menu.

2 Then click on each tube or select a group of

tubes by clicking and dragging to draw a box
around the tubes to remove.

Remaining tubes in the zone are renumbered so

that no numbers are skipped. The removed
tubes are displayed as gray-filled circles.

12-18
Tray Editor 12

Viewing Techniques

Viewing Techniques
Determining Tube Status
The appearance of a tube determines its current
status.

Gray-filled - The tube does not belong to a zone and

is consequently not numbered. Clicking on the tube
assigns it to the currently selected zone. (If the No
Zone Selected option is active, the state of the tube
remains the same.)

Blue-filled, numbered - The tube is in the currently

selected zone. Clicking on the tube:

• Reverts the tube to an ungrouped and

unnumbered state. A gray-filled circle results.

• Causes remaining tubes in the zone to adjust

their numbering so that no number is skipped.

Lettered - The tube is assigned to a zone that is

represented by the letter. Clicking on the tube
activates its zone so you can see the tube number
assigned to the tube plus any other tubes in the
zone. The name of the zone is then shown in the
status bar.

Scrolling Through Zones

Do any of the following to scroll through zones and
see what tubes have been assigned to each one:

1 In the toolbar, click on the left or right arrow to

move through the assigned zones, activating
each in turn.

Or, choose the name of the zone from the Zone

menu. Repeat for each additional zone.

Or, using the keyboard, press the 1-letter

shortcut key assigned to the zone.

12-19
 Tray Editor 12

Getting Tube Information

Viewing Techniques

Pressing the SHIFT key while simultaneously clicking

SHIFT + on a tube displays a box showing the current state
of the tube (zone and number assignment) and the
tube’s physical dimensions.

Getting Template and Rack

Information
SHIFT + Pressing the SHIFT key while simultaneously clicking
outside a tube displays a box showing the name of
the associated template and rack file.

12-20
Tray Editor 12

Enlarging/Reducing Size of the

Viewing Techniques
Template
You can zoom in and out on the information
displayed in the template by changing its size. To do
this, choose Scaling from the View menu. The
Scaling dialog appears.

Some considerations when using the Scaling dialog

are:

• Maximum scale factor is 400% and the minimum

scale factor is 25%.

• Choose the Auto Scale check box to display the

entire instrument bed in the opened window.
(Note that manually setting scale factor turns off
this option.)

• You can indicate the scale factor directly by

highlighting the current scale factor in the text
box and typing the new number or by using the
scroll bar to select the factor.

Turning Off/On Toolbar

To remove the toolbar from display, choose Toolbar
from the View menu. To redisplay it, select the
command again.

Turning Off/On Status Bar

To remove the status bar from display, choose
Status bar from the View menu. To redisplay it,
select the command again.

12-21
 Tray Editor 12

Managing Tray Files

Managing Tray Files

Saving a File
To save a new file to disk for future retrieval:

1 From the File menu, choose Save or Save As. Or,

click on the New tool in the toolbar.

2 When the File Save As dialog appears, use its

options to name and select a storage location for
the file.

3 Choose OK to save the file.

To quickly save the contents of a named file to disk:

1 From the File menu, choose Save (rather than

Save As). Or, click on the Save tool in the
toolbar.

Opening a File
To display the contents of an existing tray file:

1 From the File menu, choose Open to display the

Open Tray File dialog. Or, click on the Open tool
in the toolbar.

2 When the Open Tray File dialog appears, use its

options to locate and select the tray file.

3 Choose OK to open the file.

12-22
Tray Editor 12

Making a Copy of a File

Managing Tray Files

To store the changes made to file to a new name
while still keeping a previous version, do the
following:

1 From the File menu, choose Save As.

2 When the File Save As dialog (shown on

previous page) appears, use its options to name
and select a storage location for the file.

3 Choose OK.

Deleting a File
To remove one or more tray files, use the Windows
Explorer. See your Microsoft Windows User’s Guide
for more information.

12-23
 Tray Editor 12

Printing Tray Files

Printing Tray Files

Previewing What is Printed

To see what is printed for a tray file:

1 Choose Print Preview from the File menu. The

Print Preview window appears.

2 Use the command buttons at the top of the

window to move between pages, manipulate
what you see on screen, and send the pages to
the printer.

Note: Tray diagrams usually print better if

landscape orientation has been selected. See
specifying printer and setup options on the next
page.

The first page lists the zones that have been

created.

The second page is the tray diagram.

Both pages identify the page number, the date

and time, and the name of the tray file.

3 Choose Close to return to the Tray Editor

window.

12-24
Tray Editor 12

Identifying Custom Racks and

Identifying Custom Racks and Tubes

Tubes
Indicating Rack Placement for Custom
Tray
If your instrument has a custom tray, you must
define where each rack is. Custom Placement allows
you to identify a rack anywhere in the instrument’s
work area.

1 Choose Custom Placement from the Options

menu. When selected, a check mark appears
next to the command.

2 Choose Add Rack from the Edit menu.

3 When the Select Rack to Add dialog appears,

choose from the list of available racks and click
on OK.

4 When the Placement Information dialog

appears, indicate the location and orientation of
the rack; then click on OK.

X location. The distance (in millimeters) to the

center of the rack along the X-axis. (See diagram
to the right.)

Y location. The distance (in millimeters) to the

center of the rack along the Y-axis. (See diagram
to the right.)

12-25
 Tray Editor 12

Orientation. How the rack is positioned on the

Identifying Customer Racks and Tubes

tray. Vertical is the default position for a rack

installed on the tray, such as shown in the
diagram to the left. Horizontal indicates that the
rack is positioned from left to right along the
front face of the instrument.

The diagram on the next page shows how

different values in the Degrees text box affect
how the rack is displayed. For reference, it
identifies tube 1 for a Gilson rack in a standard
vertical position. As the diagram illustrates, 0
degrees is a Vertical orientation and 270 degrees
is a Horizontal orientation.

5 Repeat steps 2 - 4 for each rack.

6 Choose Custom Placement again from the

Options menu so that command is no longer
active.

12-26
Tray Editor 12

Indicating Tube Placement for

Identifying CustomRacks and Tubes

Custom Rack
If you are using a non-Gilson rack or customized
Gilson rack, use the following procedures to identify
the size, location, and number of tubes that the rack
can hold.

1 Click on a rack location to select it.

2 Choose Add Vessels from the Edit menu.

3 When the dialog box appears, indicate tube

information and click on OK. Distances can be
entered to the nearest tenth of a millimeter.
Home position is located at the left rear of the
instrument’s work area.

X Origin. The distance from Home position to

the center of the array along the X-axis.

Y Origin. The distance from Home position to

the center of the array.

X Count. The number of vessels in the rack

along its X-axis.

Y Count. The number of vessels in the rack

along its Y-axis.

X Delta. The distance between the centers of

each tube in the X direction.

Y Delta. The distance between the centers of

each tube in the Y direction.

12-27
 Tray Editor 12

Diameter. The tube’s diameter.

Identifying Custom Racks and Tubes

Top. The distance to the top of the tube in the

rack.

Bottom. The distance to the bottom of the tube

in the rack.

4 Click on OK to exit the dialog.

Locations for the identified tubes appear in the

rack.

5 Repeat the above for any additional racks that

require custom tube information.

12-28
Tray Editor 12

Quitting the Tray Editor

Quitting the Tray Editor

To quit the program.

1 Choose Exit from the File menu.

Or, double-click on the control menu box at the
top left corner of the window.

The UniPoint dialog, from which you accessed

the Tray Editor, appears.

12-29
Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

This section describes how to:

• retrieve archived information from data, report, and calibration files

• export channel data and report information into a text file

13-1
 Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

Extracting Archived Information

Extracting Archived Information

A data file contains more than just the information

collected for data channels. It also includes the
operations list, control method(s), and analysis
method(s), and other files used during the run.
UniPoint contains an “archive extract” feature for
getting to this information and information stored in
other file types. Refer to the table of extractable files
on the next page.

1 From the File menu, choose Archive Extract.

2 In the File Name box, choose the UniPoint file

from which information is retrieved. If the file is
not listed in the box:
• In the Drives box, select a different drive.
• In the Directories box, select a different
folder.

3 Select the option button for the document type to

retrieve.

4 If multiple files for the document type are

available in the file, select the name of the file to
extract in the Available File list box.

13-2
Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

5 In the Destination File box, type the path and file

Extracting Archived Information

name to which the extracted information is
stored. The software automatically places the
path and name of the file selected in the
Available Files box. Change the path or file
name if you want to ensure that an existing file
is not overwritten (required for ERM).

6 Click Extract.

7 Click Done when finished extracting

information.

8 Use the Open command in the File menu to

locate and display the information for the file(s)
just extracted.

Extractable Files

13-3
 Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

Importing Data
Importing Data

Viewing Chromatogram from Non-

Gilson Detector
If you have a non-Gilson detector and can save the
detector’s output in an ASCII format, you can view
the data in the Results window.

Each line of data within the file must include a time

and a voltage. The time and voltage can be
separated by a tab, comma, or space. Each line must
end with a carriage return.

To display a chromatogram for the data:

1 From the File menu, choose the Import

command and display its cascading menu. Then
choose ASCII Chromatogram.

2 When the dialog box appears, indicate the

appropriate information.

Import File. The complete path to and name of

the file. You can use the Browse button to locate
the file if necessary.

Delimiter. How the time and voltage values are

separated.

3 Choose Import. Then choose Done to exit the

dialog box.

The selected trace information appears in the

Results window. The legend identifies the trace.

13-4
Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

Exporting Data and Reports

Exporting Data and Reports

The Export commands within the Results window
enable you to convert data channel and report
information into a text format for use in a
spreadsheet program.

Exporting Chromatogram Data

You can convert data files into a text format that can
be viewed and manipulated in a spreadsheet
program such as Microsoft Excel. These converted
data files contain channel information.

Each line of data within a channel file includes a

time and a voltage. The time and voltage are
separated by a tab or comma depending on the
delimiter you selected before exporting data. Each
line is ended with a carriage return.

To generate an export file containing raw data:

1 From the File menu, choose the Export

command and display its cascading menu. Then
choose Data.

2 Indicate information in the dialog and choose

Export.

Export File. Indicate the name of the export file

to create. To replace an existing file with new
information, click in this text box and then use
the Browse button to locate the file.

Data Channel. If multiple channels are

displayed, choose the channel information to
convert.

13-5
 Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

Num. Data Pts. The number of data points in the

Exporting Data and Reports

file.

Extract Interval. Identifies how often UniPoint

extracts a data point and places it in the export
file.

For example, if the data file has 7000 data points

and the extract interval is set to 100, the exported
file has 70 data points. UniPoint skips the first 99
data points and places the 100th data point in
the export file. It then skips the next 99 data
points and places the 200th data point in the
export file. The software continues this
procedure until all 7000 data points are
processed.

Delimiter. How the columns of text generated by

the software are separated. The software can
separate each column by tab, comma, or blank
space.

Viewing raw data in spreadsheet program

You can view Gilson raw data ASCII files in a

spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel. Use
the spreadsheet program to manipulate and graph
data.

Following is a description of how to create a graph

of a data channel file using Excel.

1 Create an ASCII text file of a Gilson data file

using the Export Data command as described
above.

2 Minimize or exit UniPoint.

3 Start Microsoft Excel.

An empty spreadsheet appears.

4 Choose Open from Excel’s File menu.

13-6
Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

5 Once the Open dialog box appears, use the list

Exporting Data and Reports

boxes and text box to choose the data channel
file. When the correct file name appears in the
File Name box, click on OK.

The spreadsheet for the file appears. Column A

lists the time, and column B lists the
corresponding voltage.

6 Highlight column B. To do this, click the cross

mouse pointer next to the B column heading.

7 Choose New from the File menu.

8 When the dialog box appears, select Chart. Then

click on OK to generate a plot for the data.

9 Use the Excel menu and toolbar items to make

any necessary modifications to the plot.

13-7
 Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

Exporting Report Information

Exporting Data and Reports

You can convert report information into a text

format that can be viewed and manipulated in
spreadsheet program.

Each line of the exported information includes the

text currently shown in the table, separated by tabs,
plus the path, file name, and description of the
sample. A carriage return marks the end of each
line. If you don’t want a column of information
exported, remove the column using the Format
Columns commands within the Table menu.

Creating an export file

To produce an export file for the information shown

in the table:

1 Ensure that information shown in the table is

what you want exported.

2 From the File menu, choose the Export

command and display its cascading menu. Then
choose Report.

3 Type the name of the export file to create in the

Export File box. Use the .TXT extension.

4 Use the list box to select each sample whose

report information is exported.

5 To add the exported information to the end of

the specified file, choose the Append check box.
This option enables you to place report
information for different samples in the same
export file.

6 Choose Export to generate the file.

13-8
Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

Appending to existing file

Exporting Data and Reports

You can add information to an existing text file. This
feature enables you to place report information for
multiple samples in the same export file.

1 Make sure the information shown in the table is

what you want exported.

2 Choose Export Report from the File menu.

3 Use the Browse button to locate an existing

export file.

4 Choose the Append check box.

5 Choose Export to add the information to the end

of the file.

Viewing report information in Excel

You can view Gilson text files in a spreadsheet

program such as Microsoft Excel. Use Excel to
manipulate the information in the file.

1 Create the text file for the report(s) as described

above.

2 Minimize or exit UniPoint.

3 Start Microsoft Excel.

An empty spreadsheet appears.

4 Choose Open from Excel’s File menu.

5 Once the Open dialog box appears, use the list

boxes and text box to choose the export file.
When the correct file name appears in the File
Name box, click on OK.

The spreadsheet for the file appears.

6 Use the Excel menu items to make any necessary

modifications to the spreadsheet, such as
increasing the size of the sample ID column so
that the entire sample ID can be seen.
13-9
 Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

Exporting Calibration Information

Exporting Data and Reports

You can convert calibration information into a text

format that can be viewed and manipulated in
spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel.

Each line of the exported information includes the

text currently shown in the table, separated by tabs,
plus the path and file name of the calibration. A
carriage return marks the end of each line. There are
no headings-only exported information. If you do
not want a column of information exported, remove
the column using the Format Columns command in
the Table menu.

Creating an export file

To produce an export file for the calibration

information shown in the table of a Calibration
window:

1 Ensure that columns shown in the table pane are

what you want exported. You can remove
columns from display and from export using the
Format Columns command in the Table menu.

2 From the File menu, choose the Export

command.

3 Type the name of the export file to create in the

Export File box. Use the .TXT extension.

4 Use the Calibrations list box to select the

calibration table(s) whose peak information is
exported.

13-10
Extract, Import, and Export Features 13

5 Use the Peak Selection area to indicate if

Exporting Data and Reports

information for all standard peaks or for the
peak currently selected in the Calibration
window is exported.

6 If the file listed in the Export File box already

exists, choose the Append box to add exported
peak information to the end of the file.

If Append is not selected, the file is overwritten

with the exported information.

7 Choose Export to generate the file.

Refer to page 13-9 for information on viewing

the file in Microsoft Excel.

13-11
Common Procedures 14

This section deals with procedures that, for the most part, are the same in the various
UniPoint windows. Throughout the manual, you are referred to these procedures.

14-1
 Common Procedures 14

Using the Navigator

Using the Navigator

When you start UniPoint, you may see the

Navigator window. The Navigator provides for
quickly creating and opening files in UniPoint. It
also lets you view example files supplied with the
software.

To display the Navigator if it is not on-screen:

1 Choose Navigator from the File menu.

To use the Navigator:

1 Click in the square next to the document type to

access. The text in the different areas of the
window helps you make your selection.

2 If you do not see the document type you need,

click Advanced... to reveal additional selections
for protocols and routines.

14-2
Common Procedures 14

3 Click New, Open, or Example.

Using the Navigator

New. Displays the document window for the file
type. The New button is not available for Results
and Calibrations because those files are
generated during a run or re-analysis processing
or by saving an existing file to a new name.

Open. Displays the Open dialog for choosing a

file or information in a file.

Example. Displays a list box for selecting

example information supplied with UniPoint
and stored to disk during installation.

Turning Navigator Off/On

When the Show Navigator option is active, the
Navigator appears each time you close all open
document windows in UniPoint. You can turn off
this option so the Navigator does not appear
automatically.

To turn off the Show Navigator option, choose

Options in the File menu. When the Options dialog
appears, click on the Actions tab and then remove
the ‘x’ from the Show Navigator box.

Redisplaying the Navigator

To display the Navigator while a document window
is on-screen, choose its tool ( ) from the toolbar.
Or, choose its command in the File menu.

14-3
 Common Procedures 14

Specifying the Default Font for

Specifying the Default Font for Document Windows

Document Windows
You can select the font to apply to text in a new
document window. When UniPoint is installed, the
default font is Arial.

Once in a document window, there are additional

menu commands that allow you to change the font
displayed in the table or graph. The default font is
always used to display the text shown in the
message line at the bottom of a document window.

To access the command for selecting the default

font:

1 Close all open document windows using the

Close All command in the Window menu. (If it
appears, the Navigator can remain on-screen.)

2 From the File menu, choose Default Font.

14-4
Common Procedures 14

Working in the Table and/or

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

Graph Panes
All document windows in UniPoint display a table
in its window. UniPoint places information into the
table when you set parameters in certain dialog
boxes available within the document window. You
can customize the table by adding or removing
columns from display, changing the font, and
specifying how text is aligned within columns.

Most of the document windows available in

UniPoint can display a graph in the lower pane of
the window. The type of graph varies depending on
the document window. Control and Analysis
Method windows display a time line. Operations,
Results, and Re-Analysis windows display a
chromatogram plot. Calibration windows show
calibration plots. Protocol and Routines windows do
not have a graph pane.

Document Window for Control Method

14-5
 Common Procedures 14

Displaying the Table If It Is Not Shown

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

The table pane may not be displayed when you

open a document window. To reveal the table pane:

1 From the Table menu, choose Show Table.

Choosing the Show Table command again

removes the table from display.

Displaying the Graph Pane If It Is Not

Visible
The graph pane may not always be displayed when
you open a document window. To show the graph
pane:

1 From the Graph menu, choose Show Graph.

Choosing the Show Graph command again

removes the graph from display.

14-6
Common Procedures 14

Sizing the Table and Graph

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

You can modify the size of the table and graph
panes.

1 Place the mouse pointer on the divider between

the table and graph panes. The mouse pointer
changes shape and becomes a two-headed
arrow.

2 Click and drag the pointer up or down to

manipulate the height of the table and graph
panes.

14-7
 Common Procedures 14

Sizing graph
Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

To enlarge or reduce the size of the graph:

1 Click within the graph. When selected, you see a

sizing handle in the lower right corner.

Note: If the legend is concealing the sizing

handle, remove the legend by choosing Legend
in the Graph menu. Or, move the legend, by
clicking within it and dragging it to a new
location.

2 Drag the sizing handle to the right, left, or

diagonally to enlarge or reduce the size of the
graph.

Moving graph

To move the location of the graph:

1 Click within the graph to select it.

2 Drag the graph to the new location.

14-8
Common Procedures 14

Sizing and Moving a Summary Graph

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

In the graph pane of a Results or Re-Analysis
window, you can view and manipulate a summary
graph. The summary graph always shows the entire
chromatogram plot even if you enlarge part of the
graph.

Viewing summary graph

To view and remove the summary graph:

1 Choose a Summary Graph command from the

Graph menu.

2 Choose the command again to remove the

summary graph from display.

Sizing summary graph

To better view the traces shown in the summary

graph, you can make it larger.

1 If the summary graph is not currently selected,

click within its box.

2 Position the mouse pointer at the side or corner

of the box. The mouse pointer changes to a two-
headed arrow.

3 Click and drag the box to the desired size.

Moving summary graph

To change the on-screen location of the summary

graph:

1 Click and drag the box to move it to the new

location.

14-9
 Common Procedures 14

Setting Column Attributes

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

In the table pane of a document window, you can

set attributes for, rename, add, and remove columns.

To display the Format Columns dialog:

1 From the Table menu, choose Format Columns.

Or, double-click on one of the column headings
of the table.

14-10
Common Procedures 14

Changing column width using the mouse

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

You can easily adjust the width of a column so all
text within it can be seen:

1 Place the mouse pointer on the vertical line

located on the right side of the column header
whose column width is to be adjusted. The
mouse pointer changes shape and becomes a
two-headed arrow.

2 Click and drag the mouse pointer to the left to

make the column narrower or to the right to
make it wider.

UniPoint saves column width information with

the file so columns appear as you set them the
next time you open the file.

14-11
 Common Procedures 14

Viewing column attributes

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

To see the options set for a column:

1 Select the column in the Column Contents list

box. The current attributes for the column
appear in the text and drop-down list boxes,
described below.

Contents. The information found in the selected

column. The types of contents that can appear in
each column are set by Gilson.

Heading. The descriptive text that appears at the

top of a column and identifies the type of
information that appears within the column.

Width. The width of the column. Since it is not

easy to know what width is required for
columns containing text, you can use the mouse
to adjust columns if the width is too large or
small. The width set using the mouse inserts in
this test box. See Changing column width using
the mouse on page 14-11.

Factor. A number by which each value in a

column is multiplied.

Justify. How information in the column is

aligned: left justified, right justified, or centered.

Format. How numbers are displayed: decimal,

with or without commas, or scientific notation.

Decimals. The number of positions displayed

after the decimal point.

Password Protect (available in Operations and

Re-Analysis windows only). Turns off/on
password requirement for a column. This
enables a user that does not have password
authority to modify information in an
Operations or Re-Analysis window without
entering a password. The user can save the
changes to a new file name, but not to the
current file name. See the Appendix G, UniPoint
File Protection.
14-12
Common Procedures 14

Changing an attribute

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

To assign a new attribute to a column:

1 Select the column in the Column Contents list

box. The current attributes for the column
appear in the text and drop-down list boxes.

2 Use the text and drop-down list boxes to make

the necessary changes.

3 Click Change.

4 If you are done making modifications, click Done

to exit the dialog. Information in the column is
formatted using the new attributes.

Renaming a column

To change a column heading:

1 Select the column in the Column Contents list

box.

2 Type a new heading in the Heading box.

3 Click Change.

4 If you are done making modifications, click Done

to exit the dialog. The table displays the new
heading.

14-13
 Common Procedures 14

Inserting a column
Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

In the table, columns are inserted to the left of the

column selected in the Column Contents list box.
You can place the highlight after the last column to
insert a column there.

To add a column:

1 Select the appropriate column in the Column

Contents list box. Or, click beneath the last
column to add a column there.

2 Use the text and drop-down list boxes to set the

attributes for the new column.

3 Click Insert.

4 If you are done making modifications, click Done

to exit the dialog. The table displays the new
column.

Removing a column

To remove a column:

1 Select the column in the Column Contents list

box.

2 Click Delete.

3 If you are done making modifications, click Done

to exit the dialog. The table no longer displays
the column.

If you need the column later, use the Inserting a

Column procedures.

Changing the position of a column

To move a column:

1 Select the column in the Column Contents list

box.

2 Click on the up and down buttons to change the

position of the column in the report.
14-14
Common Procedures 14

Manipulating Table Rows

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

You can modify the location of rows in the table by
deleting, copying, and pasting rows.

Some table modifications via the Edit menu, such as

deleting, are not available in all windows.

Important! Only copy and paste rows within a

Control Method or Operations List. Do not attempt
to copy from one Control Method or Operations List
then paste into another Control Method or
Operations List.

Deleting rows

To remove one or more rows and place their

contents in the Windows Clipboard:

1 Select the rows by clicking then dragging the

mouse pointer to highlight them. Or, click on a
row then choose Select All from the Edit menu.

2 Choose Cut in the Edit menu or press the ctrl+x

key. This action not only deletes the rows but
copies their information into the Clipboard.

3 To place the rows elsewhere, see Pasting Rows.

To remove one or more rows without placing their

contents in the Clipboard.

1 Click on a row in the table.

2 Choose Clear All from the Edit menu.

14-15
 Common Procedures 14

Copying rows
Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

To copy the information in one or more rows to the

Clipboard:

1 Select the rows by clicking then dragging the

mouse pointer to highlight them in the table. Or,
click on a row and choose Select All from the
Edit menu.

2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu. This copies

the information into the Clipboard.

3 To place the rows elsewhere, see Pasting Rows.

Important! Only copy and paste rows within a

Control Method or Operations List. Do not attempt
to copy from one Control Method or Operations List
then paste into another Control Method or
Operations List.

Pasting rows

Rows are inserted before the highlighted row. You

can insert rows that were cut or copied from one
document into the same window or into another
window of the same type.

To insert rows:

1 Click on the row before which the information

stored in the Clipboard is inserted.

2 Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

Important! Only copy and paste rows within a

Control Method or Operations List. Do not attempt
to copy from one Control Method or Operations List
then paste into another Control Method or
Operations List.

14-16
Common Procedures 14

Changing the Font

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

The size and appearance of text shown in the graph
area, including the summary graph and legend can
be changed.

1 From the Graph menu, choose Font (or Graph

Font in some document windows).

2 When the Font dialog appears, use the drop-

down list boxes to set font information. If
necessary, refer to page 14-4 for a description of
the areas of the Font dialog.

3 Click OK to exit the Font dialog.

Changing the table font

The size and appearance of the text shown in the

table can be changed. To do this, use the Font dialog
accessed from the Table menu.

Changing peak font

Choosing the Peak Font command, available in the

Graph menu of some document windows, enables
you to change the size and appearance of peak
names. In the Font dialog, two additional options
are available.

Rotation. Indicates the angle (0° to 360°) at

which peak names appear in relation to the X-
axis.

Color. Identifies available color choices for

displaying peak names.
14-17
 Common Procedures 14

Setting Graph Attributes

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

The Attributes dialog provides for changing the

appearance of lines or symbols shown in the graph.

To display and set options in the Attributes dialog:

1 From the Graph menu, choose Attributes. Or,

double-click on one of items shown in the
legend, if it is displayed.

2 When the Attributes dialog appears, review and

if necessary make changes to the attributes for a
line or symbol. The options available vary
depending on the document window.

Legend. Identifies the lines and symbols currently

shown in the graph. The types of lines and symbols
vary between document windows.

To change the attributes for a line or symbol select it

from this list box.

Display or Display Symbol/Line. If selected,

indicates that the line or symbol is currently
displayed in the graph.

Size. Identifies the width of the line or size of the

symbol in pixels.

Color. Lists available color choices for the line or

symbol.

Display Peak Names. If selected, indicates that peak

names will be displayed in the graph.

14-18
Common Procedures 14

Display Events. If selected, UniPoint displays run-

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

time events (such as detector autozero) in the graph.
Following are the symbols and text for run-time
events. Text is black and displayed at a 45° angle.

Event Symbol Color/Fill Text

Gradient*

Detector Event light gray Displays ‘Event’

Detector Autozero light gray Displays ‘Zero’

Device Front Panel Query light gray Displays text

retrieved from front
panel

Fraction Collection: Start green Displays tube

designation, for
example, TUBES:1

Fraction Collection: End red Displays tube

designation, for
example,
FRACTIONS:1

User Pause: Start light red

User Pause: End light red

Synchronization: Start light gray

Synchronization: End light gray

*Note: A gradient line appears for each of the pumps used during the run. The color of
the line is the same as that indicated for the pump in the control method.

Fraction Sites. If selected, indicates that labels will

be displayed in the graph for collected fractions.

3 Click OK to accept any modifications and exit

the dialog. Any change to a line or symbol is
reflected in the graph and the legend.

14-19
 Common Procedures 14

Displaying/removing gridlines
Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

You can turn on and off the display of gridlines in

the graphs of Results, Calibration, Operations, and
Re-Analysis windows.

1 In the Graph menu of the document window,

choose one of the axis commands. For the
Calibration window, the commands are
Amount Axis (for the Y axis) and Area/Height
(for the X-axis). For the other three windows,
the commands are Signal Axis (for the Y axis)
and Time Axis (for the X-axis).

2 When the dialog box appears, remove or insert

an X in the Major or Minor check boxes then
click OK.

3 Repeat the above for the other axis.

14-20
Common Procedures 14

Removing items from display

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

To remove an item from display in the graph:

1 From the Graph menu, choose Attributes.

Or, double-click on one of the items shown in
the legend, if it is displayed.

2 When the Attributes dialog appears, select the

description for the item in the Legend list box.

3 Remove the X from the Display check box.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any additional items to

remove.

5 To disable display of peak names, remove the X

from the Display Peak Names check box.

6 To disable display of run-time events (such as

detector autozero), remove the X from the
Display Event check box.

For a description of run-time event symbols and

lines, see page 14-19.

7 Click OK to accept any modifications and exit

the dialog. The items are no longer displayed.

To redisplay the items, access the Attributes dialog

and replace the X in the Display check box for each
item.

14-21
 Common Procedures 14

Finding and Replacing Information

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

You can locate and replace text in a table. For example,

you could change each occurrence of an analysis
method to another method in an operations list.

Finding text

To locate text:

1 From the Edit menu, choose Find.

2 When the Find dialog appears, type the text to

locate in the Find What box.

3 To further identify the text to locate, choose the

Match the Whole Word Only box, the Match
Case box, or both boxes.

4 To search an individual column, select it in the

list box. If all columns shown in the list box are
searched, select the Search All Columns check
box.

5 Click Find Next to begin the search.

If UniPoint locates the text, it highlights the text.

If UniPoint cannot find the text or has located
the last occurrence of the text, it displays a
message box telling you the text cannot be
found. Remove the message box by choosing
OK.

6 Repeatedly click Find Next to locate any other

occurrences of the text.

7 To close the dialog, click Done.

14-22
Common Procedures 14

Replacing text

Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

To change text:

1 From the Edit menu, choose Replace.

2 When the Replace dialog appears, type the text

to locate in the Find What box.

3 Type the replacement text in the Replace With

box.

4 To further identify the text to locate, choose the

Match Whole Word Only box, Match Case box,
or both.

Note: Not all columns shown in the table may be

listed in the Search Column list box. The
information in those columns is set by UniPoint
and cannot be replaced with user-defined text.

5 Click one of the buttons.

Button Function
Find Next Searches for the word or text string.
Replace Changes the currently selected search text with the replacement text.
Replace All Changes all occurrences of the search text with the replacement text.

If UniPoint locates the text in the table, it

highlights the text. If UniPoint cannot find the
text or has located the last occurrence of the text,
it displays a message box telling you the text
cannot be found. Remove the message box by
choosing OK.

6 To close the dialog, click Done.

14-23
 Common Procedures 14

Legend
Working in the Table and/or Graph Panes

The legend identifies what the lines and symbols

represent in the graph. UniPoint automatically sizes
the legend box so all items are displayed.

Note: For a list of run-time events, whose symbols

are not identified in the legend but may be shown in
the graph of Operations, Results, and Re-Analysis
windows, see page 14-19.

Displaying legend

To see the legend if it is not displayed:

1 From the Graph menu, choose Legend.

Choosing the Legend command again removes

the legend.

Moving legend

To change the on-screen location of the legend:

1 Click on a white area within the legend box.

2 Drag the box to the new location.

Changing attributes

To modify the attributes for an element shown in the

legend, see page 14-18.

14-24
Common Procedures 14

Annotation

Annotation
All document windows can display an annotation
box that lists information for the file being viewed.
For example, in the annotation for a control method,
you see configuration information for and
parameters set in the method file.

In all windows except Results and Calibration, you

can add comments to the annotation for a file; see
Using the Notes or Log File Text Editor on page
14-30 for more information.

The annotations for UniPoint files used during an

HPLC run are placed in and can be printed with the
analysis report.

Displaying and Removing Annotation

To see the annotation:

1 From the Window menu, choose Annotation.

Choosing the Annotation command again

removes the annotation.

14-25
 Common Procedures 14

Sizing or Moving Annotation Box

Annotation

To better view text in the annotation, you can make

the box larger.

1 If the annotation is not currently selected, click

within it.

2 Position the mouse pointer at the side or corner

of the box. The mouse pointer changes to a two-
headed arrow.

3 Click and drag the box to the desired size or click

and drag the colored bar at the top of the box to
move the entire box to the new location.

14-26
Common Procedures 14

Changing Font

Annotation
UniPoint allows you to change the font for the
annotation text displayed on-screen. You cannot
change the font size for print.

To select a different font for annotation text:

1 Position the mouse pointer in the annotation

box.

2 Click the right mouse button.

3 When the menu appears, click on Set Font.

4 When the Font dialog appears, use its options to

indicate font information.

5 Choose OK to exit.

Copying Text
To copy text in the annotation:

1 To select a portion of text, move the mouse

pointer to the left of the text to select. Click and
drag to highlight the desired text.

2 Click the right mouse button.

3 When the menu appears, choose Copy or Copy

All.

14-27
 Common Procedures 14

Manipulating the Toolbar

Manipulating the Toolbar

Each document window has a toolbar that provides

quick access to some options available in the
document window.

Selecting Defaults
You can choose whether or not to automatically
display the toolbar when a document window is
created and how many columns it should have.

1 Choose Options from the File menu.

2 If necessary, click on the Toolbar tab.

3 Use the options under the Toolbar tab to set the

appearance of the toolbar when a document
window is created or opened.

Tool Arrangement. If you select None, no tools

are displayed when a document window is
created or opened. (You can still display the
tools in a document window by selecting the
Toolbar command from the Window menu.)

If you select Floating Palette, the tools appear

within a sizeable and moveable box.

If you select Fixed Ribbon, the tools appear in a

horizontal bar beneath the menu bar.

Number of Columns (for Floating Palette

arrangement). A value of 1 displays a vertical
arrangement on-screen for any document
window that is created or opened. Selecting a
large number (for example, >15) displays a
horizontal arrangement.

4 Choose OK to save the settings and exit the

dialog box. The next time you open or create a
document window, UniPoint uses the conditions
set in the dialog box to display the toolbar.

14-28
Common Procedures 14

Manipulating the Toolbar

Removing Toolbar
To remove the toolbar when viewing a
document window, choose Toolbar from the
Window menu. (Or double-click on the control

menu box in the upper left corner of a floating

palette toolbar).
Choose the Toolbar command again to restore the
toolbar.

Sizing and Moving Toolbar

While in a document window, you can manipulate
the size of a floating palette toolbar.

1 Position the mouse pointer at the side or corner

of the box.

2 Click and drag the box to modify its size or click

and drag the colored bar at the top of the box to
move the box.

UniPoint displays all of the available icons no

matter how small you make the box. It can
display the icons in a vertical or horizontal
arrangement or in multiple columns.

Displaying Tool Hints

When the Display Tool Tips check box is selected
under the Actions tab of the Options dialog (page
14-28), you see a tips box when you move the mouse
pointer onto a tool icon in the tool bar. The picture at 14-29
the left shows the Navigator tool and its tips box.
 Common Procedures 14

Using the Notes or Log File Text

Using the Notes or Log File Text Editor

Editor
A text editor like the one below appears when you
do one of the following:

• Choose Notes from the Edit menu. (This

command is not available in the Results and
Calibration windows.) Any comments specified
in the text editor appear at the bottom of the
annotation portion of analysis reports.

• Open a log file (.GLG extension) generated from

a run. (Modifications made to the log file in the
editor are not saved to the file.)

14-30
Common Procedures 14

Customizing the UniPoint

Customizing the UniPoint Workspace

Workspace
The workspace is the main work area used by
UniPoint. It displays the document windows, or
their icons that are currently open.

When you have multiple document windows, you

can size the windows and arrange them to suit your
needs. Once the workspace is organized, the
software can automatically save the space when you
exit or you can save the arrangement as a workspace
file. When the workspace is saved, UniPoint not
only saves the settings for the workspace but the
name of the file that was open within a document
window. The next time you open the workspace file,
both the document window and the associated file
are displayed.

Any windows that are open when you restore a

workspace have no effect on the workspace being
recalled.

If your workspace has multiple document windows

open, it is important that you know which window
is active. The items in UniPoint’s menu bar change
depending on which type of document window is
active. In other words, a Control Method window
has a different menu bar than an Analysis Method
window or any other type of document window.

14-31
 Common Procedures 14

Arranging Elements in a Workspace

Customizing the UniPoint Workspace

Arranging document windows

You can quickly arrange all open document

windows so that all or part of each one is visible.

1 From the Windows menu, choose Cascade or

Tile Horizontal or Tile Vertical. Cascade staggers
the document windows so you can see each
one’s title bar. Tile Horizontal sizes and stacks
the windows. Tile Vertical sizes and places the
windows side-by-side.

Arranging icons

UniPoint can arrange icons for opened document

windows, or you can position them yourself.

To arrange icons automatically:

1 From the Windows menu, choose Arrange Icons.

UniPoint aligns the icons for any open document
windows along the bottom of its workspace.

To arrange icons manually:

1 Drag each icon to its new location.

14-32
Common Procedures 14

Saving a Workspace

Customizing the UniPoint Workspace

You can have UniPoint store the appearance of the
workspace when the software is exited and recall it
the next time the software is started. You can also
save a workspace in a file so it can be retrieved by
you at any time.

Automatically saving and recalling

workspace

The Save and Restore Workspace feature turns on or

off the ability to recall the last workspace when the
software is started. When the feature is active and
you choose Exit in the File menu, the location of any
open document windows and icons, and their files,
is stored by UniPoint. The next time you start the
software, it displays the windows and icons in the
same location as before. This feature is turned off
when you install the software.

To turn on the Save and Restore Workspace feature:

1 Choose Options from the File menu.

2 When the Options dialog appears, click on the

Actions tab.

3 Choose the Save and Restore Workspace check

box.

4 Choose OK.

Saving workspace file

To save the appearance of the current workspace to

file:

1 From the File menu, choose Save Workspace.

2 When the Workspace Save dialog appears, use

its options to specify a name and storage
location for the file.

3 Choose OK.

14-33
 Common Procedures 14

Opening a Workspace File

Customizing the UniPoint Workspace

To display a previously saved workspace:

1 From the File menu, choose Open.

2 When the Open dialog appears, use its options

to locate and select the file.

3 Choose OK when the desired name appears in

the File Name box.

When you open the workspace file, the document

windows appear in the same place they were
located when the workspace file was saved, and any
associated files are also opened.

Any windows on-screen when you open a

workspace remain open but may be hidden by the
workspace.

14-34
Common Procedures 14

Printing

Printing
Before printing a document:

• Check that the columns in the table pane are

wide enough so that the all of the information
within them can be seen.

• Make sure the items in the graph pane are

arranged and sized the way you want them.

Selecting What to Print and Starting

the Print
To print information from a
document window:

1 Choose the Print command from

the File menu.

2 When the Print dialog appears,

make sure the appropriate
printer is indicated at the top of Example for Control Method and Analysis Method
the dialog. To select a different
printer, choose Setup.

3 Select what you want to print

from the options in the dialog
box. The options available vary
depending on the document
window, as you can see in the
example dialogs on this page.

Where lists appear, press SHIFT Example for data calibrations and reports
then click on the first item.
Scroll then click on the last item
in the list to print all items. Or,
press CTRL then click each item
in the list to print.

Note: Chart speed is

unavailable because it was pre-
defined.

4 Choose OK to start the printing Example for Routines and Protocols

process.

14-35
 Common Procedures 14

Changing layout options

Printing

To review the layout options used to print a

document:

1 Choose Layout from the Print dialog.

2 Use the options in the Page Layout dialog to

specify page margins, size of graph, and order to
print annotation, graph, and table.

Margins. In the text box next to each margin

(left, right, top, and bottom), type the width of
the margin. The indicated width is added to the
default print area set for the page by the printer.
Refer to the document supplied with the printer
if necessary.

Note: The measurement system, mm or inches, is

set using the International program in the
Windows Control Panel. If you change the
measurement system, it is used the next time
you open UniPoint.

Graph Height. Indicate the size of the graph as a

percentage of the page. It is printed on a
different page than the annotation or table if
necessary.

Position Order. The order in which the various

parts shown in the document window are
printed, by default: annotation, graph, then
table.

3 Choose OK to save parameters and return to the

14-36 Print dialog.
Common Procedures 14

Getting Software Version Number

Getting Software Version Number

To view version information for UniPoint:

1 Choose About from the Help menu.

14-37
Fraction Collector Control 15

UniPoint provides for fraction collection by time, volume, or peak with the additional
capability of dividing a peak by time or volume. Collection amount is limited by the
number of tubes and tube size available for the model of fraction collector being used.

You can control any Gilson fraction collector by including its commands in the control
method. Fraction numbers display and print in chromatograms when a fraction collector is
identified in the configuration, named as a device in the control method, and started with a
fraction collector event in the control method.

For each injection made during a run, fractions can be collected into the same set of tubes or
into different sets of tubes on the fraction collector tray.

When viewing data after the run, you can display the fraction collector tray associated with
the data and identify the tube(s) into which a sample’s eluent was collected.

The following pages describe how to set conditions for fraction collector control.

Note: A 3-way (diverter) valve must be installed on fraction collectors controlled by

UniPoint.

15-1
 Fraction Collector Control 15

HPLC Connections
HPLC Connections

Ensure proper tubing, GSIOC, and power

connections. Refer to the UniPoint Installation
Guide and the fraction collector User’s Guide if
necessary. No additional connections, such as
contact or analog connections, are required if using a
Gilson GSIOC fraction collector and detector.

15-2
Fraction Collector Control 15

UniPoint Setup

UniPoint Setup
Configuration
In the Default System Configuration dialog (File/
Default System Configuration), ensure that all
Gilson GSIOC devices are specified. To display the
dialog, close all open document windows to display
the UniPoint application window; the Navigator if it
appears may remain on-screen. Then choose Default
System Configuration from the File menu.

For the fraction collector, choose the Setup button to

select the type of rack locator installed.

15-3
 Fraction Collector Control 15

Control Method
UniPoint Setup

In the control method, do the following.

1 Use the Device menu to set device descriptions

and options. For fraction collector control:

• Check that a description is assigned to the

fraction collector, and create or select the tray
file. You can access the Tray Editor via the
Fraction Collector dialog. When you access
the Tray Editor from UniPoint, two default
zones names are available under the Zones
menu: TUBES and FRACTIONS. You can use
the FRACTIONS zone or set your own zone
name(s) using the Edit menu.

• If collecting peaks, choose the Options

button to access the Fraction Collector
Options dialog. Then, choose the channel to
monitor for fraction collection and set the
mV full-scale value to 10 mV. The mV full-
scale value specified in this dialog box must
be the same as that set for the channel in the
Strip Chart Options dialog, described below.
You can also use the Fraction Collector
Options dialog to indicate a delay volume.
UniPoint’s on-line help provides information
on how to calculate delay volume based on
the length and diameter of tubing.

• If collecting peaks, choose the Options

button to access the Strip Chart Options
dialog. In that dialog, choose the channel to
monitor for fraction collection and set its
maximum full-scale value to 10 mV. The mV
full-scale value specified in this dialog box
must be the same as that set for the channel
in the Fraction Collector Options dialog,
described above.

2 Use the Event menu to specify the timed

instructions to send to the fraction collector and
other HPLC devices. Use the Fraction Collector
Event dialog to view, select, and set fraction
collector commands.

15-4
Fraction Collector Control 15

Refer to the following examples for fraction collector

UniPoint Setup
control when creating your control method. Fraction
collector events are in bold.

In the examples, variable names are used instead of

values for some command parameters, and are
shown in uppercase letters. Where you set a value
for a variable depends on whether the parameter is
the same for each injection or whether it changes. If
the parameter stays the same for all injections (for
example, TIME_PER_TUBE), you should set a value
for the parameter in the control method. If the
parameter may change for each injection (for
example, FRACTION_SITE), leave the parameter as
a variable in the control method and set a value for
the variable in the operations list.

Example 1 - Time or volume collection

The fraction collector events, in the control method

listing below, collect by time.

If you want to collect by volume, set the following

command at 0.05 min.

Time Device(s) Command

0.05 Fraction Collector Set Volume per Tube
VOL_PER_FRACTION

15-5
 Fraction Collector Control 15

Example 2 - Peak collection with peaks

UniPoint Setup

subdivided by time

The following control method listing contains

fraction collector events for peak collection by slope
plus non-peak collection. It also further divides
fraction collection by time.

15-6
Fraction Collector Control 15

Example 3 - Volume collection with

UniPoint Setup
collection windows

The following control method listing includes

fraction collector events for volume collection with a
different volume per tube collected for each
collection window. In the example, the volume is set
to 0.1 ml, changed to 0.5 ml, and returned to 0.1 ml.
Be aware that you must set the volume per tube for
each collection window even if the volume does not
change from the volume set for the previous
window. The Advance command is used after
changing the volume per tube to ensure that the
collector leaves an empty tube between each
collection window.

15-7
 Fraction Collector Control 15

Example 4 - Peak collection by level using

UniPoint Setup

protocol file

The commands to control the fraction collector,

except start and stop collection, can be specified in a
generic protocol file. The protocol file can then be
identified in the control method using the Fraction
Collector selection in the Device menu and started
as a timed event using the Fraction Collector
selection in the Event menu.

Following is an example protocol file that collects

peaks by level.

Following is an example control method that

executes the protocol file, listed above, at 0.03 min.

15-8
Fraction Collector Control 15

Tray File

UniPoint Setup
The Tray Editor is opened via the Fraction Collector
dialog (Device/Fraction Collector) in the control
method. Using the Tray Editor’s options, set up a
tray file that assigns a zone name and numbers the
tubes into which fractions are collected.

When you access the Tray Editor from UniPoint,

two default zones names are available under the
Zones menu: TUBES and FRACTIONS. You can use
the FRACTIONS zone or set your own zone name(s)
using the Edit menu. See Section 12 or the Tray
Editor’s on-line help for details on creating a tray
file.

When setting the operations list for a run, you

browse to the tray file and select the location at
which the first fraction for each injection is collected.
See Operations List, on page 15-12, for more
information.

15-9
 Fraction Collector Control 15

Analysis Method
UniPoint Setup

In the analysis method, set analysis and reporting

conditions for the analysis channel. See Section 4 for
details.

Indicate channel information in the Data Channel

Scales dialog (Analysis/Channel Scales) by
browsing the channel information from the control
method into the analysis method.

If unknown peaks are to be collected, the Unnamed

Peaks box must be checked in the Report Type
dialog (Report/Type).

To identify the tube location(s) from which a sample

originated, add a Sample Location column to the
report generated during a run.

1 Click on Report-Column Formats. Click on

Unknown in the Report Type box.

2 To add the Sample Location column:

a) In the Column Contents list box, click on the
column before which you want the new
column to be placed.
b) Choose Sample Location in the Contents list
box.
c) Choose Insert.
d) Choose Done to exit the dialog.

3 To rearrange the columns, click to select an item

in the Column Contents list box then use the
move up or move down arrow to change the
order of the columns.

4 Repeat the above to add the column to the

calibrator, unknown summary, and calibrator
summary report layouts.

15-10
Fraction Collector Control 15

To identify the tube location(s) into which a

UniPoint Setup
sample’s eluent was collected, add a Fraction Site(s)
column to the report generated during a run.

1 Click on Report-Column Formats. Click on

Unknown in the Report Type box.

2 To add the Fraction Site(s) column:

a) In the Column Contents list box, click on
the column before which you want the
new column to be placed.
b) Choose Fraction Site(s) in the Contents
list box.
c) Choose Insert.
d) Choose Done to exit the dialog.

3 To rearrange the columns, click to select an item

in the Column Contents list box then use the
move up or move down arrow to change the
order of the columns.

4 Repeat the above to add the column to the

calibrator, unknown summary, and calibrator
summary report layouts.

15-11
 Fraction Collector Control 15

Operations List
UniPoint Setup

In the operations list, set up steps for the number of

injections using the Step Entry dialog or Express
Entry dialog accessed via the List Entry menu.
When you choose the control method, the variable
names for parameters that were not set in the
method appear as text boxes in the Step Entry or
Express Entry dialog and columns in the table pane.
In the examples on the next page, these variables are
TUBE, the tube in which the sample is located, and
FRACTION_SITE, the first tube into which eluent is
collected for the sample.

UniPoint can perform either sequential collection or

specific site collection, depending on what you
indicate for the FRACTION_SITE variable.

• Indicating the zone name followed by a colon

(for example, FRACTIONS:) specifies sequential
collection. With sequential collection, UniPoint
keeps track of the tubes being used for each
injection. For the first sample, collection starts in
the first tube of the zone specified in the
operations step. For the second and each
subsequent injection collected into the zone,
collection will begin in the next available
numbered tube.

• Indicating both the zone and tube (for example,

FRACTIONS:1) specifies specific site collection;
collection starts at the specified tube. With
specific site collection, you keep track of the
tubes being used for each injection.

You may use both sequential collection and specific

site collection within the same operations list.

15-12
Fraction Collector Control 15

To select the fraction collector tube for an operations

UniPoint Setup
step:

1 Place the cursor in the TUBE or FRACTION_SITE

text box in the Step Entry or Express Entry dialog
and click on Browse. (Or, place the cursor in the
text box and double-click.)

2 When the Browse Tray window appears, click

within the appropriate zone, on the tray image,
so its tubes become light blue. Then click on the
desired tube so it becomes red.

3 Click on OK to exit the Browse Tray window.

4 When the dialog re-appears, the selected zone

and tube appear in the text box. If you are doing
sequential collection, delete the tube number
indicated in the FRACTION_SITE text box.
Leave the zone name and the colon (:).

15-13
 Fraction Collector Control 15

Example 1 - Specific site collection:

UniPoint Setup

collection of each sample’s eluent into same

set of tubes (one zone)

If the fractions for each injection are collected into

the same set of tubes, ensure that the zone:tube for
the FRACTION_SITE variable is the same for each
sample, for example, FRACTIONS:1.

Description Control Method Analysis Method TUBE FRACTION_SITE

Injection 1 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:1 FRACTIONS:1
Injection 2 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:2 FRACTIONS:1
Injection 3 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:3 FRACTIONS:1
Injection 4 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:4 FRACTIONS:1
Injection 5 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:5 FRACTIONS:1

Example 2 - Sequential collection: collection

of each sample’s eluent into its own set of
tubes (one zone)

If the fractions for each injection are collected into a

different set of tubes, indicate the zone name,
followed by a colon, into which collection begins in
each step. Refer to the FRACTION_SITE column.

Description Control Method Analysis Method TUBE FRACTION_SITE

Injection 1 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:1 FRACTIONS:
Injection 2 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:2 FRACTIONS:
Injection 3 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:3 FRACTIONS:
Injection 4 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:4 FRACTIONS:
Injection 5 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN TUBE:5 FRACTIONS:

15-14
Fraction Collector Control 15

Example 3 - Sequential collection: collection

UniPoint Setup
of each sample’s eluent into its own set of
tubes (multiple zones)

If the fractions for each injection are collected into a

different set of tubes, indicate the zone name,
followed by a colon, into which collection begins in
each step. The following example uses two zones.
Fractions from standard injections are collected into
one zone (STD_FRACTIONS), and fractions from
unknown injections are collected into another zone
(UNK_FRACTIONS).

Description Control Method Analysis Method TUBE FRACTION_SITE

Injection 1 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN STD_TUBE:1 STD_FRACTIONS:
Injection 2 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN STD_TUBE:2 STD_FRACTIONS:
Injection 3 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN STD_TUBE:3 STD_FRACTIONS:
Injection 4 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN UNK_TUBE:1 UNK_FRACTIONS:
Injection 5 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN UNK_TUBE:2 UNK_FRACTIONS:
Injection 6 C:\FC\CONTROL.GCT C:\FC\ANALYSIS.GAN UNK_TUBE:3 UNK_FRACTIONS:

15-15
 Fraction Collector Control 15

Output
UniPoint Setup

UniPoint labels each fraction on the run-time

chromatogram of the Operations window and the
chromatogram displayed in the Results window.

Note: If you use the compare feature when opening

a data file in the Results window, event marks and
fraction labels are not shown.

On-screen, UniPoint displays a green triangle and

vertical line at the start of collection for a fraction
and a red triangle and vertical line at the end of
collection. The software labels the fraction with the
zone name and tube number from the fraction
collector tray file. Use the zoom function to read
fraction numbers when labels are close together. To
remove fraction labels, choose Attributes from the
Graph menu and then remove the X from the
Display Events box.

15-16
Fraction Collector Control 15

The fraction collector tray along with the

UniPoint Setup
chromatogram and list of samples can be viewed in
the Results window using the commands in the
View menu. The Display All command in the View
menu automatically sizes and shows the Results
window, Samples dialog, fraction collector tray, and
injector tray (if available). The Results window,
below, shows all of the components that may appear
when Display All is selected.

To view information for a different sample, double-

click on its description in the Samples dialog. You
can also double-click on a tube in the injector tray or
fraction collector tray and view information for the
corresponding sample or fraction. A message
appears if there is not a sample associated with a
selected tube location. Additional viewing
techniques for the Results window are provided in
the UniPoint User’s Guide and on-line help.

To enlarge or reduce the size of the injector tray or

fraction collector tray, click on the tray using the
right mouse button. You see a Scale menu for
selecting between the following sizing options:
Auto, 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 16:1. 15-17
 Fraction Collector Control 15

If you added the Sample Location and Fraction

UniPoint Setup

Site(s) columns to the report format, the columns

appear in the table pane of the Results window
when you link the data file to an analysis method
or when you open the report file.

15-18
Electronic Record Management
(ERM) Features 16

The implementation of an electronic record management system can be complex. UniPoint

can assist chromatographers in attaining 21 CFR Part 11 compliance through the
implementation of Electronic Record Management (ERM). The ERM features allow
electronic records security and tracking (audit trails), electronic signatures, and method
versioning of records, as well as permitting customized user access levels within the
software. This section describes how to set up and use these features.

For information about activating the ERM features, see System Administration on page 16-6.

16-1
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

UniPoint Log On
UniPoint Log On

UniPoint uses the security features provided by the

Windows operating system. UniPoint can also use
any network security features if the workstation is
part of a network. UniPoint identifies a user by his/
her Windows user name and password (which are
case sensitive). If logging on to UniPoint using a
network user name and password, the domain name
(which is also case-sensitive) must be included. Only
one user can be logged on to UniPoint at any time.

If an incorrect user name and password combination

is typed, UniPoint may become locked and an
administrator will have to log on to unlock
UniPoint. The administrator sets the number of
times a failed log on can be retried before an
administrator must log on.

Log Off (not present for first log on)

Click this button to log off the current user. Another
user will be required to log on before any menus or
the navigator can be accessed.

Emergency Stop (not present for first

log on)
Click this button to stop an Operations List before it
completes. UniPoint will give you the opportunity
to cancel the stop request, and then will complete
the current step before stopping the Operations List.

16-2
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Choose Group and Level

UniPoint Log On
If this dialog displays when logging on, then the
user that is logging on is assigned to more than one
group or level. You must click on a profile then click
OK. If no descriptions appear for the levels, the
administrator can add them on the Group Selection
tab.

System Lock
Select this option from the File menu to log off the
current user temporarily. UniPoint will require that
the last user or an administrator log on before any
menus or the Navigator can be accessed.

16-3
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Legacy File Conversion from

Legacy File Conversion from Version 3.0–3.3

Version 3.0–3.3
UniPoint™ LC System Software Version 5.1 enables
backward compatibility with files created in
UniPoint version 3.0 or later.

File Conversion Instructions

The following instructions describe the
recommended way of converting files for use in
UniPoint™ LC System Software Version 5.1:

1 Open the file using the Navigator or File—Open.

2 Save the file using File—Save. Comments and an

e-signature may be required (if ERM is enabled).

3 Close the file.

16-4
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Files to be converted

Legacy File Conversion from Version 3.0–3.3

To convert files for use in UniPoint™ LC System
Software Version 5.1, files should be converted in
the order in which they are generally created. Refer
to the following list for the order in which files
should be converted.

1 Configuration (.CFG)

2 Routine (.GIR, .GGR)

3 Protocol (.GIP, .GGP)

4 Control Method (.GCT)

5 Analysis Method (.GAN)

6 Operations List (.GOP)

7 Re-Analysis (.GAR)

8 Spectral Library (.GSL)

9 Calibration (GB?)

Files not to be converted

The following files do not need to be converted:

• Channel Data (.GDT)

• Report (.GR?)

• Log (.GLG)

• Tray (.GTY)

16-5
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

System Administration
System Administration

On this tab, accessed from the File menu by a user

assigned the Administrate function, choose whether
or not to enable electronic record management
(ERM) features. Disable is the default selection.
When Enable is selected, the other options on the
tab become active (described below). You can
choose to view and modify the options through a
Wizard (default) or by selecting tabs. To use tabs
instead of the Wizard, clear the check box next to
Wizard.

Click View to see the current settings for UniPoint

Group Selection, Group Definition, Group
Permissions, Password Workflow, and Electronic
Record Workflow. If this is the first time System
Administration has been accessed, the default
settings are displayed.

Click Modify to view and change settings for

UniPoint Group Selection, Group Definition, Group
Permissions, Password Workflow, and Electronic
Record Workflow. If Wizard is checked (as it is by
default), the wizard will begin when you click this
button. If you uncheck the Wizard, tabs will be
displayed for adjusting the settings.

16-6
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Click Clear to remove all UniPoint Groups.

System Administration
Click Reset to Default to change the settings for
UniPoint Group Selection, Group Definition, Group
Permissions, Password Workflow, and Electronic
Record Workflow back to the factory default
settings.

The UniPoint File Protection feature defaults to

disabled and is only available if you’ve chosen to
disable the ERM features. Select Enable to activate
the Set Password button. Click Set Password to use
the password feature as described in Appendix G,
UniPoint File Protection.

Note: This screen will ALWAYS require you to

version the permissions file when ANY change has
been made; this includes selecting or clearing the
Wizard option. You must also click OK on the
System Administration dialog to make the changes
take effect (even though the permissions file has
been versioned).

16-7
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Modify ERM Settings

System Administration

UniPoint Group Selection

On this tab, accessed from the System Administration

dialog, an administrator creates UniPoint groups.

UniPoint reads and displays all the Local

Workstation Groups and their descriptions. These
groups can include domain users. UniPoint also
displays the members (Group Members) of each
group. To make a local workstation group into a
UniPoint group, select the group name under Local
Workstation Groups then click Add -> to make it a
UniPoint group. UniPoint groups can also be
removed by selecting the group name under
UniPoint Groups then clicking Remove <-. UniPoint
Group Members are displayed below the UniPoint
Groups.

Note: For UniPoint to understand the groups you’ve

created, you must have added only users to groups,
not groups to groups, in the operating system.

16-8
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Group Definition

System Administration
On this tab, accessed from the System Administration
dialog, the administrator has the ability to sub-divide
groups into levels. Each group can be divided into
nine levels. Each level is assigned one or multiple
functions. The default function for Administrators
(Level 1) is Administrate. The default function for all
other groups and levels is None.

Assign group members to levels. All group

members always default to Level 1. Then, assign
function(s) to each level.

Note: At least one user must be assigned the

Administrate function, as that function allows access
to the System Administration dialogs.

16-9
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

To assign more than one level to a group, type the

System Administration

number of levels desired (up to 9) next to Number of

Levels.

To add members to levels, select the member under

UniPoint Group Members, and then click Add ->. To
remove members from levels, click <- Remove.

To include a description of the level, place your

cursor in the Description box, then type.
To assign functions, select the group (by clicking on
it), then select the level (by scrolling to it, then
selecting it), and then select the check box next to
the function(s) to assign.

The graphics on the next two pages depict basic

UniPoint workflows. Each box represents a required
step or operation in the workflow. These steps are
grouped together based on the UniPoint process
flow. The user groups listed above the line have
permission to perform the particular step or
operation.

The graphic on the following page depicts what the

workflow would be if all the default options are
chosen during the ERM configuration.

16-10
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

System Administration

16-11
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

The graphic below depicts what an ERM workflow

System Administration

in UniPoint could look like.

16-12
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Refer to the table below and on the next page for the

System Administration
default permissions for each function:

16-13
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16
System Administration

16-14
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Group Permissions

System Administration
On this tab, accessed from the System Administration
dialog, the administrator has the ability to assign
permissions to each level created on the Group
Definition tab. Permissions are first based off the
function assigned to each level. However, permissions
can be modified on this tab. Permissions are granted or
denied for each file type in UniPoint.

To assign permissions to a level:

1 Select the UniPoint Group and the Level for

which you wish to modify permissions.

2 Select or clear the check box next to each

permission you wish to change for each file type.

16-15
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Refer to the table below and on the next page for a

System Administration

description of each permission:

16-16
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

System Administration
Note: Settings on the Electronic Record Workflow
tab override any permissions granted.

Refer to the table below and on the next page for

details about record types:

16-17
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16
System Administration

16-18
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Password Workflow

System Administration
On this tab, accessed from the System Administration
dialog, the administrator has the ability to set
password, timeout, and lockout options globally for
all UniPoint groups, levels, and users.

UniPoint System Password

If UniPoint System Password is Enabled, users are

required to type a log on name AND password. If
UniPoint System Password is Disabled, users are
only required to type a log on name. UniPoint
System Password does not affect the requirement for
a password with an electronic signature.

UniPoint System Non-Active Timeout

If the UniPoint System Non-Active Timeout is

Enabled, the current user will be logged off the
system if there are no mouse clicks or key presses for
the length of time specified for Timeout (Minutes).
The default is five minutes. Only whole numbers are
recognized. If UniPoint System Non-Active Timeout
is Disabled, the system will not time out.
16-19
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Remember Prior Log On Name

System Administration

If the Remember Prior Log On Name is Enabled,

UniPoint will automatically display the log on name
of the last logged on user. If the user is attaching an
electronic signature to a record, UniPoint will
display the log on name of the currently logged on
user. If Remember Prior Log On Name is Disabled,
the user must always type both the log on name and
log on password (if required).

UniPoint System Lockout

If the UniPoint System Lockout is Enabled, the

current user can manually lockout the system. All
open, unsaved records will remain open. (Records
aren’t required to be saved and closed as they would
be if the user logged off.) Only that user or an
administrator can log on after a lockout. If UniPoint
System Lockout is Disabled, the System Lock menu
option is grayed out.

User System Lockout After Log On Failure

This option is not applicable if the UniPoint System

Password option is Disabled.

If the User System Lockout After Log On Failure is

Enabled, a user who tries to log on with the
incorrect password more times than the Number of
Failures will be locked out of the system until an
administrator logs on and then the user logs on
successfully. The default is three failures. If User
System Lockout After Log On Failure is Disabled,
the system will not lock a user out for unsuccessful
log on tries.

User System Lockout After Log On Failure is

automatically Disabled if Total System Lockout
After Log On Failure is Enabled.

16-20
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Total System Lockout After Log On Failure

System Administration
If the Total System Lockout After Log On Failure is
Enabled, any user who tries to log on unsuccessfully
more times than the Number of Failures will lock
the system for all users until an administrator logs
on. The default is three failures. If Total System
Lockout After Log On Failure is Disabled, the
system will not lock all users out for one user’s
unsuccessful log on tries.

Total System Lockout After Log On Failure is

automatically Disabled if User System Lockout After
Log On Failure is Enabled.

16-21
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Electronic Record Workflow

System Administration

On this tab, accessed from the System

Administration dialog, the administrator has the
ability to assign requirements for electronic
signatures, comments, file extraction, etc. globally
for all UniPoint groups, levels, and users. The
administrator assigns these requirements for each
record type. Select the record type then the desired
option(s) from the categories described below.

Active Electronic Record Management States*

Select one or multiple states (Version/Save, Submit,

Review, Approve, Lock) to be active in the ERM
menu for users who have been assigned the
corresponding function. Or, select None or All. The
default selection is All.

*Not applicable for Audit records.

16-22
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Electronic Record Versions

System Administration
Major Increment Only

This selection tracks the version of the UniPoint

record in the same manner whether the Version or
Save command is used. The version is incremented
in whole numbers for each Save and for each
Version from the ERM menu. The first Save or using
Save As will version the record to 1.0.

First Save (1.0) —Save Î(2.0) —Version Î (3.0) —

Save Î(4.0) —Save Î(5.0)

Major & Minor Increment

This selection tracks the version of the UniPoint

record differently depending on whether the
Version or the Save command is used. The number
on the right side of the decimal point increments by
one when the record is Saved. The number on the
left side of the decimal point increments by one (also
resetting the number on the right side of the decimal
point to zero) when the record is Versioned from the
ERM menu. The first Save or using Save As will
version the record to 0.1.

First Save (0.1)—Save Î (0.2)—Version Î (1.0)—

Save Î(1.1)—Save Î(1.2)

Note: For Major & Minor Increment, the numbers

before and after the decimal are treated
independently and as whole numbers. Version 1.9
becomes version 1.10 if saved. Version 1.19 becomes
version 1.20 if saved.

The default selection is Major Increment Only.

Numbers can go as high as 2147483647.0 (major) or
2147483647. 2147483647 (major and minor).

16-23
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Electronic Signature Should Occur (When)

System Administration

Select one or multiple states (Version/Save, Submit,

Review, Approve, Lock, Unlock, Reject) in the ERM
menu that will require an electronic signature when
a record changes to that state. Or, select Optional or
Always. The default selection is Always.

Comments Should Occur (When)

Select one or multiple states (Version/Save, Submit,

Review, Approve, Lock, Unlock, Reject) in the ERM
menu that will require comments to be typed when
a record changes to that state. Or, select Optional or
Always. The default selection is Always.

Electronic Record Use May Occur (After)*

Select a state (Anytime, Versioned/Saved,

Submitted, Reviewed, Approved, Locked, Signed) at
which a file may be used. The default selection is
Anytime.

Note: If a data or report record is required to be

submitted and/or reviewed and/or approved
before use but it is rejected, a re-analysis cannot be
run.

*Not applicable for Audit records.

16-24
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Electronic Record Lock Should Occur

System Administration
Automatically (When)*

Select a state (Never, Always, Versioned, Submitted,

Reviewed, Approved, Signed) at which a record will
automatically lock. UniPoint will only lock records
for active states, so you must ensure that Lock is
active. The default selection is Never.

*Not applicable for Audit records.

Electronic Record Extract May Occur (After)*

Select a state (Never, Always, Versioned/Saved,

Submitted, Reviewed, Approved, Locked, Signed) at
which a file may be reverted or extracted from
another file. The default selection is Anytime.

*Not applicable for Audit records.

16-25
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

View ERM Settings

System Administration

Group Selection - View

On this tab, an administrator can view both Local

Workstation Groups and Group Members; and
UniPoint Groups and Group Members.

For more information, refer to UniPoint Group

Selection on page 16-8.

16-26
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Group Definition - View

System Administration
On this tab, the administrator has the ability to view
groups and levels and the function(s) assigned to
each member. Click the UniPoint Group to select it,
and then click the spin bar to scroll through the
levels. Remember that you must scroll to, and then
click the level number to view its group members.

For more information, refer to Group Definition on

page 16-9.

16-27
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Group Permissions - View

System Administration

On this tab, the administrator has the ability to view

the permissions assigned to each level for each file
type in UniPoint.

To view permissions for a level, select the UniPoint

Group and the Level for which you wish to view
permissions.

For more information, refer to Group Permissions

on page 16-15.

16-28
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Password Workflow - View

System Administration
On this tab, the administrator has the ability to view
password, timeout, and lockout options.

For more information, refer to Password Workflow

on page 16-19.

16-29
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Electronic Record Workflow - View

System Administration

On this tab, the administrator has the ability to view

requirements for electronic signatures, comments, file
extraction, etc. for each record type. Select the record
type then view the option(s) for each category.

For more information, refer to Electronic Record

Workflow on page 16-22.

16-30
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Electronic Record Information

Electronic Record Information

The Electronic Record Information dialog provides
information about the open record. The following
information is available:

• Record Currently Stored as (path to the record)

• Current Version/Date

• Current State (Version/Save, Submit, Review,

Approve, Reject)/Date/Comments/E-Signature

• Current Lock State/Date/Comments

• Last Editor (displays the user name, group

description, and level description)

• Current User (also displays the current user’s

permissions—indicated with an asterisk—set on
the Group Permissions tab)

16-31
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

• Current User ERM (ERM menu options available

Electronic Record Information

to the logged in user for the open record—

indicated with an asterisk—set on the Group
Definition tab)

• Required States (for the record—indicated with

an asterisk—set on the Electronic Record
Workflow tab)

• Required Use State (set on the Electronic Record

Workflow tab)

• Extract After State (set on the Electronic Record

Workflow tab)

• Gilson Application Versions (when the record

was created or modified)

All users with a Read-Only or Create permission can

view this information.

16-32
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Electronic Record Management

Electronic Record Management Menu

Menu
The Electronic Record Management menu is
accessed from the File menu. The following pages
describe each of the menu selections. Note that all
selections may not be available for all users at all
times.

Version
You can version a file by choosing the Version
command from the Electronic Record Management
menu if you have the Create permission for the file
that you are versioning. Versioning the file updates
the record information and increments the version
of the record by a Major or Major & Minor
Increment (set on the Electronic Record Workflow
tab).

This dialog box enables the user to view version

information, add comments for the next version, and
electronically sign the record.

16-33
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

To view comments for the current and previous

Electronic Record Management Menu

versions, click on the spin bar to scroll through the

versions, and then click to select the version.
Comments are displayed after Author, Date, and E-
Sig under the version.

To type comments for the next version, place your

cursor in the box below Next version comments:,
and then type.

To sign the record, type your user name and

password.

Click OK to append the comments and electronic

signature to the record, or click Cancel to close the
dialog without appending to the record.

16-34
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Submit

Electronic Record Management Menu

You can submit a record by choosing the Submit
command from the Electronic Record Management
Menu if:

• Submit is an Active Electronic Record

Management State (set on the Electronic Record
Workflow tab under System Administration) for
the type of record you’re submitting

• you have been assigned the Submit function

Submitting the file grays out the Submit command

for the record and activates the Review command (if
Review is an active state) for those who have been
assigned the Review function.

This dialog box enables the user to view version

information, add comments for the next version, and
electronically sign the record.

To view comments for the current and previously

submitted versions, click on the spin bar to scroll
through the versions. Comments are displayed after
Author, Date, and E-Sig under the version.

16-35
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

To type comments for the next version, place your

Electronic Record Management Menu

cursor in the box below Submittal comments:, and

then type.

To sign the record, type your user Name and

Password.

Click OK to append the comments and electronic

signature to the record, or click Cancel to close the
dialog without appending to the record.

16-36
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Review

Electronic Record Management Menu

You can review a record by choosing the Review
command from the Electronic Record Management
Menu if:

• Review is an Active Electronic Record

Management State (set on the Electronic Record
Workflow tab under System Administration) for
the type of record you’re reviewing

• you have been assigned the Review function

Reviewing the file grays out the Review command

for the record and activates the Approve command
(if Approve is an active state) for those who have
been assigned the Approve function.

This dialog box enables the user to view version

information, add comments for the next version, and
electronically sign the record.

To view comments for the current and previously

reviewed versions, click on the spin bar to scroll
through the versions. Comments are displayed after
Author, Date, and E-Sig under the version.

16-37
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

To type comments for the next version, place your

Electronic Record Management Menu

cursor in the box below Review comments:, and

then type.

To sign the record, type your user Name and

Password.

Click OK to append the comments and electronic

signature to the record, or click Cancel to close the
dialog without appending to the record.

16-38
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Approve

Electronic Record Management Menu

You can approve a record by choosing the Approve
command from the Electronic Record Management
Menu if:

• Approve is an Active Electronic Record

Management State (set on the Electronic Record
Workflow tab under System Administration) for
the record type that you’re approving

• you have been assigned the Approve function

Approving the file grays out the Approve command.

This dialog box enables the user to view version

information, add comments for the next version, and
electronically sign the record.

To view comments for the current and previously

approved versions, click on the spin bar to scroll
through the versions. Comments are displayed after
Author, Date, and E-Sig under the version.

To type comments for the next version, place your

cursor in the box below Approval comments:, and
then type.
16-39
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

To sign the record, type your user Name and

Electronic Record Management Menu

Password.

Click OK to append the comments and electronic

signature to the record, or click Cancel to close the
dialog without appending to the record.

16-40
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Record Lock

Electronic Record Management Menu

You can lock a record by choosing the Lock
command from the Electronic Record Management
Menu if:

• Lock is an Active Electronic Record Management

State (set on the Electronic Record Workflow tab
under System Administration) for the type of
record you’re locking

• you are a submitter locking a submitted record

• you are a reviewer locking a reviewed record

• you are an approver locking an approved record

Locking the file grays out the Lock command for the
record and activates the Unlock command.

This dialog box enables the user to view version

information, add comments for the next version, and
electronically sign the record.

16-41
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

To view comments for the current and previously

Electronic Record Management Menu

approved versions at each state, click on the top

spin bar to scroll through the versions and click
the bottom spin bar to scroll through the states.
Comments are displayed after Author, Date, and
E-Sig under the version and state.

To type comments for the next version, place your

cursor in the box below Lock comments:, and then
type.

To sign the record, type your user Name and

Password.

Click OK to lock the record and append the

comments and electronic signature to the record, or
click Cancel to close the dialog without locking the
record or appending to the record.

Note: A submitted, reviewed, or approved record

should be unlocked and rejected before any changes
are made because UniPoint won’t allow changes to a
locked record and disables options to unlock or save
the record after changes have been made.

A locked record will automatically unlock when the

state is changed, unless Always (or the appropriate
state) is selected for Electronic Record Lock Should
Occur Automatically (When) on the Electronic
Record Workflow tab.

16-42
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Record Unlock

Electronic Record Management Menu

You can unlock a record by choosing the Unlock
command from the Electronic Record Management
Menu if:

• you are a submitter unlocking a submitted

record

• you are a reviewer unlocking a reviewed record

• you are an approver unlocking an approved

record

Unlocking the file grays out the Unlock command

for the record and activates the Lock command.

This dialog box enables the user to view version

information, add comments for the next version, and
electronically sign the record.

To view comments for the current and previously

approved versions at each state, click on the top spin
bar to scroll through the versions and click the bottom
spin bar to scroll through the states. Comments are
displayed after Author, Date, and E-Sig under the
version and state.
16-43
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

To type comments for the next version, place your

Electronic Record Management Menu

cursor in the box below Unlock comments:, and

then type.

To sign the record, type your user Name and

Password.

Click OK to unlock and append the comments and

electronic signature to the record, or click Cancel to
close the dialog without unlocking it or appending
to the record.

16-44
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Reject Record

Electronic Record Management Menu

You can reject a record by choosing the Reject
command from the Electronic Record Management
Menu if:

• the record is not locked

• you are a submitter rejecting a submitted record

• you are a reviewer rejecting a submitted or

reviewed record

• you are an approver rejecting a reviewed or

approved record

Rejecting the record voids all previous state changes,

thus requiring it to be modified and then submitted
again (if required).

This dialog box enables the user to view version

information, add comments for the next version, and
electronically sign the record.

16-45
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

To view comments for the current and previously

Electronic Record Management Menu

approved versions at each state, click on the top spin

bar to scroll through the versions and click the
bottom spin bar to scroll through the states.
Comments are displayed after Author, Date, and E-
Sig under the version and state.

To type comments for the next version, place your

cursor in the box below Reject comments:, and then
type.

To sign the record, type your user Name and

Password.

Click OK to reject and append the comments and

electronic signature to the record, or click Cancel to
close the dialog without rejecting or appending to
the record.

16-46
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Audit

Electronic Record Management Menu

You view the audit trail for a record by choosing the
Audit command from the Electronic Record
Management Menu if you have been assigned the
Audit function.

This dialog box enables the user to view state

(Versioned/Saved, Submitted, Reviewed, Approved,
Rejected, Locked), operator, date of state change,
comments, e-signature, and date of e-signature for
each version.

To view the information for the current or previous

versions, click on the spin bar to scroll through then
select the version.

Click Done to exit the dialog.

16-47
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Changes to Existing Dialogs

Changes to Existing Dialogs

Open Dialog

E-Record Info

This button is available to you if you have the

Extract or Test permission for the file type that you
are trying to open and if the record is in the correct
state (Electronic Record Extract May Occur After
option on the Electronic Record Workflow tab). It
enables the user to view version information and
view comments for each version and state. To view
comments for the current and previously approved
versions at each state, click on the top spin bar to
scroll through the versions and click the bottom spin
bar to scroll through the states. Comments are
displayed after Author, Date, and E-Sig under the
version and state.

You can also revert to previous versions of the file.

To do this, use the spin bar to scroll to the version
you want to open. Then, check the box next to
Revert from x.x to x.x. Then click OK.

16-48
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Additional options when .GDT file is selected

Changes to Existing Dialogs

Sample
Lists sample information for the selected file.
When opening a .GDT file for electronic record
management (ERM), all samples must be
selected if the record is to be submitted,
reviewed, approved, locked, or rejected. By
default, all samples are selected.

Channel
Lists channel information for the selected file.
When opening a .GDT file for electronic record
management (ERM), all channels must be
selected if the record is to be submitted,
reviewed, approved, locked, or rejected. By
default, all channels are selected.

16-49
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Default System Configuration Dialog

Changes to Existing Dialogs

E-Record Info

This button is available to you if you have the

Extract or Test permission for Configuration records
and if the record is in the correct state (Electronic
Record Extract May Occur After option on the
Electronic Record Workflow tab). It enables the user
to view version information and view comments for
each version and state. To view comments for the
current and previously approved versions at each
state, click on the top spin bar to scroll through the
versions and click the bottom spin bar to scroll
through the states. Comments are displayed after
Author, Date, and E-Sig under the version and state.

You can also revert to previous versions of the file.

To do this, use the spin bar to scroll to the version
you want to open. Then, check the box next to
Revert from x.x to x.x. Then click Revert.

16-50
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Right-Click Menu

Changes to Existing Dialogs

The following options appear active when you right-
click within the dialog box if you have been
assigned the appropriate function or permission.

Version
Updates the record via a major or major and
minor increment.

Submit
Enables the record to be reviewed (if required).

Review
Enables the record to be approved (if required).

Approve
Enables the record to be used (if required).

Lock
Prevents the record from being edited until it is
unlocked.

Unlock
Enables the record to be edited after being
locked.

Reject
Prevents the record from advancing to the next
state and requires it to be re-submitted (if
required).

16-51
 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features 16

Audit
Changes to Existing Dialogs

Enables the user to view state, operator, date of

state change, comments, e-signature, and date of
e-signature for each version. To view the
information for the current or previous versions,
click on the spin bar to scroll through then select
the version.

E-Record Info
Provides information about the open record to
users with the Read-Only or Create permission.
The following information is available: Record
Currently Stored as (path to the record), Current
Version/Date, Current State/Date/Comments,
Current Lock State/Date/Comments, Last
Editor (displays the user name, group
description, and level description), Current User
(also displays the current user’s permissions—
indicated with an asterisk), Required States (for
the record—indicated with an asterisk),
Required Use State, Extract After State

16-52
Sample Tracking A

Sample tracking enables you to see the injector tray location from which a sample came
and/or the fraction collector location(s) into which its eluent was collected. The tray
information along with the chromatogram and sample list can be viewed in the Results
window.

Following are details on pre-run option setup and post-run viewing for sample tracking.
You must have a Gilson GSIOC-compatible injector and/or fraction collector to use the
sample tracking capability.

A-1
 Appendix A

Before the Run

Sample Tracking

Injector Protocol/Routines File

Before the run, tell UniPoint which tube position to
associate with the injected sample. You do this by
selecting the Track Sample check box for the Move
to Sample Location command, accessed via the
Event menu’s Injector command.

Note: If the Track Sample check box is selected more

than once for a sample, UniPoint uses the last tube
position marked for sample tracking.

If using a Gilson-supplied injection protocol, modify

the sample location routine in the routines file as
described below. This change will automatically be
used by each protocol that uses the routines file:

1 Open the routines file, INJ_ROUT.GIR. At

UniPoint installation, this file is placed in
C:\GILSON\UNIPOINT\INJ_RP.

2 Choose Routines from the View menu and select

the sample location routine from the list box.
Then choose View.

A-2
Appendix A

3 In the table pane, double-click on the step for the

Sample Tracking
Move Arm to Sample Location command.

4 When the Injector Event dialog appears, choose

the Track Sample check box and choose Change.
Then choose Done to exit the dialog.

5 In the table pane, notice that <Tracked> now

appears in the step for the Move to Sample
Location command.

6 Save the change to the routines file by choosing

Save from the File menu.

If using your own protocol, decide which tube

location to associate with the sample. If the protocol
does sample preparation steps, you can choose the
initial location for the sample before any mixing or
dilution steps or choose the location from which the
prepared sample was aspirated for injection.

A-3
 Appendix A

Control Method
Sample Tracking

In the control method, do the following.

1 Use the Device menu to set device descriptions

and options for the injector, fraction collector,
pumps, data channels, and other devices.

For the injector, check that a description is

assigned to the injector and its dilutor or syringe
pump, and create or select the protocol file and
tray file. You can access the Tray Editor via the
Injector dialog.

For the fraction collector:

• Check that a description is assigned to the

fraction collector, and create or select the tray
file. You can access the Tray Editor via the
Fraction Collector dialog.

• If collecting peaks, choose the Options

button to access the Fraction Collector
Options dialog. Then, choose the channel to
monitor for fraction collection and set the
mV full-scale value to 10 mV. The mV full-
scale value specified in this dialog box must
be the same as that set for the channel in the
Strip Chart Options dialog, described below.
You can also use the Fraction Collector
Options dialog to indicate a delay volume.
UniPoint’s on-line help provides information
on how to calculate delay volume based on
the length and diameter of tubing.

• If collecting peaks, choose the Options

button to access the Strip Chart Options
dialog. In that dialog, choose the channel to
monitor for fraction collection and set its
maximum full-scale value to 10 mV. The mV
full-scale value specified in this dialog box
must be the same as that set for the channel
in the Fraction Collector Options dialog,
described above.

A-4
Appendix A

2 Use the Event menu to specify the timed

Sample Tracking
instructions to send to the injector, fraction
collector, pump, and other devices, and to start
and stop data channel collection.

For fraction collection, you can set events to

collect by time, volume, or peak.

Refer to the following examples for injector and

fraction collector control when creating your control
method. The injector is controlled via a Gilson-
supplied injection protocol.

Variable names are in all capital letters (for example,

TUBE).

Example 1. The following example uses the partial

loop fill protocol to control the injector. The fraction
collector events collect by time.

Time Device(s) Command

0.00 0.1% acetic acid / acetonitrile 0.30(ml/min): 86.50% 0.1% acetic acid,
13.50% acetonitrile
0.02 injection = partial loop fill <start> TUBE, INJECT_VOLUME
0.03 Fraction Collector Lock/Unlock Front Panel Lock
0.05 Fraction Collector Set Time per Tube
TIME_PER_FRACTION
0.10 Fraction Collector Set Fraction Site FRACTION_SITE
0.19 UV/VIS Detector Autozero Channels
0.20 System Controller Synchronize
0.21 Data Channels Start
2.50 Fraction Collector Start Collection
6.00 Fraction Collector Stop Collection
7.00 Data Channels Stop

If you want to collect by volume, set the following

command at 0.05 min.

Time Device(s) Command

0.05 Fraction Collector Set Volume per Tube
VOL_PER_FRACTION

A-5
 Appendix A

Example 2. The following control method listing

Sample Tracking

contains fraction collector events for peak collection

by slope. It controls the injector using the center
loop fill protocol.

Time Device(s) Command

0.00 0.1% acetic acid / acetonitrile 0.30(ml/min): 86.50% 0.1% acetic acid,
13.50% acetonitrile
0.02 injection = center loop fill <start> TUBE, INJECT_VOLUME, 4
0.03 Fraction Collector Lock/Unlock Front Panel Lock
0.05 Fraction Collector Collect Positive Peaks Yes
0.11 Fraction Collector Set Peak Width & Peak Sensitivity
PEAK_WIDTH, PEAK_SENSITIVITY
0.15 Fraction Collector Set Fraction Site FRACTION_SITE
0.19 UV/VIS Detector Autozero Channels
0.20 System Controller Synchronize
0.21 Data Channels Start
2.50 Fraction Collector Start Collection
6.00 Fraction Collector Stop Collection
7.00 Data Channels Stop

A-6
Appendix A

Analysis Method

Sample Tracking
In the analysis method, you can add a Fraction
Site(s) column to the report. This column identifies
the tube location(s) into which a sample’s eluent
was collected.

1 Use the Analysis Method window to set analysis

conditions as required by your application. See
Section 4, Creating an Analysis Method for
details.

2 From the Report menu, choose Column Formats.

3 Add the Fraction Site(s) column to the unknown

report format. To do this:
a) Select the Unknown Report option button.
b) In the Column Contents list box, click
beneath the last column to add a column
there. Or, to insert the column between two
columns, click on the column before which
you want the new column to be placed.
c) Choose Fraction Site(s) in the Contents list
box.
d) Choose Insert.
e) Choose OK to exit the dialog.

4 Repeat the above to add the column to the

calibrator, unknown summary, and calibrator
summary report layouts.

A-7
 Appendix A

After the Run

Sample Tracking

To track the sample, open the data or report file.

Then use the commands in the View menu of the
Results window to display the injector tray and/or
fraction collector tray, or to select a different sample.
If an injector tray or fraction collector tray is not
associated with the sample, its command is gray in
the View menu. An example Results window is
shown on page A-1.

The Display All command automatically sizes and

shows the Results window, Samples dialog, injector
tray (if available), and fraction collector tray (if
available).

To view information for a different sample, double-

click on its description in the Samples dialog. You
can also double-click on a tube in the injector tray or
fraction collector tray and view information for the
corresponding sample. A message appears if there is
not a sample associated with a selected tube
location.

You can also view the fraction site(s) associated with

one or more areas of the chromatogram. When you
use the following procedures, the area between
selected fraction collector marks is white while non-
selected areas are gray. The corresponding fraction
site(s) in the Fraction Location window are red and
the other sites are cyan (light blue).

A-8
Appendix A

To view the fraction site(s) for: Do the following:

Sample Tracking
single point on the plot 1 Click on the cross-hairs tool ( ).
2 Move the mouse pointer to a
position between fraction collector
begin ( ) and end ( ) marks on the
plot.
3 Click and release the left mouse
button.

area on the plot 1 Click on the cross-hairs tool.

2 Move the mouse pointer to the plot.
3 Click the left mouse button and drag
to enclose the fraction collector
begin and end marks within a box.
Release the mouse button.

multiple points or areas 1 Click on the cross-hairs tool.

on the plot 2 While pressing the Ctrl key, select
fraction collector begin and end
marks as described above. Then
release the Ctrl key.

To turn off the cross-hairs tool, click on the arrow

tool ( ).

To remove the gray background, click on the

original view tool ( ).

To enlarge or reduce the size of the tray in the

injector tray or fraction collector tray window, click
in the window using the right mouse button. You
see a Scale menu for selecting sizing options.

A-9
File Extensions B

Following are the extensions of files that can be created or opened by you within UniPoint.

Extension File Type Description

.GPG permissions Contains group definition, group

permissions, password workflow, and
electronic record workflow information.

.GCT control method Specifies device control information to be

used during a run.

.GAN analysis method Defines the conditions used to analyze

acquired data.

.GOP operations list Lists step-by-step instructions for the run-

time actions of the HPLC system.

.GDT data Contains the raw data acquired during a

run, plus information on how the data was
collected.

.GR? report Contains report information for analyzed

samples. The question mark is a number
between 1 and 9.

.GB? calibration Contains the calibration plot(s) generated

for each standard peak during a run or
batch re-analysis. The question mark is a
number between 1 and 9.

.GAR re-analysis list Is a list of information for samples injected

during a run; provides for quick re-analysis
of data

B-1
 Appendix B

Extension File Type Description

File Extensions

.GLG log Is a record of the events that took

place during a run.

.GWK workspace Stores the arrangement of document

windows as they appeared on-screen.

.GIP injector protocol Contains program-like instructions

.GGP generic protocol to be executed by Gilson device(s).

.GIR injector routine Consist of individual commands that

.GGR generic routine have been grouped together; used
within protocols.

.CFG configuration Identifies the components of the

HPLC system.

B-2
Calculations C

Amount
For calibrators, the peak amount indicated in the peak table.

For unknowns reported in calibration report types, the amount of component is determined
using the calibration plot generated for calibrators.

If you specified nominal and actual amounts for an unknown, UniPoint automatically
adjusts the amount of material in each calculated peak and reports instead the amount that
would have been found if the sample had contained the nominal amount of unknown:

C-1
 Appendix C

For unknown samples in internal standard reports, UniPoint automatically adjusts for
Calculations

material that was lost during sample preparation and injection. The software uses the
following formula:

Adjusted Amount A = Amount A x (IS Actual Amount ÷ IS Observed Amount)

where:

Adjusted Amount A Is the adjusted amount calculated for component A in

the unknown sample. For the component peak, this
amount is appears under the Amount (int std) heading
in the unknown report.

Amount A Is the amount of component A in the unknown sample.

UniPoint obtains this amount using the calibration table
generated for calibrator injections for component A. To
report this amount, add the Amount column heading to
the unknown report format. See Report Format Review
and Modification on page 4-53.

IS Actual Amount Is the amount of internal standard added to the

unknown sample. You entered this amount in the Peak
Table dialog or in the operations list if the Internal
Standard Actual Amount check box was set the Peak
Table dialog of the analysis method. For the internal
standard peak, this amount appears under the Amount
(int std) heading in unknown report.

IS Observed Amount Is the amount of internal standard peak observed in the

unknown injection. UniPoint obtains this amount using
the calibration table generated for calibrator injections
for the internal standard.

If you specified the actual internal standard amount for an unknown, UniPoint adjusts
reported peak amounts:

If you specified actual amount, actual internal standard amount, and nominal amount
for an internal standard report type, UniPoint calculates the reported peak amount
using the above equation. It then inserts that amount for the calculated peak amount in
the equation used if actual and nominal amounts were indicated.

C-2
Appendix C

Amount %

Calculations
Percentage of the peak in relation to the total amount of all named peaks.

Area %

Asymmetry
Factor that identifies the shape of the peak. If this value is 1, the peak is symmetric. If
the peak is skewed to the right (tailing peak), this value is greater than 1. If the peak is
skewed to the left (fronting peak), this value is less than 1.

Back Resolution
Resolution of a peak in relation to next peak.

Back Slope
Slope at half height of peak’s descending edge.

C-3
 Appendix C

Capacity Factor
Calculations

Measures the degree of retention.

Coefficient of Determination

Coefficient of Variation

Correlation Coefficient
A measure of the mutual relationship between two variables.

End Value
The mV (or user units) at the end of the peak.

Front Resolution
Resolution of a peak in relation to previous peak.

Front Slope
Slope at half height of peak’s ascending edge.

C-4
Appendix C

Height

Calculations
Distance from the baseline to the maximum of the peak.

Height %

Mean

where x is a measurement (such as area, height, amount, and so on) and n is the number
of measurements.

Peak Start Time

Elapsed time between the point of injection and the start of the peak.

Peak End Time

Elapsed time between the point of injection and the end of the peak.

C-5
 Appendix C

Peak Width at Half Height

Calculations

Peak Width at Half Height = Time at Half Height of Descending Edge —

Time at Half Height of Ascending Edge

Peak Width at 10%

Peak Width at 10% = Time at 10% Height of Descending Edge —
Time at 10% Height of Ascending Edge

Plates
This value can be used to determine column efficiency.

% Concentration

Retention Time
Elapsed time between the point of injection and the maximum of the peak.

C-6
Appendix C

Standard Deviation

Calculations
where n is the number samples in which the peak was integrated and x is the area (or
height) determined each time the peak was integrated.

Standard Error of Estimate

Start Value
The mV (or user units) at the start of the peak.

Tailing Factor

C-7
GSIOC Utility D

The GSIOC Utility allows you to issue commands to Gilson GSIOC instruments outside of
UniPoint. Gilson Customer Service may ask you to use this utility to verify that an
instrument is connected correctly to the computer. For communication to occur, the Gilson
instrument must be connected via an RS-232 connection to the computer or connected via a
GSIOC connection to a Gilson interface instrument that is connected to the computer.

D-1
 Appendix D

Starting the GSIOC Utility

GSIOC Utility

1 Locate the GSIOC Utility (GSUTIL32.EXE) using

Windows Explorer or the shortcut at Start—
Programs—Gilson Applications—Utilities—
GSIOC Utility. During UniPoint installation, this
utility was stored to C:\GILSON\UTIL unless
the installation path was changed.

2 Start the utility. The GSIOC Utility window

appears.

D-2
Appendix D

Using the GSIOC Utility

GSIOC Utility
Reviewing the Port, IRQ, and Baud
Information
In the GSIOC Utility window, review the COM port,
IRQ, and baud information. If any information is
incorrect or missing, close the GSIOC Utility and use
the GSIOC Configuration Utility to update the
information. Refer to Appendix E.

Listing GSIOC Instruments

Using the GSIOC Utility, you can determine the
instruments currently connected to the computer.

1 Click Scan!

The Unit ID box displays the current GSIOC

instruments and their Unit IDs.

If all Gilson instruments are not listed, ensure

that the proper RS-232 or GSIOC connection
exist between the computer and Gilson
instruments.

D-3
 Appendix D

Sending Commands
GSIOC Utility

Using the GSIOC Utility, you can send commands to

Gilson instruments. Each instrument has a set of
commands that it understands. A complete list of
GSIOC commands for any instrument is given in its
user’s guide.

1 Type or select the unit ID assigned to the

instrument in the Unit ID box. If you don’t know
the Unit ID, click Scan! to reveal a list box with
the GSIOC instruments and their Unit IDs.

2 In the Command box, type the command string.

Commands consist of strings of no more than 40

characters that specify an instruction to the
specified instrument.

3 Click on the appropriate command button to

select a command type according to the function
of the desired command. The command is issued
when you select the command type.

Buffered commands send instructions to an

instrument. These commands are executed one
at a time.

Immediate commands request status information

from an instrument. These commands are
executed immediately, temporarily interrupting
other commands in progress.

4 Monitor the instrument’s response to your

command in the Response area of the box. The
response to a successfully completed buffered
command is a period (.). Immediate status
responses also appear in this area. Refer to the
user’s guide for the Gilson instrument for a
description of the valid responses to immediate
commands.

D-4
GSIOC Configuration Editor E

The GSIOC Configuration Editor enables you to modify COM (serial communications) port,
IRQ (interrupt request), and baud rate information. Or, you can use this editor if incorrect
information appears in the GSIOC Utility window.

E-1
 Appendix E

1 Locate the GSIOC Configuration Editor

GSIOC Configuration Editor

(GSCONFIG.EXE) using Windows Explorer or

the shortcut at Start—Programs—Gilson
Applications—Utilities—GSIOC Configuration
Editor. During UniPoint installation, this editor
was stored to C:\GILSON\UTIL unless the
installation path was changed.

2 Start the editor. The GSIOC Configuration Editor

window appears.

3 In the Port box, indicate the computer’s serial

communications port (COM) port to which the
Gilson interface instrument (such as the liquid
handler or 506C System Interface) is connected.

4 Click 19200 or 9600 to select the baud. The baud

is the rate of data transmission between the
computer and the Gilson instrument.

5 Click OK to save the changes. A message box

appears indicating that the computer must be
restarted before any changes become effective.

E-2
Gilson Executable (.GEX) File F

You need to set up a Gilson executable (.GEX) file whenever you want UniPoint to start or
communicate with an executable .EXE file, such as the kind created by the Gilson 719
Sampler Manager Software to control XL version injectors.

The .GEX file tells UniPoint where the .EXE for the sampler program is located and what
type of inputs it requires. The .GEX file consists of the following lines:

[GEX]
Command =
Prompt =
Default =
Limit =

Detailed descriptions of the lines follow.

GEX. The [GEX] header identifies the file as a .GEX file.

Command. The Command line specifies the location of the .EXE file. It also identifies what
kind, and how many, parameters are required by the .EXE file. Each parameter is placed
between brackets, {}.

F-1
 Appendix F

To identify the type of information to enter for a

Gilson Executable (.GEX) File

parameter:

# Numeric field specifier. Also controls output

format; i.e., {#.##} == %.2f, {###} == %3d

* String format specifier; i.e. {*} == %s

X Check box; i.e. {Xp1:p2}. Returned value is p1

for unchecked, p2 checked.

r Radio button group; i.e. “{rn:rsp1:rsp2:...:rspn}”

where n is the number of buttons in the group,
followed by n response (rsp) strings. See Prompt
section below to specify individual button
labels. Returned value is selected rsp string.

c Combination drop down/text box; i.e.

“{cn:rsp1:rsp2:...:rspn}” where n is number of
items in the combination box, followed by n
response (rsp) strings. See Prompt section below
to specify individual labels for items in a combi-
nation box. Returned value is selected rsp
string.

Fx File/Type - This field takes a file-path of a

specific type indicated by the character immedi-
ately following the F. Supported file types are:
C - Control Method
A - Analysis Method
G - Gilson Executable (.GEX file)

File template immediately follows the Fx; i.e.

{FC Control Method%*.gct%} specifies a control
method file with an extension of GCT. Use “%”
to separate the file description from file
template(s).

S Individual sample from a tray; i.e. {S}.

^x Command type flag - where x specifies type of

command:
^B == Buffered GSIOC
^I == Immediate GSIOC
^X == run .GEX file

F-2
Appendix F

User input fields may be grouped with constant

Gilson Executable (.GEX) File

text using the “|” character. At command
invocation time, if there is no user input
corresponding to an input field, that input field
and any constant text grouped with it is not
included in the command string.

Prompt. The Prompt line contains labels for each of

the input fields. These labels appear in UniPoint
when the .GEX is identified in the control method.

To separate the prompt strings, use the “|” symbol.

If a section of the prompt string is for a radio (or
option) button, individual button labels are
separated by “@”.

If a section of the prompt string is for a radio

button, the group box label is the first element of
the prompt and is separated from the individual
button labels by a “~” symbol. The button labels
follow immediately and are separated from each
other by “@”, e.g. “Group Box
label~button1@button2”.

Combination box prompts are similar to radio

button groups; the first label preceding the “~” is
used to label the combination box itself, e.g.
“Combination Box Label~item 1@item 2@item 3”.

F-3
 Appendix F

Limit. The Limit line contains the range limits for a

Gilson Executable (.GEX) File

command parameter and specifies whether or not

the user is required supply input. To separate limits
ranges use the “|” symbol. If the first character in a
limit range is “r”, a user input is required;
otherwise, omit the “r”.

If the command parameter has a continuous

allowed range between low and high limits, the
values are separated with “:”. If the command
parameter has a discrete number of allowed values,
these values are separated with “,”. For no limit
checking, use “$”.

Example: To convey that the first parameter is

optional and restricted to the range 0 through 10,
the second entry of a command has no limits, and
the required third parameter can only accept 20,
50, and 75 as legal values, the limit string would
contain:

“0:10|$|R20,50,75”

If the first character of the string is “R”, this is a

required input field, and the user may not leave
this field blank. If the command parameter has a
continuous allowed range between high and low
limits, the high and low values are separated with
“:”. If the command parameter has a discrete
number of allowed values, separate these values
with “,”. Multiple limits ranges are delimited with
“|” characters.

Note: If there is an empty field between “|”s, place

a “$” between each “|”. This indicates that the
second entry of a command has no limits, while the
first parameter is restricted to the range 0 through
10 and the third parameter can only accept 20,50
and 75 as legal values, the limit string would
contain: “0:10|$|20,50,75”.

F-4
Appendix F

Default. The Default line contains “|” delimited

Gilson Executable (.GEX) File

default values for each field identified in the
Command line. To specify a default value for the
first Command field of 0.33, no default for the
second, and “Caffeine” for the third, the string
would be:

“0.33|$|Caffeine”

Example
Contents of file INJ_231.GEX created for the
example 719 program INJ_231.PAS supplied with
UniPoint.

[GEX]
Command= c:\gilson\gex\inj_231.exe |{#} |{#}
|{#} |{r2:”TOTAL,”PARTIAL}
|{r3:”GSIOC,”CONTACT,”TIME} |{#}
Prompt = Sample Number:|Volume (ul):|Rack
Code:|Inject Mode~Total@Partial|Coordination
Mode~GSIOC@Contact@Time|Contact Num. or
Time|
Default= $|30|$|”TOTAL|”GSIOC|$|
Limit = 1:80|0:3000|0:106|$|$|1:9999|

F-5
UniPoint File Protection G

In UniPoint, you can protect UniPoint files from being modified and saved to the same
name unless the user indicates the appropriate password.

In the operations and re-analysis files, you can indicate that columns for a password
protected file can be modified even if the user did not type the correct password.

Note: This feature is not available if electronic record management features were enabled by
the system administrator.

G-1
 Appendix G

Setting Up File Protection

UniPoint File Protection

When UniPoint is installed, the default setting is

that the UniPoint File Protection Feature is disabled
and no password has been indicated. To set a
password and choose files to password protect, do
the following:

1 Choose System Administration from the File

menu. (This selection is only available if an
administrator is the current logged on user.)

2 Select the Enable radio button for the UniPoint

File Protection Feature then click Set Password.

3 When the New Password dialog appears, type

the password in the box then click OK.

4 Verify the password you just typed by retyping

it then clicking OK. (If the password does not
match, you see a message box. Repeat the
process of indicating the password and then
verifying it.)

5 When the Password Protection dialog appears,

select the file type in the list box then click to
check the Password Required check box. Select
the file type again.

6 Repeat the previous step for each file type to

password protect.

7 Click OK.

G-2
Appendix G

Indicating New Password

UniPoint File Protection

To indicate a new password:

1 Close all open document windows using the

Close All command in the Window menu. If it
appears, the Navigator may remain on-screen.

2 Choose System Administration from the File

menu. (This selection is only available if an
administrator is the current logged on user.)

3 Click Set Password.

4 When Password Verification dialog appears,

type the current password and choose OK.

5 When the Password Protection dialog (shown on

previous page) appears, choose New Password.

6 When the New Password dialog (shown on

previous page) appears, type the password in
the box then click OK.

7 Verify the password you just typed by retyping

it and choosing OK. (If the password does not
match you see a message indicating that. You
then repeat the process of indicating the
password and then verifying it.)

8 When the Password Protection dialog appears,

click OK to exit.

G-3
 Appendix G

Removing Password Protection

UniPoint File Protection

To remove password protection from a file type:

1 Close all open document windows using the

Close All command in the Window menu. If it
appears, the Navigator may be left on-screen.

2 Choose System Administration from the File

menu. (This selection is only available if an
administrator is the current logged on user.)

3 When prompted, type the current password.

The Password Protection dialog appears.

4 Select the document type in the list box and

remove the check mark from the Password
Required check box.

5 Choose OK.

To remove password protection completely:

1 Access the Password Protection dialog as

described above.

2 Select the Disable radio button for the UniPoint

File Protection Feature.

G-4
UniPoint Software History H

Following is a brief description of the changes made to each version of UniPoint. Please be
aware that each version includes any changes made in prior version(s).

H-1
 Appendix H

version 1.0 Initial release.

UniPoint Software History

version 1.1 Incorporated functionality for inserting user

comments into reports via the Edit Notes command of
Control Method, Analysis Method, and/or Operations
List window.

version 1.2 Added the sample tracking capability for interactive

post-run display of a sample’s chromatogram, injector
tray location, and fraction collector tray location(s).

Incorporated control of the Gilson 122 Fluorometer

and 402 Syringe Pump.

Added a Fraction Site(s) column selection to report

formats in the Analysis Method window.

Added ability to print calibration reports at run time

to the report output options in the Analysis Method
window.

Added the original view tool and cross-hairs tool to

the Operations window.

Changed fraction collection begin and end symbols

from a gray arrow to a green triangle and vertical line
at the start of collection and a red triangle and vertical
line at the end of collection.

Added a View menu to the Results, Calibration, and

Routines windows.

Added the ability to automatically store the manual

strip chart to the output directory identified in the Run
File Storage dialog.

Changed the appearance of the generic device tool in

the Control Method, Protocol, and Routines windows.

H-2
Appendix H

Added ability to name data channels in the analysis

UniPoint Software History

method without browsing to a control method.

Provided for automatically incrementing the sample

description when generating multiple steps in the
operations list.

Added the Event check box in the Contact dialog

(Device menu) in the Control Method, Protocol, and
Routines window.

Included the 715 Data Translator Software that

converts 715 data files to a format that can be read by
UniPoint on the installation disks for UniPoint Version
1.21.

version 1.3 Incorporated control of the Gilson Supercritical Fluid

System.

H-3
 Appendix H

version 1.4 Incorporated control of 233 XL Sampling Injector as

UniPoint Software History

both the injector and fraction collector in a system.

Added the functionality to do continuous fraction

collection.

Modified the fraction collector Stop Collection

command so that it advanced the collection head to
the next tube.

Added a confirmation box that appears when closing

UniPoint.

Added the ability to select multiple protocol files to be

browsed into a control method.

Added the ability to double-click in a text box and

access its Browse dialog.

Added pop-up menu (accessed via right mouse click

in table pane) for opening referenced files, copying
table cells, and formatting columns.

Added capability to browse for generic protocols in

the Detector dialog and Fraction Collector dialog
(Device menu) and to set events for those protocols in
the Detector Event dialog and Fraction Collector
Event dialog (Event menu) in control methods.

Added a Delay Volume text box to the Fraction

Collector Options dialog (Device menu/Fraction
Collector command/Options button).

H-4
Appendix H

Added Tray Location error handling capability to

UniPoint Software History

control methods.

Added fraction site information to the Resume Run

dialog (Run menu) in the Operations window.

In the Results window, added functionality that allows

the user to select points on the plot and identify the
tubes into which specific fractions were collected.

In the Samples dialog (Edit menu) of the Results

window, added functionality that allows the user to
select another sample and overlay its chromatogram in
the graph pane.

Added a pop-up menu (accessed via a right mouse

click) that automatically offsets the traces in the graph
pane of the Results window.

version 1.5 Incorporated control of the VALVEMATE Valve

Actuator.

Incorporated control of 215 Liquid Handler/819 Valve

Actuator for injection and/or fraction collection.

H-5
 Appendix H

version 1.6 Provided integrated 206 fraction collector control

UniPoint Software History

and a new Set Collection Valve command for Gilson

model 201 through 206 Fraction Collectors, and 233
XL Sampling Injector.

Provided the ability to specify custom calculations

and have the results appear in reports.

Provided integrated control of a Gilson 170 Diode

Array Detector and new manipulation and processing
capabilities for acquired spectral data.

Removed integrated control of a Gilson 160 Diode

Array Detector. (Note: The software still provides a
File Import command in the Results window to select
and view traces in a DAD data file.)

Provided the ability to generate operations list steps

via the Results window.

Provided miscellaneous user interface changes which

included:

• a new Options dialog (accessed via the File

menu).
• multiple step generation in the operations list by
browsing to a tray file.
• replacing the Calibrator, Unknown, Calibrator
Summary, and Unknown Summary commands in
the analysis method’s Report menu with the
Column Formats command.
• the ability to turn on/off viewing and printing of
the components of the analysis report’s
annotation.
• the ability to turn on/off viewing of fraction site
labels in the Results window.
• the ability to normalize traces in the Results
window.
• additional tools in the Analysis windows toolbar:
channel scales tool, peak table tool, report type
tool, and report output tool.
• additional tools in the Results window:
integration tool, peak table tool, analysis channel
tool, and spectral library tool.

H-6
Appendix H

version 1.64 Added driver to allow UniPoint to run under

UniPoint Software History

Windows 95 operating system.

version 1.65 Incorporated fixes to known software problems related

to control of the 170 Diode Array Detector and the FC
201 and FC 202 Fraction Collectors. It also incorporates
a fix to a problem with synchronizing control of the
215 Liquid Handler with Gilson Sampler Software.

version 1.70 Added driver (GSIOC.VXD) to allow UniPoint to run

under the Windows NT® operating system.

Incorporated fixes to known software problems

associated with configuration modifications, problems
in the functioning of UniPoint, and problems involving
display of data.

version 1.71 Incorporated user interface changes related to the Data

Channel Scales—Analysis dialog and the Report
Output dialog.

Incorporated fixes to known software problems.

version 1.80 Incorporated control of the 151 UV/Vis Detector, 155

UV/Vis Detector, 215 Nebula Liquid Handler/819
Injection Module, Micro 215 Liquid Handler/841
Micro-Injection Module, and Multiple-Probe 215
Liquid Handler/889 Multiple-Injection Module.

version 1.90 Incorporated control of the 321-H Series pump, 322-H

Series pump, 152 UV/Vis Detector, 156 UV/Vis
Detector, and the 235/235P Autoinjector.

version 2.00 Incorporated control of the 849 Multiple-Injection

Module.

Added the rack file for the Code 542 Peltier Rack
(CODE_542.GRK) to the Tray Editor.

Added example routines (215_PREP.GIR) and protocol

(215_PREP.GIP) for controlling a preparative system.

H-7
 Appendix H

version 2.10 Includes modified routines and protocols that

UniPoint Software History

improve the performance of the 235/235P

Autoinjector (235_ROUT.GIR, 235_CEN.GIP,
235_PAR.GIP, and 235_TOT.GIP) and preparative
scale systems (215_PREP.GIP).

Added two selections to the Report Column Format

dialog box in the Analysis Method (Sample Location
and Additional Info.).

version 3.0 Incorporated control of the 331 and 332 Semi-Prep

Pumps, 333 and 334 Preparative Pumps, and
NEBULA™ Series Septum-Piercing 235/235P
Autoinjector.

Added the following features:

• The control method annotation now lists the

reference wavelength and wavelength width for
the 170 Diode Array Detector and the Channel
Scales range is now listed in AU instead of
millivolts.

• The log file now expresses flow rates to five

decimal places (instead of two).

• Enhancements have been added to accommodate

the new features provided by the Gilson/Finnigan
LC/MS NEBULA Analysis Systems Software
Version 2.00. These new features include mass
spectral data reporting, positive/negative polarity
acquisition, automatic adduct ion calculation, and
automatic startup and shutdown of the Finnigan
AQA mass spectrometer.

Added rack files for the Code 219 Rack

(CODE_219.GRK), Code 80 Rack (CODE_S80.GRK),
Code 356 Rack (CODE_356.GRK), and Code 517 Rack
(CODE_517.GRK) to the tray editor.

Incorporated the updated Tray Editor (version 1.10).

H-8
Appendix H

version 3.1 Incorporated control of the 215 Synthesis

UniPoint Software History

Workstation.

Added routines and protocols for using an above seal

rinse with the tee injection port on a 235/235P
Autoinjector and the 841 Micro-Injection Module.

Incorporated fraction collection improvements:

• Improved response time between peak detection

and movement of collection valve

• Increased resolution of start fraction and end

fraction event markers

• Fraction start and end times are now listed in the

log file and are available as headers in the Analysis
Report

Added rack files for the Code 211H Rack

(COD_211H.GRK), Code 220 Rack (CODE_220.GRK),
Code 224 Rack (CODE_224.GRK), Code 225 Rack
(CODE_225.GRK), Code 226 Rack (CODE_226.GRK),
and Code 223 Rack (CODE_223.GRK).

version 3.2 Incorporated control of the 845Z Injection Module.

Added rack files for the Code 204F Rack

(COD_204F.GRK), Code 211F Rack (COD_211F.GRK),
and Code 222F Rack (COD_222F.GRK).

version 3.3 Incorporated control of the 350 Micro Pump.

Added rack files for the Code 228 Rack

(CODE_228.GRK) and RH2 Rack Heightener
(CODE_RH2.GRK).

H-9
 Appendix H

version 5.0 This version of UniPoint runs in Windows 2000 and

UniPoint Software History

Windows XP Professional.

New Features:

• Electronic Record Management (ERM) features to

facilitate user compliance with electronic record/
signature regulations

• Ability to extract Channel Data (.GDT) files from

Report (.GR?) files

• Display Fraction Collector Options (Delay Volume

and Full Scale) in the Control Method Annotation

UniPoint LC System Software Version 5.0 includes fixes

to the following software problems:

• Deleting steps in Control Methods no longer causes a

general protection fault (GPF)

• Deleting a data channel no longer corrupts the

Control Method

H-10